Canva Design Essentials

1. Intro to the Canva Essentials Course: Hello. My name is Dan Scott, and welcome to the Canva Design Essentials course. During the course, you'll learn how to master all of the tools, but also I'll share all of the design fundamentals to enable you to create beautiful real world designs easily in Campa. So who am I? I'm Dan Scott. I've been a professional designer for about 17 years now. I've won multiple teaching awards, and my both in person and online courses have been attended by more than 1 million people, just like you, you'll be given a brief to create design work for your own unique store, along with lots of class projects that you can create all sorts of designs and graphics to bring your brand to life. We'll start easy and fun with a series of social media posts, working on images, color, type, and graphics. You'll learn how to use all of Canvas new fancy AI tools like the one click background remover and image generator, you'll develop a professional logo for your company. Working through all of the tools, techniques, and shortcuts designers use to pick a design, color, and type for your logo. You'll master text heavy documents using Canvas dock feature, utilizing things like styles and tables. Presentations will come a breeze. With your customizing teplates or building something from scratch, you'll learn how to make consistent eye catching presentations using layouts, charts, and type animations. You'll bring your work to life with video editing and animation and Canva. I'll share all the tricks of the trade. Now, this course is aimed at people who are new to Canva and maybe new to design in general. Whether you're doing work for yourself or your client, your school, doesn't matter. We're going to start right at the beginning and work our way through step by step. Alright, it is time. Don't miss out, sign up and go from Canva Zero to Canva hero. I hope he takes better care of us than he does that plant back there. I know. Well, look at it. I'm sorry, plant. Ah. Talking to them helps, right? Actually, watering them probably is better. I'm gonna go water the plant. You sign up for the course. I'll see you inside. 2. Getting Started with Canva: Alright. You're inside. Welcome. First things first getting started is you need to download the exercise files. Okay. There'll be a link on the page for those just so that you can keep up with everything we're doing in the course. Inside those exercise files, there is a shortcut sheet. You can download that, print it up and stick an ST computer and highlight the ones that you think are really useful. We're not going to go through every single shortcut in this course. We're a central link. But there are some ones that are just makes sense. They're easy. Alright, next up, make sure you install Canva or sign up for it, at least. You can use the Canva in the browser, or you can download a separate app and use it on your desktop. They do the exact same thing. They look the same thing. It's up to you whether you want to use Canva in your browser or camera on the desktop. The same thing. I'm not sure I'm typing. Now, when you do sign up for Canva, make sure you use my ink here because there is a free and a pro version of Canva. Obviously, the free version is free. The P, you pay for, and there are some features that are limited in Canva to pro only. And what I'm going to do is if you are doing this course, my advice is to even if you're going to keep the free version, you're like, No, never gonna pay for it. Okay, do the 30 day trial for the pro version and just cancel it before the end of the 30 days while you're doing this course because, yeah, I'm not going to hide from all the pro versions. There's so much you can do for the free version. So if you're only going to stick to free, you'll totally be fine in this course. But sign up for the 30 days, get a sense of what the pro features are. So you can make a decision whether you want to go back to free or stay a free. It's totally up to you, but do it so you get to follow along with the course. And if you use my Link here, where is it? See somewhere. If you do use my Link, Canva does give me a referral fee. It doesn't cost you anymore, just so next is, I get excitable and I talk really fast. I think I talk fast. Some people think I talk too slow. Either way, you can speed me up or slow me down. There's a cog over here in the corner. You click on it, and you'll be able to change the speed, either slow, slightly drunk sounding Dan or super chuk monk Dan It's up to you. And lastly, Canva changes so fast. It's kind of a dynamic, growing blossoming product, which is a pain in the butt for me as an instructor because they keep moving things around. So if there are big changes, I'll update the videos. If they're small changes, I'll have a little pop up. Go Taylor with your pop ups. Have a lookout for those, and Taylor will put those in if there are small little change but just keep an eye out. You might be the first to see the change when they roll it out. So, have a look at the comments, have a look for pop ups. Or I'll cut in and update it, but it is changing, so let me know in the comments, if you spot something that's moved. All right. That is it. We've got it started. Let's get into the course. All right. Before you go, you know how I just mentioned, there will be potential updates. They've gone and updated it. While I'm recording this course, I've had to come back here and just point it out. It's an easy one. But during this first half of this course, watch this. When I click on something like text here, watch this. This is a video of me playing in the course. I can go to just to click on this little double arrow and all the text stuff would appear over here. This is true for a lot of things. They appear on this right hand side. They've decided that it's better on the left hand side. That's all that's really changed. So I just kind of moved it from the right hand side to the left hand side. I'll show you in the new version of Canva. It is here, if I go into say text here, can you see it appears on the left hand side here. Now if I want to go to effX same thing. They're no longer on the right, they're on the left hand side. No, Biggie, it was on the right. Now it's on the left. The yougo. Those are the kind little UA updates that Canva is always making that cause my life pain, but make the product better, which is good for you. There you go. Now you can start the course. Let's go. 3. Your Canva Design Brief: Alright. Hey, in this video, I'm going to give you a brief for the course. Everyone's going to get something unique. That's why it's called the Random Project generator, but it's all going to be very similar so that you'll get a new client, and you'll get a different animal. You'll see why in a second. But you'll be able then to work on all the class projects and build something unique for you, for your portfolio, so that when you do submit your class projects or include this in your portfolio, everyone doesn't look the same. The first thing is go to random project generator.com, something that me and the team made. Okay? Find Canva design essentials, click on that into your current city or town. Okay, generate my project, and this is the brief. I ended up with fox camping and outdoor. Yours will be a different animal and a different business here. Okay? If there's a retry button down the bottom, don't use it, especially don't use it more than three times, okay? And you'll get a different combination of these. Stick with the one you get. Clicking the button until you find something you already know, I don't know. It's not going to push you as a designer. Everyone's brief is basically the same, though. So basically, you've been hired as the do it all marketer designer for this company. Okay? So it's an old 30 years of history in your city. It's being taken over by the dug has got 1 million ideas. Wants to do 1 million projects all at once. It's really common for it was one of my first jobs. If you're using the learning Canva for your own business, you're going to have 1 million different jobs to do. It's going to look after a lot of different use cases of Canva, if you're a student, if you're a teacher, there is so much you end up doing in Canvas. So this is a nice good overall brief. She is going to make you do a whole bunch of things through this course. So be prepared for a whirlwind of creativity. So have a read through it, download it as a PNG here so that you've got it or copy and paste it out and get ready for the course. Don't hit retry three times, I warned you. 4. Creating Designs in Canva: Hello. Hey, in this video, we have been asked to do our first project, for our clients. It's gonna be an Instagram post. Now, even if you're not doing social media in Canva, a lot of us are, but even if you aren't, the skills are the same that we're going to learn for doing print ready stuff and video. But I figured Instagram's a good place to get started. And very excitingly, we're going to create a big blank document. I'll show you how to make them, and I'll show you how important it is to kind of pick the format first because then Canva gives you relevant suggested templates that you can start from plus a tiny bit of navigating the system. Let's jump in and make a big blank document. Very exciting. All right. Let's make our post. Now, I'm on my home tab, see along the top here, and I've clicked on the little home button as well. We're kind of this welcome screen. This will change. Literally last week, the created design button was over there, so yours might be moved around as well. And one of the things that were a little bit confusing for me when I got started, I want to create an Instagram square post. Oh, look, there's a button. Yours might not be there. What happens is they change it depending on your use case. Let's say we do have it and we click on it, okay it opens up in a tab and gives us a blank Instagram square box. But if I go back to the home screen there and I go, actually, I want to create a design this time and to be under social media and I want it to be Instagram square post, you're like, which way is better? It doesn't matter. You end up at the exact same place. There are so many ways of making a document in Canva, but they all lead to the same place. Same with this. If I go this little plus button and I go, Oh, look, Instagram square post. Is that different? No, same, same. There are a couple other ways of doing it. But we end up in the same finish result part. Now, before we get to make our own stuff, one of the first things you're shown is templates. What it does is it looks at the size of the page that you've made and goes, Hey, you want Instagram post. Guess what? I got loads of templates that fit that shape and suitable for an Instagram post. These templates here will change depending on what you've created. If you said, I want to make an Instagram post, hey, Presto, we've got a whole bunch of templates for Instagram posts. If you want something different, you got to just be very intentional. When you make a new document, you say, right, I want phone wallpaper. It's going to give you templates based on what might be a very good phone if you can't see the templates. If I click on the word design, there is an option to click on it and close it down. You want to open it back up, you just hover above it. Or if you click it once, it opens for good and you got to close it down with a little cross. If you can't find it, mash away at this. You'll eventually see it. Now to apply a template, let's go back to one of these first ones I made. Let's go through. Let's do a search, let's say cafe, and it's going to give me templates based on cafe. I'm going to click on this that looks cool. I've got my cafe template. I can now go through, click on it, start changing the text too. Our own brand, and we can start making adjustments. Now, while templates are great to get started, they can be a little bit confusing as well because you don't really know how things are created. We're going to go through, make stuff ourselves, build it all up from scratch, so that you can make your own templates and so that you can start using other people's templates like a boss. Lastly, before we wrap up, let's close down all of the tabs that we've opened up. You just hit the little cross in the corners here or Control W on a Mac. Control W on a PC to close them all down and we should only have the Canva tab open. I've brought you back to here because can you see here a whole bunch of untitled documents. That's because when I was clicking on Instagram post, a few times, it's gone made a whole bunch of documents and they're just called untitled, not very good. He's going to clean everything up by going to let's do this first one here is move to trash button. You can do it all for the ones that we just created if you are following along. I'm going to he the ticks and all the corners to say, I want all of these. These are lots of things I was messing around with. All of them. Can you see on the bottom here, I'm going to hit the trash can so that all of these go into the trash. Now we're nice and tidy again and we can get started. I'll see you in the next video. 5. Working with free & paid Images in Canva: Hello. In this video, I'm going to show you how to work with images inside of Canva. We've been asked to make an Instagram post. It's about a re opening advertising campaign they're doing. I'll show you how to find images, find free ones, find paid ones, how much of the paid ones. Am I allowed to use the free ones commercially? I'll show you how to filter them and replace them. Then we'll add a little bit of text. Nothing fancy, but all good designs start with great photos, let's jump in. Let's get started by creating our Instagram square post any which way you can. What we're going to do is we're going to bring in an image. Design general overview of things, templates and styles, we'll get into those. Most of your work though is done in this elements tab. Hey, there's elements tab has, things like shapes and graphics and images and loads of different stuff. They squish them all into elements. So we're going to break down those parts as we go through. So we're going to start with if you scroll down, scroll down, so click on elements. You want to find the one that says photos and we're going to go see all just like, right, gets us into photos. Now, in terms of the photos, you're allowed to use these commercially, okay? They've gone through and check them for you. Well, they've come from places, even though they might be free. They do have the licensing to use them. Campa has filtered them so that, you know, you're not getting ones that you're going to get in trouble for. If you really want to check. Okay, let's first of all, I'm going to type up the top here and search. I'm going to go camping, because that's kind of my company, you type in yours, and let's find an image. You're going to find this one here. I'm going to go to the little dots. And if you go to here, the eyeball, it says, licensing Made Simple What's allowed, and it tells you what's allowed, what's not. In my case for my company, I'm allowed to use it I'm allowed to use it for commercial uses. That's perfect. The things I can't use it for, I can't group these images and try and resell them. I can't use them in something that I want to also trademark. That's not what I want to do. I want to create aerial or commercially viable, good for school. That's one way to check. The other thing you need to check for images is this pro versus not P. When you've got the free account, you can use these images, but you pay for them. Let me switch, I've got a free account. You eat there. This is my other account. Wey, it's using the old layout, things change all the time. You can still get biking you see, it's quite different It's dark but elements are still there. It works the same sort again, elements if I go down to photos and go see all because I'm using the free account and I type in camping. The difference is that in the paid version, I can use all these, whereas the free version, I need to stick to the ones that don't have the crown on it. I can add these, no problem. The ones that do have the crowns on them, so I do want to use this one here, got to drag it on the page. I can use it, but you can see it has a watermark. I can't really use it. I could use it to go to the client and say, Hey, I'm thinking about using this image and they'll say, Okay, I really like that image. Get rid of the watermark. You can see I can remove watermark and it's going to give me a price to do it. They want me to sign up for premium, the pro version. Might be the reason to go over, but you can also often purchase it in this case, for one euro. Check how much it costs before you go and pitch it to the client, but know that you can use these pro features if you want to pay for them. Now, the other weird thing is the filtering. If I'm in the free account, I go to filtering. Currently, these are my filters. But if I switch my P one, I'm going to click my fingers. You're ready? Right I'm back in my account that I paid for. I got two of them running. Watch this. I'm going to filters here, and I can filter by free and P. They took it away from the free version, which is sneaky. But that's the way it is. Now I can go through and filter by free and Pro, only if I'm on the pro version, it would be really handy to do it in the free version, right? That's part of the hassle of being on the free version is you got to scroll, scroll, scroll. Find a good one. It's a pro version. All right, that's a free. Everyone's got their own budget, so sometimes you have to do free, and that's just the way it is. But I also respect that these photographers, they're always better. The good ones, the pro ones are always nicer. I don't mind paying for them. I'm looking for clients that can pay for them up to you. Everyone's different. Regardless of free or paid, these filters are useful. I want quite a dark background because I want to then put text over the top of it. We'll go through some of these basic filtering. I want to pick a color. I like picking these dark ones. Then to close it down, weirdly, you click on that again. It's a bit strange. But you can see it's dark camping ones. There's a lot more, obviously, dark camping ones because it's let's say that I'm doing camping and my brand could really use to match other things on the page, an orange one. I can close that down again and look at that. It cuts camping down to orange flavored tints. That's useful. I use the dark one quite often. You can see through here, square vertical, horizontal, depending on the format. Ours is square, but we can cut it to a square. I'm not too worried about that. You can't get very specific on the color that you want. You can click on this one and say, I really need this shade of blue here, drag this slider along, apply it, and it's going to give me images that fit that. It's quite specific. It's done a pretty good job. Actually, no, it hasn't. There's not a lot of camp sites or camping that has that color in it. So I'm going to go back to my dark one. So you type in yours? If you're a tattoo studio or a garden send to type in along the top there. Find one that you like either free or pro, I'm going to use. I like this one, you can either click and drag it out. That's what I tend to do, or you can just click at once and it page. We won't go through all the image features here. We'll go through the basics. You can flip it. I'm going to flip it horizontal. Rotating, it's done down here. Can you see the little double arrow here, click and rotate it. If you have something you like and you want to replace it, what you can do is you can over here, find something else, click hold and just drag it over the top of the image, and it will switch it out. I'm going to hit Undo to go backwards because I liked my original one. The undo key is this big button up here. You'll see, though, that's one of the shortcuts that you use the most Command Z on a Mac or Control Z on a PC. You can go. And B, forward and B. I use the undo all the time. Couple of things before we go images, you can actually right click it and say set as the background image, and it just squishes it into the background, and it will do that sometimes on its own. I can't make it do when I want it, but sometimes it does it and what you can do is you can right click it and say detach from the background. Right Clicks plays a pretty important part in Canva. You can click a lot of things, and it gives you all the options you need. One of the other things I want to introduce here, slow down Dn. All right. Is this Fike select on this, you'll notice you have this. It's contextual task bar. What it means is if I have an image selected, it gives me imagyf like the transparency of the image. Do I want to flip it? Do I want to crop it? Do I want to border around the outside of it? Border. Let's go nice big thick border. That will change. If I've got text selected, it'll give me text things. The one thing that I find quite useful, though, is see this little double arrow. I'm the C all guy. I want all the nerdy stuff. With the image selected, if I click on this, it gives me lots and lots of stuff. You can scroll in here. You can see there's my border, my transparency. It's just in a bigger box. Do I like it that way? I prefer it in this bigger way. It is up to you. It'll default back. Watch this. Click click back on and it goes back to the small version. I'm forever popping that out, what you'll find is, look, I can get to adjust and we'll go through adjusting images a little bit later on. But I can go to Magic Studio filters or look, Instagram style filters. We won't go through them all here, but I guess I just want to introduce this here where you can click on something, can be anything. You get the basics along the top, and you can go into the full mode over here, and then I can close it down with that cross. I want to do is actually before we go is tidy it up, I want to get rid of the border weight down to zero. I want to just the rotation and you're like, you can pretty much drag it around. Get it back to zero. But let's say that it's tricky. You can go to the little flout menu here to see all. Scroll down to the bottom. There's position and you'll see the Nodi way of doing it. Look, advanced. Rotation is advanced, but I can set it to zero. Lots of the time, everything you need along the top there, for anything a bit more detailed, click on the C A. Goes away if you have nothing selected. One last thing I want to do is I'm going to grab it up here. I'm going to drag the si, the bottom right hand corner, that'll scale it. I'm going to drag it to the edge. Don't worry if yours doesn't fit. We'll crop it all in the next video, but have something like this, and I want to add some text down the bottom here. We'll do text properly later on as well, but for the moment, you can see text is here. Click on it. I'm going to click Add Text Box. All I'm going to do is double click on it, and I'm going to type in. You can do this with me, reopening I just want a big bit of text, reopening. Let's move it by grabbing this little cross here is down the bottom here. It's white on a white background, which isn't good. I'm going to you see at the top here? When we had the image selected, we had image stuff when I have the text selected. Whatever that is. It is texti stuff. And I click on this A here. You can hover above them. They'll tell you what they do. Hey, let's go to text Color and pick anything from your solid colors. I don't mind what color it is right now. We'll do colors properly later on as well, how to pick really good ones for a brand. For the moment, pick something that you can see against the background. I'm going to make mine bold. I'm going to make it bigger. You can use the little plus here. Ticks bigger. It's loads easier just to grab the side like we did the image, the bottom right hand corner and just drag it up and go, reopening. Again, we'll cover text properly. I just want to get something on the page. All right. One last thing that I forgot to mention after I finished the video, I'm back. If you've got an image already on the page, we looked at how to check the licensing of something in the Elements panel. Something that's already on the page, just right click it and go down to Info. You're looking for this eyeball or sorry, the eyeball, the eye. Click on that and it's going to tell me I get to use it commercially and I get to use it for my social media. You will find everything in Canva comes with that kind default level. It's only when you get into some stranger use cases, we might have to dive in and check a little bit more about the licensing. But generally everything you find in Canva you can use for your job, or your school, for your personal projects, for your business. But again, I'm not a lawyer. Actually, not again. I didn't say it, but I'm not a lawyer. Double check the fine print, have it checked by a lawyer if you think you need to. But normally everything you find in Canva, at least find the elements panel will be something that you get to use. All right. That's it. I will see you in the next video. 6. How to crop photos in Canva: Hello. In this video, we're going to look at cropping images. Watch this. If I go into here, you can see we have chopped out parts of the image, so we can only see one part of the trees. Cropping is pretty easy. There are some cool smart cropping features and some automatic leveling's digging. All right, cropping. We might have stumbled across it already. If you have an image selected and you use the dots in the corners, you resize stuff. If you use these lines on the straight part, any of them, it will crop. You go. Now for a bit more detail, if I double click on it or use this option here, it doesn't matter. The crop button gets you into this mode, which looks a little confusing. It's not. I'm going to cancel or you double click on it, you end up in the same spot. It doesn't matter which way you go. What you'll now see is the image inside the frame. I click on the background, I can adjust the frame. If I want to adjust the image inside of the frame, I want to move it so that maybe the tint is lower. I'm going to drag this down, double click on it. Now I can drag the image inside of this box. So I can do all sorts of stuff. With it's selected, I can rotate this image. It will try and make sure that the image covers the whole frame, that square that window. I will get larger, if you do rotate it. You can rotate it over here, you can rotate it using this option. You can scale it by the corners in here. You can only scale it so that it does not get cut off by theme. Automatic options. If I hit Auto, in this document, it's going to look at it and see whether it can find the horizontal plane, the horizon line, that's what I wanted. I might work. Give it a Auto ago see if it lines it up and crops it and rotates it. Try the Smart Crop. Smart Crop will try and frame your image, and try and fit it all in. Let's go for something bigger and go to Smart Crop. It's going to crop it down to, that's what it thinks all the useful information in this image is. Yours will change depending on your image. The one thing you might see that I don't see at the moment is if you end up messing with your image for long enough, something called aspect ratio goes away. I'm going to click Okay. I've got my bring in another image. I'm going to show you a cool trick is let's say we like this one, the client likes it. I flip that one. Oh, it's because I flipped it. That's probably why. I bet you if I bring back that image now and double click on it. Always wondered why it went away. Now we both know. This didn't appear before. Aspect ratio doesn't matter freeform, we can just scale it how we want. Square is an easy apec ratio. It's one along the top by one down the side. For video, let's say going out to YouTube, they 16 by nine. That's that aspect ratio so that you know that this is the frame for something that will be cropped perfectly for YouTube. Thumbnail for YouTube or an image still that's going into your YouTube video. The opposite. 16 by 99 by 16 is just a vertical one. This is normally your phone size, so good for an Instagram story or an Instagram or a TikTok video, that portrait version. Typically a frame, like a photo frame on your I don't know, above your fire. Where I've got my photos is four by three. Won't get too far into it, but that's another thing that you will see that goes away turns out when you flip it. Done. One of the things I'll show in here because it's not quite cropping, but let's get rid of that one. If I have it selected, you've got rounded corners. It's not very exciting, but it's like cropping. That's the reason I'm throwing it into this video. I'm going to have none there, but just know that it's there. This cropping works the same if you set it as the background, so I'm going to click it and say set as background. You'll notice it's crop things and you're like, how do we get the stuff back? Just double click it like we did before or use the crop tool and you can say, right, I want to set the rotation back to zero and I want to just move it so that it's a better crop for my background because it just takes a guess or it just sticks it right in the middle. You can do adjustments that way. The last thing with cropping is often to keep some symmetry. We want an image. I'm going to right click and detach it from the background. I'm going to get my frame up in this corner here. I'm going to resize it to be full width and what I want to do is drag you'll see that it will snap to the middle, which is handy. You're unsure what the middle measurement is. Just keep dragging it close to it and it will you see, it's locking it in there. You can do the same with the height and the width. You'll see it'll lock it in there. I'm not sure where these extra lines are coming from. There are new things since the new change in the layout, but there you go. You can drag these things and get close to where you need it to be and it should snap. Now what I want to do for my one is I want to get it actually, three quarters of the way down and you'll notice that snaps as well. Watch watch he just goes who gets to there. It's pretty easy to get pretty aligned inside of Kemba. Dan, how do you crop it inside of a circle? That is very interesting and we'll do it in the next video because it's a different feture. But for now, that's it for cropping and I'll see you in the next video. 7. How to crop with Frames in Canva: Hello. Let's talk about frames. Frames are very similar to cropping, but they're actually separated out in Canva into a separate kind of function. So we're going to put something in a circle. Then we're going to put an image inside this kind of brushstroke thing. Let me show you another image. You can just drag things inside of frames. They're super useful. I'll also at the end, show you a little bit of document navigation. For those of you who are maybe a little bit new to Canva and how it all works. I'll share easy ways of zooming in and moving around at the end of this one. But let's get started with frames. Let's make frames work. So what we're going to do is if you haven't already noticed and watch this, you can either there's two options when using elements. This panel here that we use a lot. If I hover over here, it goes away, comes back. It's up to you whether you like that or not. If you click on it, it stays open forever. I'm going to click on it so it stays open. You can close it down by hitting the cross. Up to you. What we're looking for here is an elements. We're looking for frames. You can either use these little shortcuts. These do change, and you can scroll down, scroll down, scroll down stickers, photos, videos, audio, blah blah blah, blah, blah. We're looking for frames. And we're going to go to show all. There's the frames. They like cropping. But in Canva, they've separated them out. Let's do a circle crop first. First of all, you put in this thing, basic shapes, I'm going to start with a circle. Then I'm going to come out of frame. There's a little arrow here to come out of frames back into generic everything elements part. I'm going to go to to see all. I'm going to type up the top here. We're looking for coffee. What we're going to do is we're going to give away free coffee as part of the reopening. Look for a paid or a free option in here. I'm going to go for this one because it's free. I'm going to click on it and nothing happens. Basically, it's just dumped it on the page bo I I drag it somewhere near close to it, it will jump in. It's very similar to cropping. Watch this. If I double click on it and you're like, I know this. There's the frosty bit on the outside, so I get to re crop it, I get to rotate it. We end up in the same place. But you start with framing. That's a bit of a I don't know, it's a strange one.'s click Done and remember to adjust the image inside of it, double click it to adjust the frame, you start outside, you're not in here. Come out and then you can adjust the size of it. You can mess around with these as well, if you need an oval, I don't want an oval. I'm going to hit Undo. Remember your Undo button up here or Command Z on a Mac control Z on a PC. And there you go. I'm going to put mine here and we'll adjust it in a little bit. Let's go crazy and add a border to it. Somebe the border width. I'm going to add this, a border width. I'm going to go to this color here, my border color, and I'm going to pick something, anything bright. Again, we'll look at colors probably a little bit later in the course. There you go. The next thing I want to do is let's do another frame because frames we did a boring circle. There are some really cool frames in here to add a bit of excitement to our images rather than just a rectangle with an image in it. What we're going to do is something new, we're going to add a page. Can duplicate the page if I want two of them, and let's say I'm going to make adjustments. I don't want that, so I'm going to go to my undo again. Came back to one page. I just want a blank page. What we're going to do is go to our frames. Let's go here, scroll down two frames. Let's click the button. Frame, it jumps to it in our list. I'm going to go to see all and I'm going to grab one of these up to you. Experiment with a couple. I'm going to grab. I like the little scrubby one. Where's the scrubby one? There you go. I like this one. I'm going to click it once. It appears out there. I'm going to make it nice and big. I want to put text over the top of it. A really nice way of just having something quite interesting in the background whilst having text over the top is it selected. If we close, I'm going to stop the search for frame. I'm going to go back back back until I find photos. A really nice search term in photos is abstract background. We'll just type in abstract. You'll get interesting things that will be good for the background that you can put text over the top. They are just supporting graphics. Find something that's going to support my camping. Well, I'm going to use this. I'm going to drag it in. You see there we can add some text over the top of it, but it'll be interesting without it being overpowering in terms of being able to read text over the top. Now I'm going to go to ticks. I'm going to go to add Tick Box and I will add my quote in a minute when we get on to text. But I guess I just wanted to show you frames and I wanted to show you a little hack finding abstract backgrounds. We'll do the same for the background background. Another handy one is if I go back to elements and I go to photos or I'm still in photos. I'm going to go to another one and go texture is another good one. Texture background texture paper. Let's do this one. Pick any one you like. I'm going to go something simple. What I'm going to do is right click it and say sits the background. Oh, look at us. Fancy. Another thing about frames is that if you want to get this image out, you can select on it and right click it and say, detach image, and it pops it out and you've got your and you've got your frame separate from your image. One other thing I'll show you while we're here, I've dragged it back in. If I drag this off, I'm like, you just stay over here, stay over here, stay over it. What? That is gone forever. That's one of the weird things about Canvas you can't work in the pasteboard. Hands up who and other maybe design programs. You end up working all the way out here on the sides. You can't do that in Canva because they go away. So I'm going to undo a couple of times till it's back in. One of the weird things is that you can detach an image from a frame. But if you go inside of a frame, it looks very much like cropping, just like we did before. But this image here, if I right click it, I can't detach from frame or detach image. I don't know why, but it's easy to do for frames. Lastly, some basic navigation. If you haven't stumbled across it already, you can use a side bar up here. I use my page page down on my keyboard. Not all keyboards have a page up page down, you might have to do some scrolling with your mouse scroll wheel or drag this little slider. Other useful things is down the bottom here. If you've got lots of pages, you can say I want to go to page two and hit Enter, jump down to I be more interesting if you've got page 20. You can drag the slider here to zoom out or zoom in depending on what you. Move around in the document, there used to be a hand tool that's going away. They're assuming a couple of things is, let's say I zoom in and I want to go up a little bit. I can use this scroll wheel and I can use this one here. What they're assuming is if you're on a laptop, you can use two fingers on the touch pad to move around. That's what I'm doing. I got a laptop next to me or on your mouse, you can use the scroll wheel and if you have a third button on your mouse, not everyone does, you can click hold and drag it around. Lots of different ways of navigating. There's an option for everybody. The problem is it's not a universal one. If you have got tips on your specific computer, that's a bit different than I explained, leave those in the comments so other people can figure out how to move around as well. Down the bottom here, probably the most useful one is if you go to fit, it will fit a whole page on your screen. You can go to fill and we'll try and make it as wide as possible and fill it all up. Fits really good. Obviously, there are different percentages in here. I'm going to go to fit. The way for zooming in is hold down your Command key on a Mac or Control key on a PC and hit plus. See along the top there, there's a plus, and there's also a minus. It's command on a Mac, control on a PC and use plus or minus. Last little bit of navigation if you're like, there was a lot in there. We'll just do it over and over in the course, but I want to throw it in here early. Can you see down here there's thumbnail view, grid view. Let's click on thumbnail view. That gives you a way of moving between the documents. Less of a scrolling and more linear, left and right. Up to you which way you work. I'm going to leave it as it was by default and this scroll option. The other one is you can go to GridView. You can just go I want to work on this one. It's handy when you're working through a larger presentation because it allows you to reorder stuff. I can just drag things around Power Pointee sq. You go back over there. I'm going to go back out of GridView. There you go. A little bonus at the end, frames plus some basic navigation. All that is it. I will see you in the next video. 8. How to name your Canva documents right: He serious about a video called naming and saving? Totally am. It is boring but also interesting. Oh, the paradox. We'll cover the basics of saving. Then we'll jump into how to name your documents. We'll give you some good clear structure for those of you who still have untitled 52 documents show how I do it and a lot of designers do it. Join me while we try and make saving naming fun and interesting. Uck. First up saving. Saving just happens all the time without you asking, even if you don't name your files. I I got a file here on the top, there is save. I can click on it feels good. But you can see all changes are already saved. It's constantly trying to update into the cloud. It's really robust. There is a little visual cue here. S this little cloud. If it doesn't have a tick in it, it'll have a little arrow going round and round like it's working and it's trying to save. But it's basically just always saving. Every time you move if they do anything, it's saved. For crashes, which it doesn't tend to do, it will be fine. You'll be able to reopen it where you left off. It's pretty magic. The next thing is naming your file. So up the top here, mine's called reopening. I didn't name it reopening. It started off as untitled. Reopening, grabbed it from there, tries to grab something from your document to give it a name. To replace the name, which is, if I click on it and he delete, click out of it, it's now called Untitled. How I name my documents is this. This is the structure that a lot of designers use, the one that I prefer client name campaign project version. In here, I work on multiple clients. I'll put in my one's Fox at the moment and I use hyphens to separate the different chunks of here just so that it's easy to find later on. I can find the client that I'm working on. I don't have to put the full name, something that I understand. Fox is the client. The campaign that I'm working on is our reopening campaign. The next one might be the summer sale, it might be launching the new product. Put a little hyphen in the project name. This one's Instagram. I'll have another one with a very similar name. I spell Instagram wrong. Instagram. Then I put the version of it. Client name easy. I'll have Fox. You might be doing I do a lot of work for my company. Bring your own laptop. I'll start with bring your own laptop or BYOL, and then the name of the campaign. Then this one's interesting because in other documents, you might have Instagram, Facebook, if you're using Photoshop, I would keep Instagram, Facebook, LinkedIn, Pinterest, all the different social ads that I'm making in the one Photoshop document. You can't do that in Canva. Mainly because you can't have different pages in one design. I couldn't have a horizontal long one. I couldn't have US letter A four document in here as well. I have to have separate ones. I'd have Fox reopening, maybe workbook, if it was that US letter. I'll have another one that might say Facebook or Pinterest defending if the sizes are different. Now, this one here, V one, it's pretty easy version K. I'll send this off to the client, come back, get Version two, three, Just so that you don't end up with this. You've done it. Final new new. Okay? So just start off with a V at the beginning. A version one, it'll just make organizing your designs a lot easier. You can name your specific pages here as well, so I'm going to call this one option one. Okay? And then down here, this one here is going to be called option two. This will change depending on the document, whether the versions or concepts or just page one and page two, that's fine too. All the while, it's magically saving for us. One thing is, if I close down this tab here, you can see, I get back to my home screen here and it'll show me things. See how easy that is then when I'm looking for Fox, I can go up here and say, everything to do with Fox, hit Enter and it's only give me my Fox things. Here's one I was practicing with earlier. There's my mood board that I use. We'll do a move board together as well. There's a thing we're working on. Cuts it all down through my designs. If I want to get a bit fancier, I can go to reopening. Reopening. And it's going to give me all the reopening documents that I've worked on. I'm gonna go back to home, and I'm going to go to here and you can do it here as well. I'll rename it. So if you haven't done it and you're like, Oh, this one here called Daniel. Is not good. You can click on there and change the name. All right. Let's reopening our well named fox, our fox reopening Instagram V one. Yours is going to be different. Your client is going to have a different animal. But there you go, boring old saving and naming. There are some different more advanced levels that we will cover later later in the course with folders and good stuff. But for the moment, that'll get us going. Even if you do nothing else, your future self will be very happy about you actually naming things. Final, final. Actually exciting stuff. All right, that's it. I will see you in the next video for some actually exciting things. See you there. 9. Uploading your own images into Canva: Hello. In this video, we are going to upload our own images, rather than relying on the ones built into Canva, we're going to upload them. I'm going to show you the official way, and then I'm going to show you the easy way that everyone does. Jump in. All right, uploading your own images. There's a bar here, click on uploads and at the top here, it says Upload your files. And if you've downloaded the exercise files, go and find the one called Popcorn. It's in your exercise files. Let's click Open and you'll see it in little bar there. You'll see this little upload graphic. It's pretty cool. And then you just drag it on. You can't drag it into no man's land because it doesn't like stuff out here. When you drag it into the document, it often replaces the document. I'm just heading do. Do again. I'm going to drag it so it's down. Even though I don't want it down here, it really images coming into Canva, I really wants to try and think for you. That there is saying, I'll be the background. You're like, I don't want to be the background. Undo. I want you to just click at once and it'll just appear in the middle. Undo that again and let's use little dotted lines to delete them if you do need to move them, what you'll find is the official way using the uploads. I'm going to close down uploads. What you tend to do is I just open it up in the finder with you in a macro PC. I don't really need to add all three, but let's show you. I'm going to drag all three of them into my document. What will happen is, you see they just appear. Appear, you can see they're uploading there. They go the official way, but it's easy just to drag them into the file. I want to get rid of all of them, except this and I want to switch out you for that one there. Coffee now is going to be a free popcorn day because popcorn is cheaper for the reopening. We've worked out. We've got a cafe quote in and it's really expensive. I'm going to double click on it, and I'm going to say, Oh. There you go. Is my popcorn. Notice I can't move it in because there's not enough edge on the side here. Well, I could expand later on, which you can fake some background, but for the moment, that'll do. There used to be limits on uploading images in the free account that seems to have gone away, that might come back. It was pretty hefty though, so it was fine. That's it. Uploading your own images, do it the official way or do what everyone else does and just drag them onto your document. Either way, that's it. I'll see you in the next video. 10. Where to get Free photos for Canva: Hello. In this video, we're going to look at where to get free images that you can use as part of your business, for your client, for your class project, for your teaching resources that don't get you into trouble and that don't cost any money. Main two places is Unsplash and pixels. Let's dive in.'s have a look. I'm going to go into elements. I'm going to go down to photos. Let's say that instead of camping, you got a tattoo studio from your random project know that crown is paid and no crown is free but commercially usable. Where did they come from? Let's look at tattoo. Let's go to the little dotted lines. This one here come from a site called Pixels. Very common for people to use images that came from pixels. It was shot by Brett Brett Sales Sales. Anyway, Brett decided to share his photograph on pixels for free for people to use and give people the rights to use them. Pixels is a great place. Let's have a look at one of these paid ones. Let's have a look at this one. This one's come from Giddy Images. Giddy Images have licensed this for Canva and is part of your paid pro account, which is a little crown I've let you use it, but you actually have to pay for it. Money is exchanged hands between Canva and your subscription and Giddy images. Giddy images are great images. They are royalty free, so you don't have to keep paying for them. You don't have to pay for them once, and by paying for them, it just means paying for your pro accounts all wrapped up in there. You don't have to pay for them separately. So Pixels is a good place. Let's have a look. Often, it can be easier just to go straight to pixels to search for images because the problem with the free account in Canva is that it doesn't allow you to filter paid and free. When you get the paid account, you can weirdly. They might change that. Have a look if you're in the Freed account. If you are in the free account, it's easy just to go to pixels.com or Unsplash. Some of them crossover between them, some of them are different. I use both of these places. They just have a different curation of images. You'll find some that are on Unsplash and some that are on pixels. There is probably 20 other good places to get free images from. I know these two, so that's why I'm sharing them. I like it in here, tattoo you will find every image in here will be free unless sometimes like this one here, that's an ad. For a company called IStock who will sell you images. They're not very expensive. And there's my tattoo ones. You need to go and double check the licensing, but you'll find everything on pixels that's not clearly an ad is free to use. Unsplash has lots of free stuff. I type in tattoo. The only thing you need to be careful not be careful of. You should potentially pay for images. Photographers are taking their time. There are images that just can't be got, but sometimes we need free images. So see this little plus one here. Anything that is plus is something you need to pay for. They're very inexpensive, whereas this one is not doesn't have the little plus next to it. Just have a look around free, free, free, free, not free, you'll find the ones that have a really serious composition, man, the lights, the golden hour, it's every likelihood that this tattoo artist is not actually doing any tattooing. They're just being set up for this composition to get something really interesting. Handy things for both of these sites is orientation. You can say I want portrait stuff. If you're working primarily on social media, it's really handy to have this vertical format or portrait to get started rather than trying to do some weird cropping later on. All right. Those are two really good places, Unsplash pixels. If you've got one, you're like, I can't believe he didn't talk about a, not the Twitter, but another website that you really like. Leave it in the comments and other people will see. One last thing is, let's say you do find this one, you're like, this is cool. If I click on it, you go inside of it, I can download it for free, this. You can download a small version or a big one or original size. Sometimes these things get massive. Can be really big. You might get one that's appropriately sized. Up to you. I know that my Instagram post is I think Instagram post is 1080 by 1080. 1080 wide by 1080 high. I could use this. But I have Fomo so I end up getting the big one anyway and just squeezing it into my Instagram post anyway. That's it. That's how to get free images for your Canva project. 11. There are lots of Workspaces in Canva: Hello. Let's talk about workspaces. What is workspace? It is the area around your document that helps you build it. It's the space that you do work in. The weird thing about Canva and it took me a little while to realize and help me when I did figure it out, why I'm sharing with you is that when you start with Instagram posts, it looks like this. But if I switch to a document, it looks different. There's H one and H two. I can't find that in Canva How do I turn it on? You can't. I made this other whiteboard document here. What are all the dots? This one here has video editing. Canva is a huge big tool that can do lots of different things and the workspaces change. Let me show you a few of the different workspaces just so you get a sense and don't get lost like I did when I got started. All right, we're all quite used to now the social post view. Everything looks like this. Let's open up a few different other ones. Let's go back to the home screen. Let's create a new design. Basically, they're grouped over here. You can see these icons, docs, whiteboards, presentations, et cetera. These all have their own workspaces. Some of them similar, some of them quite different. Let's look at say docs. We'll create a doc in this course. Now, a doc is basically just a word document, and it has a very different view. Can you see this one versus this one? Lots of the elements are the same, templates brands. They're all still there. If I close these both down, what you'll notice is there's this menu along the top here gives you more like a Word doc style tools. Same over here. It's all very word docky. Close it down, you scroll, it breaks it into pages. Let's have a look at another one. Let's look at something that's quite different, creating new design. We'll do whiteboards as well. Scribe this one. Is whiteboards quite different. Look at that. So different. I'm going to close this down. It has all these dots and guess what? It has an infinity background. You can create things forever on this document and no menu along the top telling you what kind of words to use and styles and stuff like the word Doc. Let's do one more. Let's do video one because that has a very different look as well. Let's go down to videos, scrab video. What you'll notice is you end up with different stuff. You've got a little timeline down here instead of pages. If I add a video, let me find a video. This one. End up with different tools. You got editing tool. The reason I show you this is that when I first started using Canva, I'd be like, Why is their version so different from mine? Why do I have that button? Why do I have this extra button? It was because there are lots of different formats here in Canva. I want to give you a sense of this early on. I didn't want to be the first boring video, but I feel like it's interesting to know, important to know. There's actually different ways. The interesting thing is that if I'm in this word Doc style here they call it a doc inside of Canva. I can't get all that video editing stuff. It's a different format. What ends up happening is if you end up in the wrong thing, you start designing in this whiteboard mode that goes on forever and you want some of the video stuff, you have to select copy into a different document. You can't change your workspace. Can't say, enable video features. Doesn't work like that. That was a revelation for me when I was getting started with Canva, their actual workspaces are quite different. Sometimes you can copy stuff between the two, and sometimes you can't, the stuff here that we've created. If I try and grab all of that as a group, and I copy it, for some reason, the doc won't allow me to paste that. I can bring in the image separately, the text separately, some things copy, some things don't. The workspace changes quite a bit. The other part of the workspace that changes is the side here. Can you see I'm This is the one we started at. I've got design elements, text brand, uploads, drawer, projects, and apps. These things are only here because I've used them in the past. You won't have any of these? Basically, we'll look at apps later on. When I add an app or go and find one that I want to use, it just puts it over there for easy access and you can't remove them. I try to clear them out before I started the course we didn't freak anybody out, but didn't work, so there you go. See this line here, that line is stuff that's normally part of this. You'll have that. Anything that's below this is unique stuff that you've used. We'll explore it later on. But let's look. See that line there. Anything above that, if I go to my dock version, you see, there's that line there. It got rid of you can't do drawing inside of the dock. All these tiles on this left hand side are unique for the workspace as well. Can you see in this one, look, what else was new? I think this one is very similar. The video one, very similar again. You'll find different tiles, different workspaces for the different kinds of projects you'll be creating. Last last thing. Get on with it, is if I go to home and I create new design, down the bottom here, it says more. You just get a sense of the scale of things that you can create in Canvas. Let's go to, I don't know, personal event planning. Just look at how many things they've thought of. Do you need a T shirt? You can do it inside Canva, design it, and then print it from Canvas. It's amazing. Do you need to create name tag, swing tag for somebody? They've got a workspace and all the tools that you need to make that happen and a bunch of templates? It's very cool. Way, I wanted to share that because the different workspaces freaked me out a little bit at the beginning until I realized, they're all different. See little icons here. They all do something quite different. They move Canva around and make it do different stuff. You can't change it. You can't just say, A I'm in presentation mode, switch it to video mode. You can copy and paste from it, but you can't actually just switch up the workspace to be give me all those tools. They get it then. Alright, that is it. I will leave you with that. I hope that was helpful, a bit of a revelation. One last thing before we go is, if I hit the stripy lines here, okay, brings up this. This kind of like your universal finder. Allows you to correct new documents, work on recent documents. This changes, you can add favorites to it, but you can close it down as well. So if you click on this instead of File File gives you more this document settings. If you go to this, gives you more kind of canvas settings back to this home kind of document. But takes up a chunk space, you can close it down as well. There you go. That is it. I will see you in the next video. 12. Squares, Circles + Layers & Position in Canva: Hello, friends. We're going to draw rectangles. We're going to draw circles. We're going to put text inside circles. Then we're going to look at how to just layers and we'll look at the really cool layers panel. Let's jump in. Before we get started, I've got to show you something. By accident because I actually deleted from the last video, I created a whole bunch of empty documents, and deleted them close it down when had lunch come back. I'm like, ho lost the thing we're making. If you have deleted it by accident, go to home, and you can go to trash and then there it is there. I can go to this and I can say restore. Hopefully now I can go back to Home and there it is. I can open it up. We couldn't say we design. Let's click Reload. All right, we're back. Carry on with the video. We came here before we deleted things to add rectangle inner circle. They're prettyeasy under elements. They're all called shapes. No kidding, Dan. There are lots of shapes if you go to see all, elements, go to shapes. There's a bunch of them. Let's add a square or it can be a rectangle watch. One of the defaults for all of these shapes is that can you see there's a cursor flashing in the middle? Okay. You can put text in the middle of them. You can leave them off. I want them off in this case. I'm going to have it off. I want to manning this area down the bottom here. This is the look I'm going for. I want to have this there, but that is below it. Gives me a really good excuse to show you the arrange and layering. Now, we need to change that color. Okay, so I'm going to pick just a lighter color. For the moment, we'll do colors properly. Just pick default colors for the moment, white even default colors. I'm going to click on this, click on them, picking anything, that's going to anyway, now we need to look at layering because this is too far behind that. We've got a couple of ways of doing it. You can right click something, go to layer, and send it to the back or backwards. There's two of them. They've got shortcuts, depending on how often you're using Canva. I often use this one very often and I don't use that one. I just smash away at command and the square brackets that will be control square brackets on a PC. Square brackets are often on a Cordy keyboard next to the P key. You can hit backwards. There you go. If I go layer again, backwards again, go behind. I use that quite a bit. I use a shortcut command or control on a PC and just use the two brackets. One moves it forward, one moves it back. I can just keep going forward, back, back. I find that super helpful. Let's do a circle. Click on a circle, it gets added, pick a color, any color as long as it's from the solid colors. And same with the circle, if you don't add text, you can add it later on by just double clicking in it, and we're going to go May 1 is going to be when we're going to do this opening. We're going to put that in there. I'm going to pick a big font. Don't worry too much about the font style at the moment. We're going to do a big section on how to pick good fonts for a design for the moment, just picking that. I'm going to rotate it a little bit. Because I want the text to be rotated. What I wanted to do is I want it to pop underneath this but above the image. I could use the shortcut, but I want to show you this position. I'm going to click position. I'm going to go to this one called layers. Arrange is what we did before. Move it forward, move it to the back. I want to go to layers because it's quite visual. Can you see it saying, that's at the tippy top. You can tell it's at the tippy top because it's above everything. You imagine you're a bird looking down, you see reopening first, then this is on top of that. Then the May 1 is on top of this image, which is on top of the rectangle, you get the idea. If I want this to be below the rectangle, I can click hold and drag it and you can see it smushes around and you're like, I want to go in there. There you go. You get in the right position. Sometimes that's more visual. It's really useful when things are a little bit more confusing. This is pretty easy layout, so not terribly hard to go through and use that shortcut to move it back and forth. But there'll be lots of times where you're like, I just want to drag it in the right place. Way we do it is have nothing selected or something selected. It doesn't matter. You can't have nothing selected. Have something selected, find position. If you can't see position, that's a good point. My screen is really big, so I can see quite a few of these adjustments along the top here. But if you have a really small laptop, look, position goes away. How do we find all the extra stuff that's not up there? You remember hit the little double arrow, and you're like, right there's position. Then we can go from range to layers. There's a couple of ways to get there. You might see it if your screen is big enough and it just has a position there, otherwise, hit the double arrow. Give yourself more space if you are dealing with a small screen and you're like, Allright. This is not fun. It is tiny. Just make sure that is also closed at the cross, you can work on this. And when you're finished with this, close it down, you get all the screen real estate. I'm going to go to my big version, scroll up a little bit. There you go. That's how to add rig tangles and circles, but text in them, rotate them, and play around with layers. Remember that shortcut sheet that's in your exercise files, print that out. It has things like the layer heights in there. It has things like the move forward, move back with the different layers. That shortcut we looked at, which is command square bracket or control square bracket on a PC. Or you might find just right clicking stuff and going to layer and moving it back and forward. Oh, you can jump to show layers. There you go. I'm just going to reorder mine a little bit, and then I will see you in the next video. 13. How to Export a JPG & PNG from Canva: Hello. Hey, in this video, I'm going to show you how to export a PNG or a JPEG from Instagram post. Doing it this early in the course so that you can submit class projects as you go along. I'm going to show you how to do it. It's pretty easy. But you can also use this exact method to then download this image. Email it to yourself and then put it onto Instagram. Pretty easy. Let's jump in. I'll show you how to do it. Alright, to download them, let's go up to, first of all, I like to grab the name that I've called the document and just copy it. So I sect that all copied it. I'm gonna get to share, and I'm going to go to Download. I'm going to say what file type? It doesn't really matter JPG or a PNG. They do put some restrictions on the free account on how good a quality JPG, 80% is good. If you crank it up to 100, it says, Hey, it's a pro feature. It's not going to matter for what we need, especially for the class projects and generally to go out to things like Instagram as well. It's going to be perfect. We're going to stick with PNG. Just use that. Now we've got two pages. I want just the first page. I'm going to actually turn them all off except for this first page here and I'm going to say download. I've made a folder chord Export, I'm going to put it in there because I'm good. This is my V one. The very next one I'm going to export is going to be V two, V three, et cetera. That's why I copy and paste the name. Let's click Save and we have a PNG on our desktop. There it is. There's my Instagram file ready to upload as a class project. We'll get more and more nerdy as we go along. Basically, you just need a JPEG or a PNG and that's all you need to do. But we'll learn more tricks as we go along. All right. That is how to get a JPG or a PNG out of Canva. Let's get onto the next video. 14. Class Project 01 - Images & Shapes: Alright. What is this? Class projects. What is class projects? They are not homework. They are fun exercises that you can do throughout the course, just to get your skills up and so that you get to build something that is kind of alongside the course to work on your own stuff, practice your skills, and so you have something the end that you can put in your portfolio. Watching something's good, doing something yourself is even better. And you'll learn it better. So what is the first class project? Basically is what we've been doing so far plus a little bit of something else there. Let me go through what the requirements are. First of all, if you haven't already, go to random project generator. Get yourself a business and something that they do. Minus Fox camping and outdoor. Don't you do that? Do something else. There's plenty of them that gets generated there, and then you've been asked to make a single square Instagram post. These are the things that I want you to include. Two images. One image is a background. Give me a background fully or like we've done? I want some cropping going on. Basically, I want you to practice your cropping. Okay. The second image, I want it in a frame. I've used a circle, you don't have to use a circle, but I want you to put it inside of a frame to practice that two images. One a background thing, and one is the thing that we're going to give away. You can do ice cream, you can do coffee. I've done popcorn, but those are the two images that I want you to have on there. Hitting, have reopening. I don't want you to pick fonts at the moment. Just use Canvas sands. That is the most basic of the fonts. Don't change it. You can see there I've gone and added bold and then not bold there. I don't know why I tell icized it. Don't worry about that. We're going to do fonts properly in a little bit. I just couldn't help myself. But don't go spending time on fonts. We'll do that in so add the reopening heading. I'll say it all similar. You don't have to say reopening, something that says the same thing very boldly and easily. Next is shapes. I'd like two of them. One is colored box, and that is just going to be the basis for our hitting to go on top of it, and we're going to add some body text here, some call to actions. Come join us for our reopening. We'll do that later on, but just a big colored box and another shape. That's the square shape, and that is the circle and I want you to go through and add the text to this one kind of one and the same. You don't have to rotate yours, but two, one colored box to the background, and one that has the date of the reopening. Have the name of your business as well. Somewhere. I've put mine at the top in our square shape that has text in it. It's kind of all joined up there. Put it somewhere. I don't mind where it doesn't have to be in a box, have the name of your business. Want you to experiment with layering? Show me something in the class project like this where something's above and below, just so you can work. Ing and layering with us. Don't worry about colors and fonts at the moment, we'll do those properly. Just stick to the basic colors. In here, I want colors, stick to the default solid colors for the moment. I keep calling the basic colors. But just stick to these for the moment. We'll get a lot better with color as we go through, but we'll break it into sections. Next is the name document like we did earlier, client name campaign project version. It's this thing up. And then I want you to export a Pange. Export an image. I don't really mind what kind and then upload it to the class project section on this website. It's how we can work through the class projects. You'll see these throughout the course, these class projects. Some of them I'll get to share more widely. Later on, I'll get you to share in social media and ask for feedback. For the moment, though, it's boring old time of just getting up to this point. There's a lot to do, especially if you're new, but we're probably not ready for creative feedback from anybody. We'll do that a little bit later on as well once we start picking fonts and colors and doing our own compositions, but do it like this ish. If you decide you want to do it this way and try and do something interesting, kind of here and sti and lay it out this way, I don't mind. It's more about practicing the tools. You can copy me exactly in terms of the layout, but pick your own images, use your own brand, and pick your own basic colors. No, they're not basic, default colors. There go. Now remember, not homework, but I can tell you the people that do better and learning some of these projects is the people that follow along with the class projects. It helps sinks it in everyone like, Oh, that's easy. I don't need to do that. Do it. You'll bump into problems, you'll fix them, you'll get better, and it's fun. We're going to build something together. All right, that's it. That is the first of the class projects. Enjoy. I'll see you in the next video. 15. How to mix your own colors in Canva: Hello. Hey, we're going to go from boring basic colors that we picked so far on this course to oh this version with some nice colors show you how to mix them, make them brighter, pick different hues, and then we're going to go through and pick colors that are taken from our images, which is a great way to get started with colour. We're also going to run into a big problem towards the end where I can't make something work, and then we fix it together. I'll try and pass it off like it was part of the course, but really just got stuck. But we fix it. All right, let's jump in. All right. We're going to adjust the colors on this option one we did in the class project. Let's go mess with the colors. You're thinking, Hey, I spent ages picking colors. I don't want to mess with them. I did tell you not to, but you did it anyway, didn't you? First of all, let's have a look at one of these boxes. This one here, member is a rectangle with text inside of it. They're one and the same. You can adjust the text color. And the object color, they're separate. Now with this color panel open, you'll see document colors. That's anything that's being used on any of the pages will appear in this list. This will get longer and longer. Bran kit will do later on when we build our logo. Let's have a little look up here. They're actually different. You can see there is this no color option which you don't have for text, but you do have for a rectangle. All it means is I'm going to just click on this and it has no color. There are still text in there, obviously, but there is no color. I'm going to undo that. Mixing your own colors is quite important. That's what this little guy is here. The way the color system works is you can drag this left and right. This is the hue. So drag the hue slider back and forth until you get it in the zone that you want and I'm just going to pick a greeny blue. Actually, that's what we were at. Let's go an orange color. Then in here, you drag this around. This is more what's called saturated, more and more color, whereas this way here lowers the saturation. So it's less saturated color. It's the right color. Then up and down is how dark it is. Light version, dark version, saturated not saturated. Really need to know those terms, but just get a sense of dragging it around. Now, the nice thing you can do in here is you can start pulling colors from your images from anything, really. Grab the eyedropper. Let's go again. Select this. Click on this color swatch here, open the color panel, go into a new color. Let's grab the eyedropper tool and let's just move around. You'll see it's like a zoomed inversion. Great for pulling colors from images. You can see we've pulled that yellow from the popcorn. You can get back to this one and go, one of this purple out of here. Once you've done it, you're like, oh, I like the color, but I want to change the brightness. All you do is drag this up, p. It's the same color, but it's just a brighter version. It to be more saturated? Right, red, right, right? Less saturated. You get the idea. The other thing you might bump into is you might get this called a hex number. The hex number is the way to describe this purple here. It's this bit of red, mixed with this little bit of green, which is the two numbers here, and then the last little bit of blue. Red, green, blue, make up this color. Once you settle on the if you work for a brand long enough, you actually start remembering the color or corporate brand guidelines you might have got from a client and you can paste it in there. That's the one that I use for bring your own laptop, for the green, you can paste it in there if you like. But at this stage, we're just going to click and drag it around and pick a color that you like. Then just click out in this area here to close that all down. If you have a circle with, say, line around the outside, so I'm going to add a border style of this, I'm going to crank it up a little bit. See I've got a color for the inside, a gala for the border, and now I've got a text color. All right, easy undo, undo. I'm going to get rid of my border. One of the nice things about starting with a brand is you don't often have a really clear brand guidelines. We'll get through that a bit more specific on how to pick colors to represent a brand when we get to the logo section. But for the moment, we're going to let the image drive a lot of the colors that we've used. You might have seen it already. If I click on this rectangle in the background, get a color, you'll see photo colors. It's gone and looked at this image here that's on this page. Actually, it's looking at the popcorn, which is not exactly what I want. I don't want to pull the colors from the popcorn. Okay, I'm back. You didn't even know I went, but I spent the last 15 minutes trying to work out and I want to leave it in here in the course because these things happen. Watch this. I want to change the color of this. I can pick from the popcorn, but what are these great out ones here that I can't really pick where is this one in the background? Because that's really what I want to pick the image colors from these purples and oranges. But it's not even there. I tried to uncrop it. I tried all sorts of things. I had to look on the forums, and other people having the and there's not really a solution, but I worked out a workaround. I want to leave this in here just because these things happen. Cava is always updating, always changing. It's probably going to be long fixed by the time you get to it. Watch this. If I add this image now and just move it over here because I'm not really using it. I just want to pull the colors from it. So with this box selected, grab the color. Look, here's my little image there, it's got rid of the grade out ones and I can now go through and say, Alright, I want to pull colors from this image. The cool thing about that is that it's looking at this image and pulling colors from it and often you can match them a whole lot better. You can get everything to sit in nicely when the colors that you're using and the fonts and the boxes are all pulled from the image you're using, especially if this image is quite a large part of the design. You can see here already getting good colors. Picking the purple, it's just decided the colors that it wants to pick. So I'm going to do is use these but also grab my eyedropper too. Remember, into the mixing your own color, eyedropper, I want to get that purple out of there, and then I want to go in and just make it a bit brighter and a bit more saturated, so that I'm starting to connect all these up to the image. I'm going to get rid of this now. Actually, I still want it. This is a bug and a workaround. It should pull from it and it has done for many years. I'm just going to leave this here and we're we'll delete them when we're finish with them, ignore him. One of the nice things about pulling colors from images is we were quite specific that way. We went, Alright, pick that color from one of these ones here. What we can do is we can be a little bit more, I don't know, let Canva do the work. Especially if we're new to picking colors. We're going to click the image here, and we can right click it and we can say, I want you to apply the colors to this page from this image. Que. Went through and recolored everything. I can go back into it and say, I'll do it again. You see it's got this international shuffle. It's basically the same button, but it's going to go mix them around again. And the good thing about it is that it's not just picking random colors, it's clever enough to be messing with the background to be picking because that used to be white, right? Now it's this color. They've picked this lovely navy here, this gold out of the image, and there's a really good contrast. So the accessibility of this ad, really nice high contrast so it can be read clearly against the background. Really love starting with the image and letting that drive the color scheme that you're using. Have to stick with it. It's just a suggestion, and then you can go through and say, I like that one, but I also want to maybe reuse it up here. I'm going to say you. I want to grab the document colors and there's that golden brown down the bottom there I want to use. Now with a text color, I'm going to say you are too light. I'm going to use that lighter version down here or maybe just go straight to white. That's the basics of colors. We're going to go through. There's going to be a level one, which we're going to go through now of colors and then we're going to go through a level two later in the course, especially when we have to start picking brand colors. We have to have meaning or at least understanding of why to pick different colors and why not. But that's later in the course for the moment, look at us. We've done some cool colors derived from the photograph. We've got some basic colors. Alright. That is it. I will see you in the next video. 16. What are Design Styles & Color Palettes in Canva: Hello. In this video, we're going to look at something called styles in our design template. Basically, it's a way of finding other people's font and color combinations and experimenting with them, figuring out what might work for you. It's a great way to get started with color and fonts. It's really interesting to understand how Canva works in terms of how it does combine. Some of these things. Fonts get mixed with color palettes, which then become font combinations, which are called styles, which are mixed into templates. Confusing. Don't worry. We're going to go through it. You're going to be a style color palette font set master. He's making it sound hard. Actually, it's not that hard. Let's just get into it. So where you've got in your option one color scheme, let's duplicate it here just so we can compare versions that we're making. We're going to duplicate this page on here at the top here we've we've got two option ones. We're going to have a colorway A and a colorway B.To different ways of having color. Let's have a look at the second one. What we're going to do is just click on anything in here just to let Canva know that we're messing around with this guy, and then we're going to go into our design. We spent a lot of time in our elements and we will in this class. Design wise, we only really used it for templates. It's fine to start with a template. Perfect. It's great way to get started. I end up just making my own stuff quite often. What I do use under this design tab quite a lot is the styles option, especially when you're just getting started and you don't really have a real good sense of color and font and things like that. Templates, let's go to styles. What are styles? Templates are colors, fonts and images, layout, things on the page, plus the colors and fonts. Styles is just the colors and fonts bits. That's the part that I really like. What we're going to do is I'm going to click on it so it stays out. Click on styles. Let's explain these ones. There's three parts to a style. There is font, there is color, and then there's font and colors. It's these combinations, clearly, Dan. If you just want to pick colors, click on this. If you want to adjust the fonts and colors, click on this. If you just want the fonts, just here, get the idea. So I'm just scroll down a little bit. Let's just mess with colors for the moment. We'll dive into fonts before we finish. Click on the first one. What does it do? Look at that. That versus that. It's not pulling from the image, but it's still a pretty cool color combination, right? Like this lighter color. It's kind of like sultana wine color. It's very cool. Let's click on the next one. Okay? And I'm going to hit. Let's go to S A. So color palettes, S A. And let's just click on a few of them. Let's go crazy. Let's click away. And it's amazing even, I'm a pretty experienced designer, and often I get trapped by the same fans same old colors. So it's really handy to go, Bam, look at me. I never picked anything that bright. The other nice thing about it is say that you really like that one. See the little arrows here? That's our international shuffle sign again. Click it again. And look, going to keep trying to mix them up to get them in different color combinations. It's just really clever at keeping the contrast nice. I can still see the text on the background. When you've got one that you like, you can say, I like that one, but I want this to be the yellow. I can go into it, slick on the box, click in the text bit. You'll see that this is being used somewhere on the document, that one or let's click on this. We've got our sweet skills. We can say, I want to click on this, but I want the eyedropper, I want to pull it from this background color being used here. Was that the same color? Might have been the same color. But you get the idea. Color palettes are really handy premix set of colors that you can use. Up the top here, there are some these pill buttons here. You can say, give me all the vibrant ones. Give me all the bold ones. You can type in here. Let's type in summer. There's not too many. I don't know. This will get bigger. I bet you if you type Summer and now you'll get more than just three. But that's a handy way of working as well. You had the little cross to close it. Back a little arrow here to come back to styles. So there's the top, going to come down, come down. We look at color palette. There's font sets. We're going to go into fonts really deep when we pick our logo. But for the moment, though, it might be really nice just go, A, give me some different fonts. It's going to go through and there's three sets here. There's a heading, subheading, and a body copy. Just click on them and you're like, h that one. I like this one. Oh. Make various noises when that's how you tell if you've got a good one or not. Don't like that all caps. But get a sense of some fonts here. We'll do fonts in the next video, but let's just click on a few of them. It's really nice to see some combinations that are outside. Oh, I do like that one. Gugin. That's what it is. Yeah, oh, I do like this combination. One, two, three different fonts. Worked up color palettes are pre mixed kind of color sets, and same with the font sets, and combinations is both. Somebody's gone through and said, Alright, these colors with these two fonts would look pretty cool. If I look on this, it's going to do the same thing. It's a combination of those two. So for me, often, I will just be picking this separately from this because I get quite specific about the color and the font look. But when you're getting started doing concepts, the combinations is a co both. If I hit a template, I'm going to add it as a new page. What it's done is it's gone through, it's given me some physical videos and images. But it's also given me a style that style is made up of this combination here of colors and fonts. I deleted my template, and I want to show you one last thing before we go is that down the bottom here, there is image palettes. We just access it a different way. There is a loads of ways to get into the same place in Canva. I'm going to click on something in here. Then down here, you can see it's pulled a bunch of colors from this image and I can click on them and say, Yeah, you. Then shuffle. Shuffle, shuffle, shuffle, shuffle. I was good. Doesn't really pick the purples out of there, but hey, it's the same thing as going in the back. It's the same thing in here as clicking on the image, right clicking and saying apply colors to page. Then going back in here and applying color shuffle. Same, same, but it actually might just be easier over here. I hope that was useful showing you how it all ties together, fonts plus colors, plus the combinations. They're all smushed into styles that are used in templates. He's made it hard. Sorry. We got there, right? Hopefully we're there. We'll do it more as we go through the course. Yeah, let's get on with that course. 17. How to work with text & fonts in Canva: Hello. In this video, we are going to cover everything you need to know to get started with fonts and type inside of Campa. Loads to cover. Let's jump in. All right. Scroll down to the page that we made earlier, with the watermark on the background. If you haven't done it, just do any old textbox. It doesn't matter. Okay, I want to add a textbox. We can click on the Text and click Add Text Box. I though just the Tiki. The Tiki is a shortcut just to adding textbox, really common. The one thing though is the Tiki doesn't work if you're typing. Watch this. If I want to add the textbox and I hit T, you can see just types in the textbox. I can hit escape on my keyboard or just click in the background and then hit the T key, another textbox. I'm going to click off, delete him and grab this one. I'm going to get it so that we've done resizing. Resizing texts can be a little tricky when you can't see the corners, but you can see there. I can get in there and resize it still, even though the box was quite small, I'm going to resize it a bit. I'm going to add some text. From exercise files, there's a file in there called reopening quotes. It looks like this. I've just given you some text to copy. You can type it in, it doesn't have to be the same. It's God, it's really great. This is it's that Oh, my goodness, this is super good. I can't believe the shop is so amazing in the redesign. Ed, what if you like? There are some examples there. The reason I want to show sizing is I quite often use this just to resize and it's great for headings, but when you need it to be a certain width, covering this background, weedy right now, little bug is there's normally a little move icon there. It's gone away. Gone. If it the Tiki, see that move thing there? It's normally there. It's gone away from me. If yours goes away, I don't know. I bet you it's just a bug for today while I'm teaching. If that ever happens to you, you can just click off and just click and drag it. You don't have to use the move icon. I'm going to get mine because I want it to be this with, but I don't want to resize it using this because I want it to be that with. All we can do is select all the texts. I just double clicked it. Sometimes you might have to triple click it, make sure it's all blue, and we can use this to make it bigger. There is a really common shortcut. It's command shift and the greater than or less than key on a Mac. On a PC, it's control shift, greater than less than. I use the greater than and less than. They're tied together next to the key with your comma and full stop. Command Shift, greater than, less than control shift on a PC. They'll be in your shortcut sheet. I do that. I hold down the key. I'm like, looking for a good line break where it fits nicely and reads nicely, that'll do. Those are two good ways of resizing type. You can type it in obviously. A couple of things I want to show you is that some fonts are really elaborate like this one here, Canvas Sands the default, has bold and italics and underline, has all sorts of good stuff. I'm undoing that. If I find something else and I go over here, you can see I was experimenting already. If I click on this, go back to here. I pick something else, something looking Ah, come down and pick Brittany. Okay? Oh, I pick Brittany and fake on Brittany, and I selected here. You'll notice that this doesn't have a bold or italic version. You're like, come on, make it go bold. Not all fonts are creative equal. Some have bolds, some italics. This one has an underline. Very gross one, but it doesn't have these other two. So just know that sometimes they don't. Some of them just come as capitals as well. This one here has uppercase and lowercase. Some of them don't. Some of them just have uppercase. Going to cover every single one of these features. But if you want to with the selectte I can go over here, and I have a lot more of the text options. We all know bold italic underline strike through, put a line through the middle of it. This one here, alignment, you just toggle. The moment it's centered, go left align, justified, right line, just cycle through them all. I'm going to be center. One I like bullet points. The other one you will bump into is spacing. In this case, the line spacing here is quite this font Brittany is let's have a look. It's quite tight. Can you see these descenders? That's the whip down the bottom here quite long and the acenders descend the line that it's sitting on and ascend the line, which is above it. This is quite high, the Gs quite low. It's just this font. You can see here they end up mixing together, descenders acenders. I'm going to have to go with this font and say, Ar buddy, you need to be spacing and I can play around with the line spacing. Go, I probably need to drag it out to about to fonts though will be perfect the way they are by default, but you might end up adjusting them. Letter spacing, not hard. You can put it into negative. I'm just going to get mine back to what it was. What was it? Zero. That's what it was zero. The next thing we do with fonts is I'm going to have it selected, I'm going to click on the CA click on the word Brittany and I want to find the filters. I want to find hand drawn fonts. Instead of scrolling forever, you have to scroll all the way to the top to see these. If you can't find them, it's because you're scrolled down a little bit. Either drag this up or use a scroll wheel or whoever you scroll, get to the top and there's these little buttons here at the top. Show me only handwriting fonts, please. It's going to go through everything that's available inside of Canva and go, writing ones. You'll notice some of them have a crown next to it, so that's for the paid people. There's plenty though that are part of the free account. It's going to allow me just to cut it down to these ones here. Now, the trouble with some of the handrawn fonts is they're a little bit hard to read. You can see this one here is only uppercase. There's no lowercase version of it. That is a nice thing you can do. At the top here, I've filtered by handwriting. You can type it in there. It's easier just to go through this little one and say display fonts, hitting fonts, paragraph Sanserf, just a quick little one Uh, we won't go too much. Headings obviously good for headings. It's going to be a little bit more exciting and bold. Okay? Paragraph is going to be stuff for your body copy. Plain, boring stuff, but very clear and easy to read. The only other two that I'll talk about are Sanserf and serf. Serif are basically fonts that have the worldy feet Zoom in. These are seraps. See this little guy here? He's a Seraph. That's a Seraph. The other one in there, Sanserf SanserfO Sans is Latin fall without seraps. Sera font, have the feet, Sans seraph without the feet. That's one thing you will be looking at, and we'll cover more and more in this course, but sometimes you want this more, I don't know, formal style font, and then if you want San serif, it's going to give you fonts that are a little bit more, don't have the serifs, more modern, less wildi. But anyway, I ended up finding one that I liked. It's called Coming Soon. You can type in the top. Okay, I was called coming soon. I liked it. It was kind of Do I like it? I don't like it anymore. I like it when it's preparing. It's too much comic Sansi for me, I like it now, but we're stuck with it now. So find your font. One of the other common things when you're doing text is you can do, let's say that I type in my name Dan Scott. I'm going to put a return. Dan Scott is the speaker of this quote. You can go in here and change the font and the size of different parts of the text, but it's very hard to control Dan Scott separately from this box. You will find and Canva is really common, especially when we're working in, say, an Instagram design is I'm going to get rid of that. It's really common to click off in the background, hit the Tiki, and just have it in a separate textbox. I'm going to type Dan Scott Scott and use that as a separate, he's back as a separate textbox so that I can rotate it. Then I might go through and say, fonts, I'm going to say not coming soon. I'm going to say handwriting, I'm going to find something that looks like it was done with a pen. No, that looks like it was done with a pen. But you get what I mean, It is very common to have headings in separate boxes from your paragraph text, which is separate from this one. The other thing is, I really want to put a hyphen in here, but I know it does default to trying to make hyphens, bullet points. There's a little bit of a workaround, but you can do it. It's a little bit of a hack to try and put the bullet point in and then type in another hyphen, delete the bullet point. That's what I'm looking for. I'm going to rotate this around. I'm going to spend way too long picking your font, and you wait. Well, it didn't take very long at all. Really liked that one. Looks like I did it with my brush. All right. Another thing while we're in here with fonts is that once you've picked one, you're like, I like that. Can I use it over here? You can. What you can do is you can select on it and you can say, see this little copy style or over here, it's the same thing where is it copy style? It doesn't matter. You've copied it from the thing you have selected. Now you got to rub it on something. Look, rub it on there. So have it selected, hit copy, and then paste it on something else. Where are you? It's going to pick the same font and the same size. I'm going to undo that because I like them how they were. But if you do find that you've got a font you like, I like that. Instead of having to go through and type it in every single time with the same font and the same size, you can use this thing here, the copy style roller thing. All right. That's going to be enough for fonts for this video. We've covered loads here. We'll get more and more advanced as we go through the course, but here you go. I'll see you in the next video. 18. Class Project 02 - Reopening Quote: Hello. It's class project time. We're going to put some of our skills into action that we've learned over the last few videos. Okay, we're going to create this. It's a quote. So we've been asked by the client to say, Hey, we want some Instagram square posts with quotes from our reopening. They're made up for a practice. Obviously, in real life, you'd have to use real ones, but for the moment, we've got some practice ones, and here are the requirements. Oh, re opening quote, make sure it's Instagram square post size. That's what we've been doing so far the post must include. Make sure you've got a frame in the background with an abstract image in it. Something that's good in contrast against the text. This is quite light compared to the dark text. I picked another one, doesn't read as well. I'll show you a tricks of fixing that later on, but something it has quite dark so light text can so you might have to go back and check out frames earlier on, put an image in it, do that. Use the customer quote and the customer name. I've got some examples down here. You can use them. You can create your own one. It's up to you. I just want you to experiment with colors and fonts and get something like this going. Then I want you to do an option B. Basically just duplicate the page like I've done. I've made a second version, what I've done is I've experimented with a couple of things. The main one I want you to experiment with is the design styles. Remember, we did this section in here. I'm going to wreck my own eye. I'm going to click on it, and I'm going to go into design. I'm going to go into styles and remember there's the combination it's going to go change all the colors and the fonts or I can go through color palettes and fonts separately, or I can pull them from the image. I want you to experiment with a second version. You've got two of them. They are quite distinct. I want to undo mine because I quite like my original one, undo, undo, undo. Anyway, you got two options to go back to the client with. The other thing that I've gotten there is to experiment with magic right. I've got the same quoke see kudos on the redesign. I can click on this. Now, at the moment, this is free for everybody. You might want to check. This might be a pro version later on. Magic writes is quite useful. I can click on this and say, actually, I want you to rewrite it, make it more formal, more fun. It's going to try and match it similarly in terms of length, but it's going to change the tone of it. You don't have to use this. It's a nice easy way to experiment with some AI, some artificial intelligence. Obviously, we couldn't really use this because it's not the actual quote from the just experimenting and working with and have a little write with I really like rewrite. Often, what I'll do is I'll type something out my English and grammar, you've probably already noticed in this course, isn't great. So often I'll just type in something that I feel like it's right, might be a heading, might be a paragraph, and then I hit magic write and go rewrite, and it just cracks it. More formal, more fun. I can shorten it a little bit. It's pretty amazing what it can do. This will change a little bit. It's quite new feature, they'll keep changing the wa it looks. But I have a little experiment with magic write. If you're on the Pro account. It's not essential in this one. I just want you to have more than one, something that they look different. You might have to resize your textbox and there you go. Do the first option, duplicate it. I called mine Option two, so I got two option twos. I got Option two A and Option two B. I'm going to go to the client with both of them and say, which one do you like? Then I want you to upload a screenshot of your two options. So taking a screenshot of two of them is a little bit tricky. I'm on this not scrollview, I'm on thumbnail view. I'm on Scroll view. Okay, click it. So you've got you can scroll up and down, and then you can just lower this down. Okay, till you can see both of them and then take a screenshot and upload that to the class projects. So OomaCs Command Shift four, and I can just drag a box around it, and it ends up on my desktop. That's Command Shift and four. On a PC, hold down the Windows key and then hit your print screen. Some older versions of Windows, you might have to double check what version you're using. If it's new, it might have a new version. Okay? I'm using Mac in this, but you'll notice that if you're using PC, the software looks mostly the same except screenshots are different. On a PC, I'm pretty sure it's Windows key and hit Print screen. And you should end up with that screenshot inside your pictures folder in a folder called screenshots. Onto Mac, it ends up on the desktop. Big messy desktop. You upload that? Is that on the class projects? Yeah. For this one, we're going to do it slightly different. I want you to share on social media as well. We've got a bit of customization going on. Yours doesn't look like mine. I'd love to see you two options. Share on social media. Here's my Instagram, here's my Twitter. Here's the Facebook group or LinkedIn group. It doesn't matter it could be all of the places. It could be just one of the places. It could be none of the places. If you're never sharing anything ever. You can do that. That's fine. But I do love to see people's stuff, and it is really handy, especially because there's lots of people doing this course. They'll be able to see your stuff. You'll be able to ask for a lot of feedback. You can tell them just getting started in the Canva course. Here's the thing. What do you? Kind of feels like a lot. Really, I just want you to make a design and experiment with fonts and color, then do a second one and start playing around with the design styles, get a sense of how those work and then share it. One last thing as I left an example, you'll see they don't really fit on the same page. I leave the what I would like you to make. So you can see, you'll see this one up here. Hey, that's the last one. This is this one here, it doesn't quite fit on the page, but you get the idea. I'll put little examples as we go through so you get a sense of, am I doing it right? I don't want to look like mine, but it's the same structure and it'll have the content that I'm asking for in the words up the top here. You get the idea. All right. I will see you in the next video. 19. How to add drop shadows to text in Canva: Hey, everyone. Let's explore some of the text effects in Canva. Basically, they allowed us to add things like drop shadows. Really good when we want text to really separate from the background, if it's hard to read. There's some interesting cool effects and stuff you can do with type. Add a bit of excitement to your heading text. Let's jump in. All right. First thing is, I'm going to click on the little Zoom option and say fit and scroll to the top. I'm going to work on this first option, option A one. Actually the very first one we did. What I'm going to do is the first thing you need to know about text effects is that they can't apply to all texts. This text here, sitting on top of this rectangle has text effects. This text that's inside of a rectangle, we started with a rectangle, we added text inside of it doesn't have effex. If you did want this to happen, what you'd end up doing is with a T tool, click T, you'd have a paragraph and clicking off, moving it there. Then separately, you'd have an element and you'd go, of photos, go down to shape, and you'd make these two things separately. Can you see the texts flashing in there? That works what we want to do up here. But if we want to add effect to this, we'd have these two separate things a text inside of a rectangle, they are separate. I'm going to delete you and delete you. We've got this one. What I want to do is have this up the top. I'm going to move this down the bottom. I want this to appear on the background image. Now, mine stands off pretty well. Yours is probably not. You've got a different brand, different font, different color, double click on mine and move it around that is less good. We're talking about rotation back to zero, get it up here. Is that work? Yeah, it's getting a bit worse. Ticks effects are really good for not just kind of like styly effects, but actually making things legible, especially when there's text against kind of a model background. It's cake effects, and you probably don't need me to go through them all. Okay? A shadow adds a drop shadow. The one thing I will mention is shadow and lift. For me, they feel they're kind of the same, but they're I don't know. They feel different. I feel like this should be good shadow and that should be called Lift. Lift is, I don't know what I call a traditional drop shadow. Can you see that kind of like, you know, they shadow, the drop shadow, but they call it lift. Shadow is just it replicates the color that's being used in the font and just makes another copy of it, zumin. Helps it stand off. The one thing about this is confusing? It's not once you get used to it. So what happens is, if I click none, we've got all these options here. If I click on Shadow, what happens is all the shadow options open up underneath it and push this down. They're all still here. You can switch to spice. You see now splice has come up and show me my splice options. Go back to none. If you are just figuring it out and going, W this one done, and you feel like you might have lost go back to nun and it'll clear them all off, and then you can start again and go, Non intensity. They all have their own options. I'm not going to go through them all. The one things I do want to show you is some fonts do some weird stuff. This one here, what is this one called? This one is called, yeah, Gaglin better way of pronouncing that. But some of the effects in this one, let's have a look at hollow doesn't wed stuff. If your fonts doing some weird stuff, it's probably not the effects problem, it's the font. It has some complexity that this doesn't know what to do with undo it. Going to go back to the top one here and let's go back to shadow, actually lift. You see here, you can play around with how well it separates itself from the background. All of these just variations of it. One of the ones that are interesting is neon will wash out your color. If you start with, let's say, black and I click on Neon and goes weird. What you want to do is start with a nice color. I'm going to go to my colors, start with something vibrant and then not that vibrant, and then go to my effects and then hit that and you'll see it I don't know, works better when you start with a color. I want to show you in terms, I'll let you play around with the effects is one is this one here, background. That is quite a useful one. It's doing the same thing, but differently. This one here is a rectangle with text in it. This is a text box with a rectangle around the outside. They're actually quite different. Well, they're not. They look the same. But this one here wraps around the text. The cool thing about it is that it changes depending on the size of the text. Was this one is more of a frame and everything tries to fit within the rectangle. Anyway, very similar. That's the only other one you might use is that background color or often I'll end up just drawing a rectangle in the background because I want it to be a little bit wider than it is tall. I don't like the evenness around it. I like my textboxes to often have a little bit of extra space left and right. It's not really a rule, my rule. This one here has roundness I like to pull off and the color I'm going to adjust. They all have their own options in terms of what you might do in addition. Okay? Select them, have a mess around with these. They're pretty easy to work through. Roundness, spreads are weird word, but it's just how far out from the text and you want it to be transparent or not? Oh, fancy. You've all probably done. You click on Glitch. Do love a bit of glitching. Probably the wrong color for it, but you get the idea. That is text effects. Really good for getting text to pop off the background. One last little hack before I go, I end up doing this a lot. Instead of using the rectangle, and trying transparency, what I'll tend to do is turn it to none, grab my shape tool. Elements, I'm going to go to shapes, rectangle, and I'm going to depending on what sort of size you want it to be, end up doing this. We're doing a similar sort of thing, but I get to decide the height and the width. Maybe it's like this, BC, I want it to tidy in on the edges here. If you hold down Option key on a mac, key on a PC where you drag the corners, the sides, it does both the left and the right. I want something like that. Remember the spread on the last one, the height was exactly the same as the width of the box and then do something like this. I want you to be black and then I'm going to close it down, play with transparency. This one here, how see through it is. I find this is a good way of cheating. Without it being a real obvious design element, the text separate from the background quite easily. One last quick thing, if you have got effects already applied to something or it's come from a template, just select it, click on Effex and it should open up with the effects that are applied. All that is it. Text Effects in Canva. 20. How do you curve text around a badge in Canva: Everyone, in this video, we're going to do this. We're going to curve text around the top and the bottom of our little badge here. It's easy to do. Let me show you how. Curving text is easy. Scrab the type tool, so hit T on your keyboard and type in free popcorn. I'll zoom a little bit and with it selected, go to affix and just down the bottom here, it says curve. Look, done and all you do is drag this left and right. The more you drag it to the right, the more curved it becomes. If you drag it all the way back to this middle part, it's basically flat until if you keep going, it curves it the other way around. I curves it from the up a little tips for doing curve text is the first one is that you can actually drag. My advice, the short answer is just use the slider. Feels quite disconnected. I really want to mess around with it over here. Problem with dragging the corners here is that the font size changes, but so does the circle and you're chasing your tail going, I want the circle bigger, but then I want the font smaller. But then now the circle is smaller. Attached. So get the font size you want. I want it at about 20. I'm going to type in 20, and then I'm going to play with this curve slider over here. It's just easier that way. I'm going to get you to be you. Other tips. Don't do that, Dan. Alright, let's grab the curve. I want the curve to be bigger. Probably want the font size to be well, do them separately. Do the font size, then play around with the curve, get it in the right position. One of the other tips when you are dealing with this badge style logo thing is that lowercase and uppercase, this title case style up the top here is a pain in the butt. It doesn't work very well, it doesn't look quite right. It's mainly because of this see this descender. We talked about them earlier. That's an Ascender pops up above the middle here, that one's a bit higher. That's the only one low, makes it hard to line up. If you're finding it's looking just go through with your type. I can't see my cases up there. I'm going to close down this to make it a bit bigger. There it is. I'm going to go in here and say uppercase, please. Things just work better when it's all uppercase. The other thing you can do with text here is go into your text over here, actually, let's go to this one here called spacing. If you can't see it along the top here because your screen is not big enough remember with the text seleg just go there and say spacing wise, and go spacing wise. Letter spacing something you probably need to mess around with with something like this where it's this badge. You want to make it wrap, you want to make it still legible. The last thing is that if you want a line at the top here, so free popcorn. I make mine a little bit bigger. Here we go. But you want to line down the bottom as well. You want free popcorn. I'm going to have all day, like we saw at the beginning there. They're actually just two separate boxes. You can't do it all in one go. You can't say, popcorn into all day. Can you see it just adds it to the same text blocks. I'm going to undo that. What I'm going to do is just copy and paste this. I've got two of them. And I'm going to change the texts to all day and then I'm going to go to my effects, and that is what? 63. Come on down. You can read. Just change it to -63 instead of dragging it. It's the opposite. It's the same curve, but the opposite of what you had. Then lastly, for me, I want to add a circle around the background. I'm going to go elements. I'm going to go to find my shapes. Find you might have to go to SEL I'm going to click on the circle because I can see it, and I'm going to go there. The only problem is the layers. Who remembers where the layers are? Hands up. You got it position, and then go to layers, and I'm just going to go, you need to behind the popcorn. Nothing lines up, Dan. Don't worry. We'll do that in the next video. But we got there, right? I'm just going to drag it for the moment. We've got curve at the top at the bottom. Make sure it's uppercase. Things are just easier that way. If you need to go to the top and the bottom separately, that is two separate textboxes with the curve effect plight. All right. That's it. And we'll see you in the next video. 21. How to Group Lock & Aligning things in Canva: Hello. We are going to group stuff, ungroup stuff, lock stuff, align stuff, shift, click, do all sorts of weird stuff, sounds boring, useful stuff. There'll be a couple of things in here that you'd be like, There you go. Didn't know that. As boring as a title sounds is the thing you do all day every day. Grouping, locking, aligning, selecting, get on with it, Dan. Let's get going. All right. So I'm going to my little badge that we've made by just dragging the sideways. You can use this little up and down slider to get it where you need to be. Let's do some selecting grouping aligning stuff. There's lots of different combinations. Let's say that I want to select both this and this text at the bottom here at the same time and I want to change both the font and the size of them together. I don't want to group them. I want to select both of them. You do that by selecting one of them, hold Shift and grab the second one of them. You see I've done this it's a group, temporary. I can move them around together, which is handy. But what's useful here is I can say, you're multiple fonts. I'm like, No, I want you to be both quicksand. I both want you to be, let's say, we're using 26, you get them perfect. Actually, you might need to be smaller. That's a good way of selecting two things at once, a little bit bigger. There we go. The other thing I want to do with these two is click them both. Hold shift is I want to go to not fonts, like the little arrow over here if you can't see it and come down to position. I want these guys to be aligned together. Then what I want to do is I want to group these guys. Group is more like a permanent these guys, I don't have to shift click them both now. They just move around together forever. I can go inside of them and do small changes, so I don't have to ungroup them to go through and say, A we're not doing popcorn. Popcorn is too messy, we're going to do coffee and go through and change it there. You can do small changes. If you need to ungroup them, you can hit Ungroup. There is a shortcut. Command G is to group them. That's Control G on a PC. Ungroup them is Command Shift G on a Mac. Control Shift G on a PC. Ungroup them or you can hit the button or you can right click them. There's lots of ways of grouping where is it? Group there it is there. Group, right click. Group, easy. Now we're lining these up. These two are going to be easy. I've just shift, clicked them both. I've got them both selected. You can tell they're off. I made them off on purpose. I'm going to say I want you to be middle and center, right in the middle of each other. These two here, I'm going to group them together because together, if I shift click, you and you, I've got these guys, I go middle, middle, they should all line up nicely. If they were ungrouped and I did the same thing, shift click, and I try and go middle, middle. It's not quite what I want. If they're grade out and you're like, Hey, mine's grade out. Mine grade out? It's because they're already centered. I don't know why. They just have it clickable. But anyway, I'm going to group these two. Command G, control GNPC, select all of these guys, and I'm going to go Center. They're both grade out because I've already done it. Now, it's probably handy to go through and group these guys. If yours like mine disappeared, what do you think happened? Didn't actually have that bit selected. I'm going to undo Shift click, you You. But I haven't got this, but it's hard to select that guy because he's behind everything in there. What do we do? There's the right way of doing it and then there's the way that I'd probably end up doing it. I'll show you both. The right way is I'm going to select it, I'm going to go position, I'm going to go layers, I'm going to say, best just be underneath this. Then I can go select, hold shift, grab the text, and then grab this, then group them. They're all together. It's one unit and you're like, what was the way he was going to do? I normally do this. Instead of messing around with the layers, what I tend to do is especially when I work in a document, there's this thing here. I don't want to move it. It's a good segue to locking things. Like this thing stop moving Because it gets a way of secting right because I could drag a box around all of that if this stuff wasn't in the way. So what I tend to do is once I've got this and this sorted, I select everything. I just dragged a box from this edge here going image and you. You could shift click them both. I was going to say you my friend are going to be locked. How do I do it? Right click it and say, all it means is, I can't really select it anymore. I won't move. I can right click it and unlock it. That's totally cool. But what it means is now is I can work on this and select all of these guys. You see? I can group them. Wow, that was a long way of doing it. What do you think? That's what I end up doing is I end up getting frustrated by the background box. I'm like, Hey, stop moving. Background image, stop moving. Lock them, and then you can do all sorts of cool stuff by slicking everything on the page, but it's not going to click those background elements. And you can say, I just want to move you around a little bit, get the idea. Groups are good. It allows you to move them around as one unit and do small changes. I can say free coffee is now bold, the top and this bottom one now, I'm going to sect it all and pick a different font. Close it down, click off in the background. Nice. One last thing I want to do just to remind you is that what happens if I drag this all the way off? I still there. No, gone. Okay. Just remind you. If things disappear, it's because you drag them off into this pasteboard area and Cam doesn't like that and just deletes them. All my friends, that is selecting, aligning, locking, grouping, ungrouping. We did lots. Is everybody sick of this down here? Every time I look up, this thing's doing something. It's distracting. You're probably doing the same. Go be off elements. Go away weird dog sticker and I don't know, who's using these? Anyway, let's close them down and let's finish up, deep breath and done. I'll see you in the next video. 22. Dotted & Arrowed Lines with Text in Canva: Hello. Let's talk about lines. It is not as boring as it sounds. We're going to kind of do something fancy with dotted lines and the little ends on it, but then I'll show you some cool stuff where things are actually connected, and you can add text that follows it along. Plus, I'm going to share with you the super duper most awesomest shortcut that rules them all. It's basically the only shortcut you're ever going to need. Let's go. All right. I'm going to work on the second page. I'm using Page Down to jump down there. Let's go to elements, and we're looking for the lines. They're under shapes. Elements, scroll until you find shapes. Click on see all and you'll notice that for some reason, shapes also has lines. That's okay. You can turn any line into any other line after you've made it, you don't have to really pick it to start one. I'm going to pick this little barbel one, and I'm going to click hold and drag the line or you can drag the little move thing. Get it to where you want. I want to go across underneath here, what you'll notice is that it's really happily snapping to things, which is mostly good. Sometimes, though, you just want it to I want it to go down 45 degrees. It's really hard to get it to go 45 degrees by you see 41, 39. Come on. What you can do is hold down the Shifky If you hold the shift key while I'm still dragging, I'm going to undo that. I've got it here, I'm dragging it, hold shift, it'll lock it into the kind numbers that you probably want, 45, 90, zero, 15, it locks it into some I don't know, most commonly used angles. We've got it there. Let's go and change a few things. You can see most of it along the top here, it doesn't matter whether you're in here or along here. It doesn't matter. Let's have a quick little look. End points, those are the bar beels. I want to make it in let's say an arrow or more like a dumbbell with circles on the end. You can see it changes. You need to click off to see it. Another thing that ends up happening is let's get rid of them, none and none. Yeah, none and none. Then they look like they've got arrows, the beginning and the end of it. It's nothing there. Let's go to the style. So we're a type. Let's make it dotted, let's go into stroke under line style here, you can play with the thickness of it, but also what kind of line it is? Is it dotted, dashed, dotted, dashed, and I don't know, the other one. Too dashed. The other thing that is useful is, let's say, mine's too big, right? I've just got mine quite big so you can see it there easily. Let's say I want the dots. You can see rounded end gives you that more dot tot, tot and less square square square. Up to you. It works for these ones as well. Can you see if I have a rounded end or not rounded end? That's also true of a straight line. Sometimes lines look a bit funny when they're not when they're I've got what's called a butt cap when it's nice and flat at the end. This is a rounded cap. All right, so there's times where you need both. Often, when it's small, you can't really tell the difference, so we won't stress over it. Let's have a look at some of the other functionalities of it. I'm going to go just quickly jump back. Let's go superfast mode. All right, I'm happy with that line. Next one is I want the arrow that reaches around here. It's going to show a few little extras that the line tool can do. The other thing I'm going to do is show you a sweet shortcut. I'm going to introduce it more and more in the course. It's the shortcut to rule them all. It's the best shortcut ever. It is the Ford slash key. You've got two of them, backslash, leans back, the Ford slash on my keyboard, it's tied in with the question marks the Ford slash key. Then you can just type in anything. I'm going to type in line. What do I want to do? Do I want to change the line style or do I want to add a line shape? I click on this. The cool thing about that is this thing here is a little bit clumsy, you're like, Alright I need a line. All right. It's under elements. It's scroll, scroll, scroll, getting distracted by videos. Okay, where is it? It's under lines. No, it's under shapes. Is it under shapes? Here it is. What I end up doing and what you'll find really useful is keeping that closed and just going, A document up here, I need a line. I'm just going to hit forwardslash, type in line and then go there it is, and then I get a line. Ford slash again and I'm going to say, I need a square. Spell square right. It's come under rectangle. Come on, Dan, rectangle. I get a rectangle. If I hit forward slash now, it's going to type a Ford slash. I have to click off or hit escape. Hit forward slash and say, I need a chicken. Not sure why I need chicken. Let's go. Chicken. Here we go. Got a dip dab one of them. That shortcut is super handy for everything. Need a video of a chicken dabbing dipping, what everybody's doing? You can just had Forward slash and type it in. I use it all the time. It is super helpful. Oh, down here, let's add another line. So we're going to use our forward slash forward slash line. Do I need a line chart? No, just the line. Okay. And what I'm going to do is if you grab any of these ends, you'll see it snaps to stuff. The weird thing about lines, it's good and bad.This is weird and good at the same time. What if I put it to here. It's attached to the end of this. I snapped to the end of this textbox. What happens when I move the textbox. Wow. This is going to be handy when we get into our presentations part of the course. But we're doing lines, so let's learn about lines. Yeah, it means that you can snap them and attach them. Sometimes you're like, Oh, that's super handy. A lot of the time, you're like, What are you doing? Why are you connected? Oh, yeah, Dan said, It's a feature. Not a bog I'm going to grab this end and go, A I'm going to connect it. Maybe we're going to connect it. All I'm going to just snap it in there. And what you'll notice is, it's connected to both sides now. If you're like, stop it, all you do is click on it and grab it and break it off, or you can just click on line and hit delete on your keyboard. Up to you, how you want to disconnect it. I like it. It's cool and let's dig in a bit more to line. I'm going to go into here. I always end up this double arrow. You don't have to. You could use it up here and say, I want the end to be an arrow and I want to grab the stroke, drag it up a bit higher. Now what I want to do is play around with this line type or go into this one where Dan feels more comfortable and safe. I'm going to go to line type and I'm going to go to curved. It means that I can do this. Juke I'm probably going to need to actually, I want to get mine snapped from the edge of the circle to this text box here. It still is it connected to the textbox? Probably not. But it's okay. I want it pointed to the text, not snapping to the edge of this and you drag this middle part around to how curve you want it. You want more control with handles that pop out. If you're an illustrator person, you'll be like, give me the handles. We don't have the handles here in Canva. It's kept it simple, which is good. I'm going to do something like this. The other thing I want to do a little trick for lines, if I double click it. Look at that. We can add text. I'm going to say nearly here exclamation mark. Look at all the text. I'm going to go Command Shift and use my left than to make it smaller. That's control shift. Less than. The cool thing about that and that's going to be better and better with presentations when you're trying to do flow charts and Gant charts and stuff, you see it's connected to the line, which is super helpful. You can grab it as well and jiggle it around a little bit, not full control, but some control. All right, I'm going to change the color of my line. I'm going to go into here. I'm going to go stroke color. I'm going to pick one of the colors. Actually, I have no idea, so I'm just going to mix one, grab the hue, slide along, find something that I think will work with my yellowy mandarin and purple vibe. I'm going to go something like this. Maybe I'm not. I don't know. That'll do. All right. Same thing. You can kind of format your text in here. I'm going to pig. Let's go to the fonts that we're using before. He's coming soon. This one doesn't have a bold. So I'm going to make it a little bit bigger. Use my sweet shortcut. Alright, that's everything to do with lines. Lot more than you thought, right? You're like, you just going to talk about lines? No, look, there's lots of cool stuff you can do for it. A little kind of weirdness as well. Last thing I want to do is I want to. I really like them having rounded ends. So I'm going to go into here, into my line type, or with a stroke, sorry and then go and make it rounded for something that nobody's going to notice but me and you. See the little end there. It's got a little rounded cap. All right. That's it. Line over. I'll see you in the next video. 23. How to modify shapes in Canva: Hello. Hey, in this video, we're going to look at the handy things to know about shapes inside of Canva. And if you hang to the end, I will also give you some super sweet navigation shortcuts that you'll find are super useful now that you are getting a little bit better in Canva. All right, let's go. All right. So shapes are easy. There are other elements. We looked at it a second ago under shapes. These are a bunch of premade ones. Okay, let's just add something else. Let's go to anyone. You've got a little bit of control, but not much. So if you are thinking, oh, how do I add one more star point to this? You can't. What you can do is you can say, right in here, I can see the corners. Can round them. There's very little you can do, but there are some things you can do like adding a border to it on the outside and you can decide how rounded the corners are. The other interesting thing about shapes is that you can change them. This here was a circle shape. I can go into here and say, Hey, you change to now this more like I don't know, award winning wine foil sticker thing. That's cool. You're not forced to keep it the way it was. Same with this rectangle here. I'm not sure what we'd want to, but you could go through and say, right, I want it to be well, I can see, you want it to be this. You can adjust them obviously slightly. You can make this thing a it could be elongated and squished and rotated, but there's not too much control about what you could do other than rounding the corners. But it's good to know you can change them. I'm going to use my undo key. Remember command or Control Z, I'm going to leave that as a nice little star. I'm going to get rid of you. One last thing about shapes is frames are quite similar to shapes, they look the same. But obviously, they crop images. You don't have the ability to go through and change a lot of these options like you can do with the shapes. They're the same, different. That's one thing I keep trying to do is like, Alright why don't you be a square or a star now. You can't do that, you'd have to go through and detach the image. Separated, add a star. So we're going to use our supersweet shortcut, the Ford slash key, and I'm going to type in star star frame. Hit Enter. It does a search, I'm going to say, which one? I don't know, that one. I'm going to then go and try and drag it in, and it's a long way. I'd be great if you could just change the shape, but you can't, and that's something to know. And we got to practice our supersweet shortcut. I'm going to go undo, undo, undo, so I'm back to where it was. I promised you at the beginning a couple of other little shortcuts that are just quite handy when you are using camera a lot. We've been using this page scroll way of working. Why have been at least. Times when you're doing posts, sometimes it's easier just to work in this what do they call it the scroll view versus thumbnail view. Then you can just cycle through these or use your page page down. We'll cycle through them. Makes more sense maybe for R Instagram post. The other one is I do a lot of zooming in. When we were working in here, remember Zoom insommandPlus, or Control plus on a PC and I'm in there working on my lines and then I want to zoom out. Often, the best option is to go U and go to Fit. But there's no shortcut for it. At least it doesn't say there is one. I'm going to zoom in. Okay. The shortcut is command option and zero. Control Alt, zero on your PC. I'll make sure that's in the shortcut sheet, but I use that a lot. It's just a great way of getting to a nice view. Bit of a weird one, though, Command option, zero on Mac. Control Alt, zero on a PC. Zero is the one along the top of your keyboard, with all the numbers, zero. They know what zero is Dan. All right, that shapes, the things you can and can't do with them plus some sweet navigation tricks. All right. I'll see you in the next video. 24. How to add & change color of Graphics & Collections: All right. This video, we're going to look at these things graphics. Graphic is universal term for lots of things in Campa. We're going to look at them. We're going to look at how to change them, change the color of them. I'll show you what a collection is and how handy that can be. All right, my friend, let's jump into graphics in Campa. Graphics is an overall term used for lots of different things. Elements and there's graphics, let's go to see all, and it has lots in here. Anything that's not a shape or a line that is something house is a graphic. Somehow, a gradient is a graphic, stickers. When you're doing animated posts, there's all sorts of stuff. So let's have a look. I've got magic recommendations from the chicken because I don't know how we ended up with a chicken one of the last videos, but there you go. What we're going to do is be a bit more purposeful. I want you to type in your animal that you've got from your business. I've got Fox. There are some filter options. I'm going to say I want static ones, not animated. And you can pick some colors. I'm going to close my filter down by just clicking on it. Now, when you are looking for graphics, all you do is click on one to add it, Big old graphic appears. Or you can click hold and drag it out. You need to drag it out to the middle, not onto the sides because it doesn't like that. Remember, they just delete. The other thing that is useful for graphics is that there's two things magic recommendations. Canva uses the word magic when they are saying things like artificial intelligence, machine learning. It's going, Hey, you've clicked on this. Look at we think might be also useful. I don't need a wolf as well, but sometimes it can be handy to find other things. Especially when you're doing things like, all right, let's do social media. Let's do you want Instagram logo, and you click on this one, and let's just click it at it. I'll say, Hey, do you want these other ones? You like, actually, that one's cooler. I like the square one. It's helpful sometimes, not helpful other times. Let's go back to Fox because some other things that are quite helpful for it is that what you're hoping for is, let's say instead of a Fox, I want a speech bubble, okay? And the cool thing about some of these options that ape, I'm going to try and pick a free one. Let's go for a paid one because I know it's probably going to work. The P one here, this one's quite interesting because what it's doing is it's giving me a shape, awesome. I can kind of scale it. I can go into these options here. I've got not a lot of options. Okay? But down here under the basics or up the top there, you can see the colors. This is really handy because my fox, let's grab the fox out of there as well. Fox. Which 1:00 A.M. I going to grab? Which one do I like, Oh, look how happy Okay, so the fox here, I can't change the colors, but look at this. If I click on the speech bubble. Look I can go through and say, I want to pick my brand colors. In this case, I want to pick them from my eye jobber tool, I'm going to use that color. Actually, I'm going to use my purple. Then instead of the green, I'm going to click on the green and I'm going to say not the green, I want you to pick the Is that background color there. You can get them in line with your brand and working with other things on the document. They don't all have that. Just some of the more professional ones. It depends on how they're built. Some of them will, some of them won't. Just keep an eye on them. Some of them have lots of different colors you can change. So of them only have one. I'm going to go add some text to that in a second. Things I want to show you before I start adding text is collections. What is also handy is actually before collections. Let's say I want something else here. I want some other kind of thing. I can we click this and I can go down to info, and I can say see more like this and it will show other things that are quite similar. Like, that's it. But I want the one that is a bit more squary on the outside. You can see always got three colors to change. Excellent. That's helpful. Then it's given this magic recommendations. You can do it from here by going to the Info one like we just did and going to see more like this or you can do it over here. I can go to my recently used this one here. You show me more like this. That's that AI try have a look at other images within their library to find something similar. The other cool thing, which is the same, but different. Instead of letting AI do it, some of the actual images or graphics are part of what's called a collection. All collection really means is the designer who made this graphic did a bunch of different things. Let's have a look. This all of them have it, but this one here is part of a collection, which is awesome. You can see this is part of a set. They're all very similar. I can go through and say this one has very similar styling to this one and I can use it for different parts. But you can see it's the same thing. Have a look at one that's maybe a bit clearer. Let's have a look at this Fox. Is it part of a collection? It's not. Boom. I'm going to go to Fox and just keep clicking on stuff until I find one that's part of a collection. Fox Graphics see all. Let's go. Are you part of a collection? Nope. Not all of them have collections, but when they do, what you'll find is, look, they're all quite similar. I needed a safari group of animals. I'm not trying to match all sorts of different lines and styles and oh, look at this. I'm not sure what I excited, but I can change the color of them. Okay? That excites me. Oh, that's just his eyes. I made his eyes red by accident. But there you go. Graphics. Some of them are editable. Collections are really handy because you can find groups of stuff. Especially when you're looking for things like social media. You need the Twitter logo to look like let's go for social media. This one here, let's go. Let's go for A's part of a collection. You can see, look, they're all the same things, and hopefully when I use them, I can change all the colors to the brand colors. Great for icons. Maybe you're doing a website or an app layout in Canva. Collections are good. One last thing before you go. I'm going to look at graphics. If you scroll all the way to the bottom, there's all these collections these ones have been curated, let's say. Sometimes it's just really nice to find something that, that is what we're doing, right? Now I can start. I can judge the colors, side. But I can start using these super graphics or abstract backgroundi type things that aren't really essential to the design, but just really elevate what I'm trying to do in the vibe I'm going for holding my command key down and using the square brackets to go backwards. I find some of these things, I don't know. I go from very literal text, logo image to some of these things that just support the design that are quite nice and often I find them in these collections that somebody else has gone through and curated. So graphics are exciting, especially when they've got adjustable colors turns out. I don't know that about myself. There you go. A couple of last little shortcuts for navigating. I kind of sprinkling them in the course as we go around. So I've got this, and let's say I want to kind just bump it across a bit. I can just use my rakey. Often, it can be hard to kind of tries to snap the stuff. Like, stop stop snapping. You kind get it all you want, get it the size you kind want it. And then you can use the arrow keys. So select it. Use your arra keys on your keyboard, just move it around. You can hold shift to move it in big chunks. Okay, so shift and arrow keys, you can kind of hear me smashing away at keyboard here. Okay? And then just without the shift key, just it moves just a little bit. With shift key, a lot. Okay? So I use that quite a lot when I'm trying to just line things up and you're like, Well, I want it to kind of be there, but maybe just a little bit behind a little bit there. Then my command or control backspace is getting behind everything. Oh. We fancy. We're going to impress anybody that's walking behind us with our sweet shortcuts. It's totally half the reason I learn these things is so that I can impress people with my sweet shortcuts. Oh, do I like that? Oh, I kind of like a bone I read it. Away. The last thing I'm going to do is you can go now. I'm just going to add text to this. I guess I want to show you it just because I want to mention that. Some graphics, can I double clicked it and it just opened the crop. It's not what I want. I want text inside of this. It was easy to add it to a shape, but a graphic, like a frame, you need to add a separate textbox. I said the type key or the T key and let's type in. Free popcorn, I'm going to move it. I'm going to click out of it, click back on it. I'm just going to click and drag it. Sometimes that thing appears the move key and sometimes it doesn't. That's what I guess wanted to show you is that all graphics, you have to put a textbox on the top of it, to go through and pick a font, and I'm going to go back to my handwriting font. I'm going to find something. That is legible, not legible. I'm using uppercase. Let's go to title case, Enter. Then I'm going to spend forever going through, picking a font. He's coming soon because we've already used it. Then I'm going to go through and say, size wise down a little bit. I'm going to shift click them both, I got them both selected and I'm going to group them using the shortcut, which is Command G, Control G on a PC. Thank you. There we go. Now it's a little unit, I can move around. That is it. That is graphics in Canva. I'll see you in the next video. 25. Class Project 03 - Instagram Post: All right, time for the next class project. We've learned loads of skills for the last few videos, and we're going to wrap them up in this class project here. We're going to finish off this one. We started with this early on in the course. It was one of the early class projects. If you haven't, you can rush and catch up. And then I want you to take it to the next level with all the skills that we've learned. Okay, what are those skills? I want you to make sure there's a badge. Okay? I'm calling this a badge, and it's going to have the thing you're giving away with the text wrapped around it or group. Okay, that's what I want you to do. Use that curve text effects feature that we learned. I want you to group it just a practice. I want you to add a call to action sentence. A CTA or call to action is we're trying to get people to do something. My one, which is not great is come and see what the buzz is all about. Do something like that. I don't mind what it is. It's more just an element that we can lay out here in Canva. I want you to play with lines, one or more. I've got one there, go one there. You can put yours wherever. I don't mind. Just play around with them. Graphics, there's two kinds of graphics I want you to add. I want the animal that you were given during your brief and then something else. That's my animal. That little house there with a heart in it, I've used for the address. That's a graphic. We've got lots of graphics all over mine. Minimum of two, your animal and something else, and as many as you like. Add the address on it as well, and I want you to experiment with what we did in the last project. I want you to good at this. I want you to duplicate the page and then play around with the color palettes and fontat. So in this particular view, remember, we've gone from scroll to thumb noaw. It's up to you. It's not harder, but different. Look. Scroll view, you've got these duplicate the page option. If I go to thumbnail view. It's in this little flout menu. I can duplicate the page. Okay? I already played with one, and then I want you to go in here to design styles and have a playound with color palettes, let's have a look. I'm always amazed at how easy it is to kind of go through and go, Alright, let's try a different color method or color way. You're like, Oh, look at this. Some of them are terrible. I'm not down with that one. Oh, weird. Wasn't into it. Now I'm into it. But have a little look through here, experiment with it on a separate page, the same with the font sets. Go through. It's going to go and try, that was nice. You might have to play around with some of the font sizes. If you like it, you just want to change it. When you finish, I want you to either pick the one that you've been working on or this remodeled one or combine them, but it's not the one that you feel like I don't know, it feels like the best option, one you like the most. Then I want you to take a screenshot or export a PNG and upload it to the class projects and share it on social media. Our little upgrade here to the class projects is giving feedback to other people. So at the moment, try and get in there and give feedback on posts. It is tricky. There's literally I don't know, there's thousands a week getting posted now, so I just can't keep up with everybody. What we do is the social contract you signed up for you didn't know, is that when you post something, you have to give feedback on two other bits of work. That's how this works. I can't actually check it, but I hope that's the deal. We do it for two things is that you love getting feedback. It's really important when you are being creative in Canva that communicating the feedback on other people's work is often just as important as doing the work itself, being able to articulate yourself, practice using the words, trying to work out why you like things. That is super important. Go through post yours and then go through to others and it doesn't have to be big. It can be more detailed, but I want you to practice giving feedback. Often a good method, if you're like, I don't know how good feedback. A good method is the sandwich. I got beep deny. Let's call it the constructive sandwich. So hey, that was great. You might want to try playing around with maybe some smaller fonts because they're bigger fonts because they're hard to read. Great work on your first project. That is the sandwich. Nice either side, something constructive in the inside. Try be quite specific. No that looks good, because for you as the reviewer giving feedback, that is the bit that you need to develop and that is super important being able to kind give constructive feedback because giving it to other people makes you aware of your own work and go, okay, that's too small. This is the reason I didn't like that one, so I can do this. That's how you get better. Anyway, that is the long winded version of the class project. It's not that big of project. Just make sure that when you post it, add some feedback to other people. Enjoy working on your project. That is it. I will see you once you've done your not homework. Bye. 26. How to use the Background Remover tool in Canva: Hello. In this video, we're going to take this image here and use the background remover that is built into Canva and then we'll do some cool stuff where the text overlaps a little bit above, below. I love doing this in combination with the background remover. Here's some of the other examples that I did that interaction with cut out image. It's the background remover, what we're going to learn. And then mixing it with text it looks like it's above and below. I don't know, adds interest, I think. Let's jump in and learn the background remover. Let's start by adding a new page. If you're on the thumbnail view like I am, you can just hit plus down here to add one. If you're on that scroll view, it's up here. You can add a blank page. Either way, I'm going to be in thumbnail view. Click the background. I'm going to pick a background color that's dark is Color. I'm going to add an image. We could go to the upload option or we could do it the quick way and just go, background removal, just add that one. Just drag it on it uploads. You can see doing its thing there. All right. Now, the background remover is a pro tool. If you're on the 30 day trial or the pro version, this will work. If you're not, it won't. There are free things online. There's a bunch of different websites that claim Well, they do get rid of a lot of the background. You can go do a search for those. I'm not going to give you one because they keep changing and sometimes they get quite popular and then they get lots of ads and SPAMI. So there are sites out there to do this background remover for free, not as good as Canva, and Canvas not as good as Photoshop. For a one click option, this is pretty spectacular. I'm amazed. Let's wait for the amazingness. It's called Magic Stu L at that. Good. It doesn't get it perfect every time, but every time I use it, it's just a little bit better. Look at that detail in there. So good. It's really good at taking crisp edges and some of the more fluffy ones like it is here and doing this nice mix of solid with fluffy edges. It's really good. If you do find there is something that's not quite perfect, say you want to cut this part out, maybe it's distracting. In this case is missing a bit. What you can do is you can go to Broom remover, or you can click on this and see that's little settings option. You end up in this new view. This is the backroom remover view. You've got two options. You can erase stuff, ok. If the automatic feature didn't get it, I'm going to undo or you can restore stuff. So that's how it works. As restore brush size, the tiny brush to get into little small spaces. Use as even. And you're going to use a nice big brush to get nice curved edges. I find it easier with a big brush to do nice broad sweeps to try and trim parts up, trim part of his belt up. Less obvious that you've been chipping away with a small brush. Show original just shows you a faded version of the original? Not completely. Just to give you an idea. Sometimes you need to see what the heck is that? You're like, I'm missing that often you'll be working in quite small, for some reason, shortcut works. Sometimes the shortcut wasn't working. Working and now not. Anyway, my Zoom in, which is Command plus or Control Plus on a PC wasn't working a second ago. Anyway, I'm going to go to a store, see what that is. Say we need this because it's part of the thing we're selling, so we're going to rub that in and then we're going to go to a race and say, I don't want this because it's quite distracting or maybe not part of what we're going to do. When I'm finished going to close it and it'll jump back in. Zoom out a little bit again, or use our shortcut Command option zero. Control Alt, zero on a PC. Awesome. Love it. Scale it up a little bit. That is a backroomover. Click it, see how good it is. See if you can touch it up with a brush. If you need to go into a lot more detail, imagine that tool is going to develop as Canva develops. You need to go out to something like Photoshop, but man, does a pretty good job. What I'm going to do now is add the text, so it looks like it's above and below. You can leave now. It's just adding texts and playing with layers. Up to you if you want to check it out. You're going to flip them over horizontally, give me face in that way. And I'm going to grab some type. Now, when you are dealing with type, I'm going to do I'm using a quote. It's a token quote. I just Googled cool camping outdoorsy quotes. When you're doing this kind of some of it's above, some of it's below, they need to be in their own separate type boxes. I messed around. I like that Giglon font, Gaglin I'm going to start with this and I'm going to aside. There's a lot of messing around, often, if you're like, Mine doesn't look as good, man, it is tricky to get it to look good. There's a lot of, like, can I read that font? I can't, so I'm going to shrink that down. I just throw it on the page. I'm going to copy and paste that. Not all those who wander. I want to go and edit the code as well to fit the design lost. I think it's full stop in there as well. And let's put in. I'll find an appropriate font and let's do the layer stuff. Actually, let me find a font without keeping you here. Not sure why this needs to be on an angle. There you go. I've got these I'm going to play around with, I want that behind. Maybe that in front. Good contrast against his here. You don't really want to put stuff over his face. It's one of the design rules of why does this look weird? It could be that you have texts over somebody's face. That's why I'm getting him facing this way. I've done this before. I've practiced this before I started the video. That's why I'm just doing but I did spend some time going, All right. What should be there? Should be there? Should that be there? I'm using the shortcut Command F square bracket on a Mac to move it backwards or Control F square bracket to move it backwards. I'm looking at that. They interactive. We can still read it. I've lost the quote at the end, that's okay. I play with the size. Maybe we want to go for three font sizes. Is that cool? It's interesting. So this goes flying. Up to you. I don't know. What do you think? It's an interesting technique regardless. We cut people out, which is pretty easy. Then we did some cool interactions. Some of the ones that I was practicing with. That's the one I practice with. Then I played around with this one with some trees, some plants that I found. Then I found this guy, then I found this guy, and then I found this guy, it's been way too long, trying to figure out some sort of interaction. You see, as well, this is not who wander lost. There are so many different layers going on and different sizes. I broke that into two textboxes, so I get this kind of thing going. It's tricky, but. That's it. I've somehow turned the background remover, which is one click into a very long video. But it's kind of cool. Oh, that's what I needed. The line spacing was too far apart. Did I do it? He needs to be bigger. Oh, for those of you who hung out this long, you drag the sides. If you hold down the sides and you hold the option kunomc and canopic, it does it from the center and makes it bigger. I find it's easier than trying to drag it this way and then go up and drag it that way. Can't see the edge now. But if you hold down the option key onoOnoPC it drags it both ways, keeping it kind of centered. Oh, I feel like that's trick here is there's a little bit of where you can't quite see it where somebody like the viewer has worked it out with even the missing bits, there's a bit of success for the person who's read it and they're like, I've done that. I've calculated what that says, even though he's hidden part of it. I think that's the balance of trying to hide stuff with people being able to still quite read it without reading it. That is it. Seeing the next video. 27. Class Project 04 - Background Remover: You knew it was coming. It's class project time. Back in remover. So the client has asked you to make a concept, and they're thinking about running like a series of Friday inspiration posts. Make concept. So it's a post. It's going to include two things, photo and a quote. Basically what we did in the last video, but for your own stuff. The photo, you can either get it from Canva or from another website, like Unsplash or pixels. In terms of the ones from Canva, some of these already find one that's not. Do a search under the photo sections so elements, find photos and find something that might work for you. You might have to if you're using the free version, find the free ones. You can use the paid ones if you have access to the paid ones, but just avoid the ones that are on a white background. I want you to experiment with what happens with different ones? Also, even if you get a really good result like me, I want you to go inside of the background remover and play around with the erase restore. Even if you reset it afterwards, just have a play around with it, get a sense of how it works, and then I want you to mix it in with a text. We've got photo from Canva, remove the background, experiment with the tools. Quote, something that relative to your industry. If you're the tattoo studio or something else, find do a Google search for quotes about X, then I want you to break it into parts. Finding something that is small and short is quite helpful. Then break it into lines and get it to overlap like we did in the last video. Just something. Doesn't have to be super spectacular. Just give it a shot, play with layers, play with background, remover, see how it goes. Like I said in the last one, it can be tricky. If you're finding it really hard to make this quote work, quote, something shorter or longer. I'm thinking something that has a couple more lines to fill up would be nice. What I'm thinking is it's a different image that I need. I experimented with a bunch of them trying to get this one working. So yeah, have a play. Don't spend too long, get it going and then I want you to post it. Share it as part of your class projects and then share it on social media, tag me, share it in the groups. I do like seeing this one, so if you do posting it, make sure you do share it online and tag me. I love seeing what you guys make. Again, remember you post one, you give feedback on two other ones. That's the deal. All right. Enjoy playing with the backroom remover and then frustratingly jiggling around text to try and get it to fit and overlap. Good luck. 28. Ai Image Generator with Magic Media in Canva: Hello. In this video, we are going to generate some artificially intelligent foxes. Actually, no, we're just going to tow the artificial intelligence to make some fox style images. Okay, we're going to learn some prompt designing. Try and get the language to get what we need out of the AI. It's amazing what it makes. We'll do a mixture of images and graphics like this one in the middle all generated with artificial intelligence. Was all right, so I've created a new page and added a bit of a camping quote. Let's create an AI image. Now, there's a few different ways you can get to it. It's going to move. I bet you when I'm going to show it to you now, it's going to be somewhere different. They're integrating it, trying to make it work. But you're getting good now, you should be able to find it. It's under elements somewhere. They keep changing every time I log back into this thing. It's called Create Your Own at the moment. So AI Image generator, okay? Or you might find it under Graphics, okay? Or sometimes if you go to photos, it'll have it as a kind of like a recommendation in here as well. You will find it. So it's the AI Image generator, but if you click Create your own, it opens a thing called Magic Media. So remember, Magic Studio is the big name they give it. Magic Media i making thing. Let's just get going. It can be hard to know what to type into this. Being a designer in Canva, part of it is working out how to get what you want out of AI. They call the term a prompt designer. Anyway, it's something you need to get good at. Let's say I just want to do fox camping. I'm going to leave everything else and I'm just going to hit generate image, and let's see what happens. Now, there is a pro and a free one free. You still get images at the moment. At the moment if you're on a free account, you get 50, I think, and if you've got the P account, you get 5,000. You can use it regardless. Man, I love it so much. Look how cool that is. Now when you have got it, there's a couple of things you can do. If you want to add it, you just add it like an image, and a little click and be over here. The image is added to your uploads folder. I can go back into here and I can go to generate my own. Let's say I like that one, but I want it to. Let's open it for good. Let's go into generate our own. Which one do we like? We like this one. You can go in here and say generate more like this one. You like the style and you can just iterate your way through that, find something you like, and then get it to make some more. You will run out eventually if you're on the free account. But if you're on the Pro account, you get loads and it does refresh. At that. It's just different styles. Oh, I think I like that one. Again, click them the ad. We've got a few different versions here. Now, when it comes to prompt designing, the more information you give it, the better the result. I was going to do this and I want to say fox camping sitting next to, I'm going to speed this up. Alright. That was Fox camping, sitting next to a campfire shot from a bird's eye view. Is this going to work? We'll see. Look how good it is. I'm going to have to probably Birds eye view is probably too high, I'm going to have to have elevated. You end up experimenting like where you want to position the camera? Do you like that? It's not a fox, though. Is there a fox in any of these ones? Oh, there he is. There's a fox. Of. All right. So you get the idea. AI image creation is I don't know. It's pretty spectacular. You're allowed to use these commercially, which is really important. Do check the rules about how you can use them if you're in a interesting I don't know, in the small business that we're dealing with, just a local shop, these are perfectly used commercially. If you are doing something a little bit more interesting, in your work, you might have to just double check. You're allowed to use AI images, maybe you need to disclaim that it's an AI image. Have a little read and realize by the time you get back to this, it's going to look one of the other things you can do is styles. So let's say we want to. I'm going to go back to something a little bit more simple. Let's go Fox fox sitting next to campfire, and I'm going to say, let's have a look at the styles. And yeah, let's just pick one. Oh, go to go with moody. Let's generate it. When I said 5,000, I meant 500. I just saw it there for the Pro account. Oh, I like that one. Now trying to work out what to write here is quite difficult. So if you delete it, there's often an inspiring me option. Okay? It's gone. Let's go back. Let's go back in here. And there's an inspiring option. Often that's quite helpful. Even if you just click it a few times to see what kind of prompts they think is good. C now build up your design prompt. What is it multipo? Interior lighting. You want to know now too, don't you? Let's check it. Oh, my goodness. It is the cutest dog ex ever that one. Anyway, that was a good use of my credits. Now, we've been working on images. There's a graphics and video option. Graphics is just going to give you less of a photograph option. You get the idea? Alright, so Fox with hat and monocle, let's go down to generate Graphics. I didn't pick a style. See what's going to do. AI doesn't know what a monocle is. Turns out, but hey, we got a Fox with a hat. It will get better. This will change. You find something that's close, you can go through, generate more like this and then play around with the different styles. Actually, let's just add one of them, the scope. Now you can see the difference in this one. It's more like a graphic. I can't change the colors of this. Hopefully, that comes. You know how excited I get about changing the colors of graphics. But this one here you can see is less of a image and more of a graphic. You get the idea. Very cool. Last thing I want to show you is that down here, you now have an app. It's covered more apps later on. There's this app section. If I scroll here's apps. Underneath this line of the apps you've used, you've probably only got one at the moment, and it's this magic media, which is the other word they use for AI image generator. You will have that probably up here next to that line now. Instead of having to go into elements and try and find the image generator, you can click the app, find it there. There you go. It's amazing what you can get from AI. You just need to start working on that prompt design language so you can try and get what you need out of it. That's it. I'll see you in the next video. 29. Class Project 05 - Ai Images: Right, it is time to do a class project. We're going to do AI image creation. So as part of that inspirational Friday quote series, you've been asked to make post for Instagram, and it's the same sort of thing. Quote mixed with an image. This image though, needs to be AI generated. I want you to use your animal that you were given in your brief. Use any style you like, and just somehow get it to match your industry and your quote up to you. It's mainly around practicing using the prompts. I want to show you a little thing that I do when I'm coming up with this is not particularly relevant for it's not very business heavy, This quote here, how I got my quotes started is I'm going to hit the Tiki. With it selected, I'm going to use the magic write. I'm going to say custom prompt. Just like we were prompting the AI image stuff, I go through and say, give me all in caps. I'm yelling at the AI. Let me speed this up. See, give me five short camping quotes and generate these are way more appropriate for what we're doing. I'm going to replace that bit of text with this and start from here. Then from here, you might be like, Oh, that's cool, but I want that to be I don't know, magic write, more formal, more fun. Have a playound with both AI generated images and then have a little play around with magic right to get your quotes. You might be more fluent in TBT or Gemini or any of the other text based chat AI. Up to you when you're finished, I'd love to see it. Take a screenshot, share on the class projects, and make sure you share on social media as well. Enjoy playing around with AI, look forward to seeing what you make. 30. How to mockup in Canva: Hello, it is time to take our designs and mock them up in emoji hand. Ah, on a table. 100% on a mug. A T shirt. And then spinning on a phone. Ooh. Alright, mocking up your images in Canva is easy. We're going to use the mockups app. It's a great way to impress your clients, your boss, your teacher, your students. Everything looks better when it's on a mug. All right, to start up with the mockups, we go to find the app that actually creates the mockup. Mockup in this case, is in an apps will hide in this app option here. What are apps? Basically apps or anything that are outside the core functionality of Canva. They put them into apps, and a lot of the apps are designed by third party people, other people who are like, I'm going to make an app for Canva. There are lots of different apps in here. There's featured trending. We're not going to go through them all, they're grouped down to the bottom here. There are so many apps. We'll cover some of the really good important ones, but you can dive in and play with these on your own. What happens is, I want to find the one called Mockup. It's called mockup plural. Just do a search for mockups and you should find it. When you click it, watch this. You can see apps is the bottom of my little panel here. Where we go back here. F, click on it. You'll notice the little line appears and mockups are underneath it. Now, as you open up different apps, they will stack underneath. I've only actually just worked out how to close them. I'm not sure there was a function. Just had the recent ones here and it was a little bit messy. Okay, you can hover over them and just close them to keep it tidy, if you want. But that's where they appear. Now that won't go away. I can go to other things and mockups appears. Alright, now we're going to apply it to a page. Let's create a new page here and let's pick one of the ups. I'm just going to pick the coffee cup because it looks cool. I'm going to scale it. Okay? They're really easy to use. If I do this and this, I need to add an image to it, so I need to drag and drop an image inside of it. Okay, I'm going to go to my uploads. And what you'll notice is all the images that I've uploaded, plus the AI ones end up in here. So if I want to add my little fox from earlier, kind of adds it to the document. Watch this. If I drag him, you drag him right. Okay? He ends up inside of the mockup. How cool is this? Hello. It's all fox without a monocle. Very sophisticated. It's pretty amazing how realistic the mockups are. You can edit them. So with it selected, click on you'll open up this option and you can move it around which if I drag him to the left, he will move to the left of the mockup. Actually, go to hit Apply changes. There he goes. So cool. You've got options you want him to fit, you want him to fill. If I just want his we can't really just have his head. All the mockups are slightly different in terms of the amount that will fit. Ours has got quite a square on the frontier. I'm going to leave it like that. The mockups also, we can align them, but you can for some of them go through and say, I want to pick a different color from my mug. I'm going to pick this colored mug. Again, you go to He apply changes. I do love it. It's very cool. We'll do one more together, and I'll show you the way you'll use it a bit more because we've put ours inside of this file called Fox Instagram and it's in the square thing. If I'm going to put this into a presentation, it's probably not that good, or if I'm going to email it or it's going to go into don't US letter or an A four document, it's probably better to start outside of the project. There's a couple of things we need to do. Let's close this down. We haven't done that in a while. Back to our little home base, which is the home at the top here. Click on Home. What we're going to do is we're going to open up the mockup from here. You can actually open up lots of apps. I want to show you this way. It's a differentay of getting started. Instead of creating design and opening up the mockup app, we can go to the apps and say, I want to find that mockup app and I want to click on it. I don't want to use an existing design. I wanted to create a new design. What kind of design you can scroll through? Often just to search at the top. I'm here in Europe, so A four is really good. I want to A four landscape because I'm going to print it off, let's say, or put it as Monks, another PDF you might be USetter might be the PowerPoint size, just pick something. All it's going to do really is create a new document and open up the mockup app, all it's really doing. There are lots of different options in here. We could the most of them are just static. Nothing's happening. There are some video ones that are quite interesting. Let's just give that a go. I'm going to make it. Bigger. And obviously, I'm printing my video. Forget I said that. We're going to put this as part of a presentation. By a play. There it is there. What I want to do is insert our image. Let's give it a go. Now, this brings up a good point. How do I get my Canva design in here? You can't just go import canva design. You actually have to export a PNG or JPEG from your design. So I'm going to go back to home. I'm going to open up this one here. You might notice I've got lots of versions of the same thing. This is me in this course. I try and save image as I go along in case I need to double back and change things, ignore all the multiple versions of my design there. I'm going to do my latest one. I'm going to go, which page? I want my Fox. Now I need to go to Share, like we do for our class projects, I'm going to go to download. I'm going to P&G, I'm going to go not nine pages. I'm going to go, all pages off and just the current page. This the one I'm up to page eight. You can see the numbering down there. Settings, all perfectly fine. Let's download it. I'm going to put mine on my desktop and Exports. I'm going to save ready got that one from earlier on. Now I'm going to bring it into my mockup. Here's my untitled mockup. I'm going to go to Upload. Let's do it the long way. Exports, you, give it a second. Now I click and drag it in. The cool thing about this particular mockup is that it moves. It's good to go. All right, this one's going to need a little bit of work because it is going full screen. So I'm going to get edit. I'm going to go to fit, get them to fit in the middle there, and I'm going to apply, give it a sec play. Shiny screen. It is. I don't know about you, but I do like when I see my work outside of the design framing Canva and getting it into the real world. Video is cool. Often, it's maybe a bit more work than we need, even though that was pretty easy, right? Often, it can be just easier to send off stills to the client, especially when doing that more conceptual stuff and you're trying to know. Maybe it's early times with a client and you're looking to impress. Okay? It's a little bit of extra work. Canva does a great job at making it easy, you just need to remember to get your Canva document out. Onto a mockup, you need to first save it as an image. You can't just kind of lump a Canva design in there. I'm here, if it was a still, just like before, you'd now go to share and download and just do a PNG. Because, I just happened to use a video one here, it's going to be this MP four format. It suggests it's really clever. Good Wa Amba. We haven't done this yet. We'll do video more comprehensively later in the course. But for the moment, that's going to be good. It's going to play on most people's computers. This MP four format is often email it to people. It's going to be quite large. So what you might do, say, I did want to present something in this video format and I want to get it to a client. I'd probably export this before and then upload it to something like YouTube or VmeoR good to upload videos, then you only have to share a link to the client, but we'll cover video more intensely later in the course. All right. That is the super cool mockup feature in Canva. It's our first real taste of an is inside Canva, there are lots of apps. They change. This one might change. Some of them are built or bought by Canva, some of them are third party ones, some require extras. If you do want to upgrade. Some of them will have things that you can buy within the apps. When you finish this video before we do the class project, have it just look around the apps. Actually, no, that's a really good idea for the class project as well. Go back, Dan, make them do it in the class project. All right. I'll see you in the next video for class project time. 31. Class Project 06 - Instagram Mockup: Super fun class project time. There's two parts to this one. The first one is to mock up your Instagram post, you've been asked it's time to pitch your concepts to the client. The business owner, in my case, it's the Fox camping and outdoor. Yours will be your business owner. So we're going to go in with our concepts and we want to mock them up to get them as good as we can. Pick any of the Instagram posts and use any of the one or more for the mockup app options. Have an experiment with them. I'm not too worried how appropriate it is. This one here is the most appropriate ish. I Instagram it's got Instagram bits on it. I found a mock up in the option that said Instagram, so but if it ends up being a coffee cup, that's okay, too. It's more about experimenting with the tool. The second part of this is I want you to experiment with one other app in Canva. I don't care which one it is. You will find that this is the one that I used. I used one called, I don't even know what it's called. Character, where is it wait Character builder. Don't use this one use another one. Actually, I don't mind. But go through the apps and have a scroll down and see if you can find another one to use. The group, this will change. They keep changing I look at the featured ones, scroll, scroll, scroll popular. You can scroll through AI powered. The ones that I jump to to I don't make some stuff, scroll scroll, scroll. So create something new, it'll make something from nothing like this guy. We put them together. Some of these other ones you need an image to start with, which is totally fine too. Just have experiment with one of them. I want you to sense of them, see that they appear down here. Some of them will work. Great. Some of them will be really complicated. I just want to get you started with apps. They will change, some will be easy, some of them won't be. When you're finished, I want an image of both your mock up one and of the thing that you made with the. It is one of those altering images ones, maybe have the original somewhere on the screenshot or the image just so that we can see the before and after. That would be cool, make sure you list what app it is Because when you post it, people would be like, Hey, what's that one? It's the first thing they're going to ask. Just write down what it was called. A feedback on whether it was good or bad or hard or you have to do this one thing or it wouldn't work with this other thing. That would be cool too. All right. That's it. Experiment with the mockup, experiment with another app. Have fun. Be amazed at your design starting to appear on mock uppi stuff. I don't know. I love it. I've been mocking up stuff since forever and I do still like seeing it in context. It's great seeing it off the boring old flat page. All right. That is it. Enjoy the class project, and I'll see you in the next video. Once you've done your not homework, go do it. 32. Testing & Posting on your Phone for Instagram: Hello. It's me. I'm outside of the computer, more than just a voice. Normally, you see me from the other side of the office facing kind of this away. This is what the other side looks like. I'm doing this because I want to show you a quick way of just testing the We're just checking the Instagram post to see what it's going to look like on a phone, 'cause sometimes you can design in a really big size, and when you shrink it down, it doesn't really work. And then I'm going to show you how to take it from Canva and actually post it to Instagram. And even if you're not doing Instagram, it is pretty I don't know, it's important to see how we get from desktop to uh, phone. I'm waving my hand around like I'm holding a visible phone. I've got one right here. So we're gonna go from that cava game to the camera on your phone, and then out to Instagram, so we'll do both of those. So let's jump in. And yes, I've grown a bed since the last time you saw me. Hm. This is about how long it takes between the first video you saw me and the getting started to now. Takes a long time. About this much bed growth. This is the homeless, Dan. Get on with it, Dan. Alright. Alright, the first thing I want to show you is that when I'm testing on my phone, before I even, like, do the whole hook camera up to my phone and check it, I like to check things like the sizes of the fonts and stuff that I'm using while I'm working before I even get to this point. So long before now, we should have done this. So I'm going to show you the, I don't know. Is the caveman way. It's the way I do it. I'm gonna show you because instead of downloading it to their phone, I just grab my slider down the bottom here, right, that thing we've used before and drag it down until it's about the right size of my phone. That's about right, okay? And I know that people hold their phones closer to their faces, so I do this. This is what I do. And I just give it a check. Like, Can I read it? Can this be read? And a lot of it can't, okay? 'Cause I was designing it at that really big size, and that happens to me a lot. It's definitely happened to us now because we're only this far through the course before I brought it up. But that's what you should be doing all the way through the course, getting it small, getting it to the size you need, and giving it a check. So that's for Instagram. Anything that's going out to the phone or has a phone option. Okay? So I'm going to show you, like, YouTube. YouTube's the same. Can you see all the thumbnails here? They are way smaller than I designed them in Canva. Okay? So design them in Canva, and then you find out that they're quite small here. And some of these writings are quite small. It gets even smaller on the phone. Where's my what's open up. You see here, okay? These are all a lot smaller than even the desktop version. So just keep an eye out when you are making stuff in Canva. They're like, Is this going to be on the phone? If it's going to be on the phone, then you probably need to do a quick little test of being smaller. Can it still be? Enough of the weird caveman zooming out version. Let's actually get it from our Where are we? From Canva onto our phone. Alright, let's talk more specifically about getting it out to Instagram. Okay? You can obviously go to Share and go to Download and just download a JPEG or a PNG. PNGs probably best for Instagram. Instagram does do its own resizing, so you can't be very specific. Just upload a good enough quality, and they'll go and downsize it anyway, because that's what they like to do. But the official way, it's a little confusing. That's why I've got it in here. If I go to Share and I'm like, Oh, Instagram, or if I go down to more and I find Instagram or whatever the ones are, if I go to Instagram, it's going to say, Alright, post immediately. You can do scheduling. It's a bit more advanced, okay? But let's do it immediately post onto the mobile app. You're like, Oh, cool. You're like, Okay, scan me. Alright, this seems very official. And then you go in here and you scan it and you have the QR code, if you know how to work those. And all of it basically is not needed. Because basically what it's going to do is it's just opened up the on my phone for Canva. It has an open up, Instagram or anything special. Basically, if you don't have the Canva app installed, if you scan that, it's going to say, Hey, download the Canva app. That's all it's doing. So this thing is not really that useful. Okay? I just appears the QR code feels good, but does nothing. Basically, what you need to do regardless of that is download the Canva app, okay? That is through your app store, either on Apple or Google, install it, log in with the same account, and then this will appear. And basically, you're not posting on Instagram. It's just opened up your design and the Cava App, which you can fully use. We'll do that in the next video. But for the moment, you see, it's kind of just like a version of the desktop version. Okay? Nothing really different here. They've got this menu down the bottom. Instead of on the left hand side, okay? But I can still go to my share at the top here. I know it's kind of hard to see, but there's an option in here. It says, where is it? I can download it. It's a JPEG, which might be just as good to post to Instagram. I'm going to shuffle along until I find the Instagram one. And it's going to have that same thing we had before. Would you like to post immediately? You say, yes. Well, head continue. And which page? The current page? No, kind of like what we did when we were downloading our JPEGs. Okay, so I'm gonna say, no, I want page. I can't remember. Current page. Actually, let's shuffle across which ones? Go. Let's do this one. So I'm going to go again. I'm going to go to Instagram. Where are you Instagram? There it is. Which post? I'm doing it all again. Current page? Yes, please. You will have to let Canva have some access to your document. Does a cool animation while it's kind of saving out your JPEG and getting ready doload. And that is Instagram. If you've used Instagram, you'll know what this looks like. This is the creating a post. So it's just kind of transferred my JPEG into Instagram ready for me to add text and post. But you're not going to Instagram. I wanted to show you this because often there's lots of features inside of Canva that says, Hey, do some stuff on the desktop, and then you can be connected to that thing on your phone. All it does is open up the Canva app. It does nothing really else. Okay? So you can skipple of that, and I can just go to my Canva app and just start from here. Do I want to rate it? I do not. Okay, so I don't have to say export from the desktop, then open in the phone. Okay? Just straight up. I can go to all my documents in here. It's very similar. Okay? So I can say, Alright, there's my fox, okay? And I want to go through and scroll to the page that I want and then just export it. There you go. Ah, that is it. I'll show you that because that's something that I ran into. I spent a long time trying to connect my desktop to my phone. And actually, it's basically the same application, one running over my phone, one running on the desktop. And if you want to post stuff, you don't even have to open Canva on your desktop. Just open the Canva app on your phone and go from there. Or you could just download it from your desktop, email it to yourself. Do it that way as well. It's up to you. I thought it'd be interesting to show you both how I get my kind of, like, testing the font sizes before I get into here 'cause you're like, that's too small. It's good to test it on desktop first, okay? And then how to get it out to something like Instagram or any other social media kind of phone based applications. Alright, that's it. It was good to see each other outside the voiceover from the computer. Sorry for the flickery screen. I need to figure out a way of making that stop, but you get the idea. Alright, I'll see you in the next video. 33. Editing Canva Designs on your Phone: Hello. Let's talk about editing your Canva designs on your phone. Okay? So we've been using the big old desktop with a keyboard and a mouse and short ca keys and stuff to design and Canva. We've made everything so far that way. We're going to now look at doing some of that stuff on a phone, okay? You can do all of it on the phone. That's the interesting thing. It's the exact same app that obviously the screen real estate on a phone is very different. First of all, it's portrait, and it's small. So everything that you've done so far on the desktop one, you will be able to find in your app. I'm going to give you the kind of, like, quick run through of the things that are slightly different, okay? And that are useful to know when you are using the phone version. Should you be using the phone version completely instead of the desktop version? It's up to you. I find it too tricky to work that small. Okay? Uh, lots of people do, though. What I find it really handy for is that when you're designing something, and then you give it to the client for them to be able to adjust, and they might be just using their phone, okay, give them a little run through how to use it. They can change texts, update images, change dates, simple stuff. You do that kind of heavy lifting design work, and then they can do some of the adjustments afterwards in Canva. That's really handy. And what it's also really good is same for myself. Like, if I've got an Instagram post, and it's the same thing, but next month, I'm like, Oh, hey, it's the same design. Casually to change the date on it and then post it. You can do it on your phone. I still do it on the desktop because it's easier, I find. But, yeah, it's the same stuff. Let me give you the quick run through and the dos and don'ts or the interesting things at our mobile centric, okay? Yeah, let's get in there. I've downloaded the app from the App store Logdom with my camera account, and it is the exact same account that you have on your desktop. You don't need the desktop open. Okay, you can just work straight from your phone. The problem with the phone is that it's a little tricky because it's quite small. But you might love it this way. So what we're going to do is I'm going to open up the document we we're working on. Okay? This one here, I'm going to scrub across to the pages that this is the one's the most complex. Okay? This is the one I want to do my adjustments on. And especially this little lock up here, the Texas is a bit small, I want to scale it up a little bit. What I really find the phone really good for is once you've done the template, we've kind of got the design, and then you need to go through and say, Hey, I need next week's months version of it. I just want to do some text changes on my phone and then send it again for social media. This is perfect. No, I'm not going to go through everything because it's the same as the desktop. They just gonna move things around. And that's really what I want to show you, is that down the bottom here, okay, these are the apps that we normally head on the desktop. There's design elements. So if I need a photograph to add to it, I go to elements. You know, I scroll down the same looks the exact same sort of panel. Okay, and I find my photograph, see all, do a search, add the photograph. Let's add this. There we go. I'm going to hit the undo button. It's along the top there. So because we don't have a keyboard for shortcuts, we have to kind of there's only a couple of main ones. One of the main ones that is tricky on a mobile app, if you haven't used it before is the selecting multiple objects. Let's say I want to move this and this date around. I can do it separately. I can click the once and just move it. Okay, they move just fine. But if I want to slick both of those together, you know, so they kind of stay in relationship, you can click anything and then look for these three little dots. Those three little dots here, okay? We'll open other stuff. One I want is called select multiple. All it does means is I can pick one, two, I don't know, and that thing. Okay? And then I can click Hold and drag, all of them in one go. See? Hey, I'm going to undo that. The other thing that is useful is obviously text editing is easy. Click on it. I'm going to actually close down this bottom section here. I'm going to click on, say, let's click off in the background. Click on the text. I'm going to go down here to edit, okay? And I can do some text editing, so I can rename it. Okay, so text editing is easy. Enough. So selecting multiple objects is one of the interesting things on mobile. The other one is working with layers. It can be really handy because obviously, it's a little bit tricky here. So I'm going to go on one of them, okay? And I'm going to come down here and I'm going to scroll along, and I'm going to go too. Layers. This is not only a good way of adjusting layers. Say I want this above. Now, I can click ahold and drag the little options on the side here. It's hard with you guys in front of me. I'm dragging it randomly. Okay? What I use it for when I'm working on the mobile phone is actually clicking on layers. So let's say I want to click on something like the Take a look at that leaf. It's kind of idden behind. I can just click on it here. Then I have it selected and I can close down layers. I've just used it to grab it to be able to kind of select it. Sometimes it can be tricky to select things. Other interesting things for the quick run through is the burger menu. The burger menu in this top left hand corner here gets you back to basically your home screen. You can pick other documents you're working on, start new designs. Exporting stuff is in the same place. You go up the top right hand corner. It's got the same icon, if I click on it with my big fingers, I can download it. Share a Instagram. I can send a link to my client, same as the desktop. Two more things I want to show you is, if I click on the shape here, Okay and you're like, Alright, shape. What you can do, once you've got it selected, there will be at the beginning, we've got Edit. Actually, that's not what I want. That's editing the text. Select on it. If I go a shape, okay, remember those shape options we had? Oh, I didn't select on it. Come on. Okay, I can come into here and remember we've got those kind of different shapes we can do. So we can do everything on the mobile app if you're prepared to figure out where it is. I can change the color of it, add a line, change the corners. Everything we've learned so far in the course can be done on the mobile. One last thing so I can get into some of the, I don't know, more hardcore things we're learning. Remember under design. It's one of the apps. It's down the bottom on mobile. And there was styles. Remember, we did styles where we went. Alright, color palettes, see all, okay? You can lower this kind of to be partway through your design. Okay, so you can see a bit of your design plus, no case the color palettes. And we can go through and do that kind of, like, creative stuff we did on the desktle mobile phone is great. You might be a mobile first kind of person. I'm more of a desktop first kind of a person doing adjustments in the mobile, though, especially small changes, especially text changes, maybe a simple image change can be done really well on your mobile phone. And also maybe you might be designing for your client, okay? And you're doing the design on desktop, and they might be making little edits themselves on the mobile app. That's the quick run through of the mobile app version of Canva. It's the same. All the skills that we're learning in the desktop version can be translated to the phone. They're just in slightly different places because of the format and the size. And we don't have keyboard, and I love shortcut, so I end up using the desktop a lot more than I use the mobile phone version, but that is it could be a generational thing, okay, or you might just prefer to use your phone to do lots of the design, 'cause you like doing it on the couch with your cat. I don't know. That is it. I will see you in the next video. I'll go have a shave. Do it, Dan. 34. How to use Canva Template Logos: Hello. Hey, we are going to build our first logo inside a Canva. We're going to talk about what Canva is good at in terms of making logos. We'll discuss the difference between a logo type and a logo mark, and we'll start looking at some of the templates inside a Canva. Alright, let's jump in. All right. To get started, let's close everything down back to the home screen. We're going to go along the left here to templates, okay? And we're going to go along and search them. Okay? This layout will change, I bet you. Hopefully, it's still in the top there. Okay, and go to just type in logo. Let's see what templates we've got, and there are lots. What you'll notice about templates inside of Canva is that a lot of them are word marks or logo types. Essentially, what that means is that there's a lot of fonts used. Why? Because they're easily customizable. Something called a logo mark, which we'll discuss the difference in a second, like the Nike swoosh is harder to do in Canva. It doesn't have a lot of drawing tools. There's a lot of font altering and simple shapes. But you can't do a whole lot of custom drawing things, not very possible in Canva. Add this feature, I bet you. But at the moment, there's no real creation tools. So we're relying on what is a word mark. What is he talking about Word marks, logo marks? Let's have a look. You've got these two types of logos. There are mini, but there's two food groups, Logo type versus logo mark. Forget about that word logo. Just think of type versus mark that makes it easier. So is obviously type and a mark is more like that. That's the logo type for Nike has the word Nike written in it, and this thing here is the logo mark, the mark, the type. Some people call it to have a look, same thing, but they'll say a word mark or a logo mark. In this case, forget the mark, just think word versus logo. It is the exact same thing, people refer. There are another ten versions of this when you break it down to initials and combinations and badges. But to get started, you need to know the difference between a logo that is basically words and a logo that is a designed element, see this shell logo here. We couldn't do that in Canva. You'd have to go out to something else. I use something called Adobe Illustrator? But that's okay. We're going to stick into the wordmark slash Logo type zone. That's what Canvas really good at, especially with the templates here. There's lots to go through. What we can do is we can say logo and then add something to it. If we're doing something food related, you might try and get it down to something more food. The other thing to know about using any of the templates in here is that they'll be tricky to trademark. Trademarking something is quite tricky in general. Don't worry too much about it. Like, I can't use it because it's untrademarkable. For a lot of small businesses, they don't end up getting a trademark or they'll find it quite tricky to trademark something that is quite simple logo type, but just not everyone else has access to these logos as well. You might find somebody copying you. I'm using quotes because we're using a template. But templates are great to get started, great for clients that just need a professional looking logo. I'm going to type in camping. Actually, you we don't need to go too far into it. I'm going to tie it to see if there is a camping one. Oh, there is. Because what I want to do is I'm going to look at a logo that I think I can customize. Like, this one here is going to be tricky because they're using the A out of camp. I want the tent, but I don't want actually the word camp. So it's going to be tricky to put mine into what is it Fox outdoor camping in outdoor. Have a look at both this one and this one. I should be able to probably not use this one, but be able to use this one. Let's go. Let's open up this one. Let's customize this template. You'll notice that this is a graphic that's come in. And here I can change the C. Okay, I can double click it and say, Alright well, it's to be Fox. But I can't be Fox because it's got an A in the middle. This is a trickier one to start with. I'm going to go back here, go back into hopefully logo camping, take a look at this one here. This one's going to be easier because I've separated this from this and this is going to be a font. I'm just going to type Fox in here and go through just the size wise, just like all the stuff we've been doing now, it's just a matter of moving it around, jiggling it, and getting it to fit with what you've got. I've got outdoor and camping. M doesn't quite fit, so I'm going to option key on a mac key on a piece and just drag the sides, it goes out both sides. Fox needs to come up. When you do find a logo that you like, be prepared for a lot of adjustment and moving it around. One thing you can do is let's duplicate this page and let's go through and have a look at if you find one that you really like, mine is quite simple in terms of the colors. You might find that has a lot more color. Let's go to design member. We can go to styles and we know how to use the color palettes and go through. It's funny. I don't know. I think it's funny. Just seeing that in a different color, I like I'm going to do is I'm going to go back to this one here. Let's say we do like this, the client likes it. We're going to get it out of Canva, ready to be used in they might be using it in their email or in their documents. How do we get it out of Canva? What we're going to do is going to go to Share. I'm going to download what page? I'll do just page one for the moment because I'm going to show you this option. We've got PNG is what we want, and one of the things we need is a transparent background. This is one of the limitations for the free account is you can't have transparent background. Why is it useful? In this case, it could be fine. Let's do both of them and I'll show you the differences. Even though you can read transparent background. Let me just show you the two. I got Fox camping Stack. I've called it stack. I like to have a stacked version of the logo and we'll do a left aligned one as well in a second. Let's just have a look at exporting this for use. Let's go download. We won't turn on transparent background. I just want page one. Let's download it. So I got one and a two version. So, look, I've got two PNGs. One is see through and one has a white background. That just runs into problems later on when I say, A, I'm going to create a new document. Your client might be using Canva, you might be using Canva. Cam is going to create a new design. Let's go to a logo square post. Let's change the background color. Let's make it dark, actually light, and let's bring in our image, so we're going to upload it and upload our files. So bring in both of these. You can see the one that I was able to move as a transparent background. I can see the background and the one that doesn't doesn't. So it's one of the limitations for free. There are ways of finding online websites that can remove the background or stuff. It won't be as good as exporting it natively with a transparent background. The thing is, though, the amount of times you need to have a transparent background might be small, especially if you're using a lot of documents. The white version looks really no different than the transparent background. White background. The other thing to know is that I've exported it back into Canva. Okay? So in this instance, let's say it was going out to like Microsoft PowerPoint or Word or Google Docs or something like that, that would be true. What I can do, though, if your client is going to use Canva, I can actually just have this here to be copied and pasted onto this background. Then when they go and change the background color, it updates fine. Because it's the working version from Canva. It's a little hard to share to copy and paste and your client might be like, copying and pasting is tricky. But it is a way of getting around the transparent background problem. One last thing while we're here is often when I'm doing a logo, I'll have the stacked version, which is really cool. But often you'll need a long version to go down the bottom of things. I'll have this and I'll keep that one there. I'll copy and paste it, and then I'll try and work on another version. That is tidy this up here. That's stacked. Then how to get it to stack, you might decide that that's quite right for you. I'm going to shrink that down, copy and paste it, try another version, and might decide that actually I want that to be there and I'm going to put a turn in there, it's on two lines, I'm going to left align it. There's no right or wrong way of doing it. You can spend ages trying to work this out. I'm like, I like it like this. I'm going to line that up to the top of that of the fox. You might end up with that being the long version or maybe it's like this. Okay? Maybe though, we don't need this for what we're doing. We've got this version here, and that could be our long version. What I end up doing is let's show you some of my logos here. You just need a few different versions. So you need this one here. That's my long version. Then I have a stacked version as well. These fit differently on different designs. Sometimes you need the stack version, sometimes you need this and on our website here. Let me show you. You see here on my website, we have this other version, which is broken down into even smaller texts. This would be called letter type. We're using letters as the logo. So look, I think I saw one here. There was a good example. S letter mark or letter type. Where using initials to do it. You can see a word mark. They're using letters to define the logo. You can see here different people will describe it differently. The big food groups remember are logo type versus logo mark, using text to design your logo, and this one here is more like the non ki sush then the exact same thing just said differently is word mark versus logo mark. Words logos. But for some reason, there's not an absolutely official descriptor of all of them. So you might have to figure out what it is in your market, and the people around you might be calling it something slightly different. But the ego. That's the difference between logo type and logo mark, and logo type is way easier to make inside of Canva. You can use pre existing designs that are already in Canva, but we couldn't draw that from scratch. I say that, but you could with all the lines, it would be tricky. And cutting them inside of here, or could you do it? Depends on how good you are with that line tool. I say it can't be done, and I know you're rushing off to show me how you can build it out of the aliments. You can totally do it. Don't let anybody tell you you can't, especially Dan. But I guess I wanted to just show you what people use cara a lot more for, which is logo types or word marks. There you go. That is logo templates inside a Canva. 35. Class Project 07 - Template Logo: All right. In this class project, you want to experiment with a new logo for your client. You haven't been asked yet, but you know that they're going to ask soon. So you just want to get the creativity flowing and you want to experiment with some of the templates and Canva. I'm telling you what's going on in your head. You just want to play around with Canva template, use the brand that you've got, I want you to create three different logo options. I don't want you to modify them too much. Just modify them enough that you can get all your text. Have a look through the templates, modify them. You can't play around with the colors. Won't spend too long. This exercise here is mainly to get you being able to find templates, make adjustments to them, bump into any of the problems like when I did the last video, remember the CEP and I couldn't change the A because it was built into the logo. That's the goal here. Do this quickly because in the rest of the course, we are actually going to go through and make our own custom logo, and I'm going to give you some of the language and the ways of actually designing your own logos that you've got a framework to build from rather than just updating templates. But it can be a great way to get the ideas started, starting with a go off, find three of them and take a screenshot of the three and show them both in the class projects and online. Just make sure that you let everyone know that these are from the templates inside of Canva and not your complete own original work. Just to make it clear, we will be doing our complete own original stuff in the next few videos. Go have some fun, experiment, find the limitations, and I'll see you in the next video. 36. What is a MoodBoard WhiteBoard Brainstorm: Hello, it is time to look at whiteboards inside of Canva. Whiteboards are basically just a type of page inside of Canva that goes on forever. Let me zoom out. It has all these dots everywhere, but it's a great document type where it is about the ideas part. We're going to focus on a mood board for our brand. That's what we're going to use it for. But I'll show you a few different use cases, things that I've used for in the past. It's the whiteboard feature in Canva. It's super helpful. Jump in. All right, to find the whiteboards, let's go to our Home tab. Let's go to home, and let's go to Whiteboard. Whiteboard is the universal term that Canva uses for a document that has no real edges and starts with these dots for some reason, like a pig board. I can scroll. I'm scrolling up and down. You can't really tell, but I can scroll for infinity. These things can be really big. You're not constrained to say an Instagram post or a US letter document size. It can be massive. Think brainstorm, think moodboard, think whiteboard. That's what it looks like. Reason the first thing I want to do is go to file, go to settings, and turn off the dots. I don't know why. I'm going to turn back on just because that is the whiteboard feature. Let's start with some of the templates to give you a better sense of what can be done with the whiteboard feature. So I'm going to go down to templates. I'm going to go up to here and search and I'm going to put in moodboard. So mood board is it's probably easier to show you an example. I've typed in moodboard and Enter. The problem is, it's giving me all sorts of different stuff, not necessarily whiteboard mood boards. Okay, so I'm going to go, Alright, category, I want to find business whiteboards. It's cut down the search for a moodboard to this whiteboard format, remember, the infinite document size. So let's have a look at the I'm going to go for this one here. I'm going to customize that template. You can see we've got the dots. We can zoom in and out, okay? Just means there is a lot of document. So you can move around as you need. This is a good instance of a mood board. It's showing us an idea for this looks like interior design. Oh, it's for somebody's lounge. Their interior. They've taken some screenshots of the background of what they might do for this corner here. They like this wood paneling, they like this kind of art. You get the idea. There's some color swatches they might like, some cork or some sort of wood green. It's posted notes scribbling ideas. In design, they'll call them a mood board because it sets the mood. Often, I'll go to a client with a mood board before I start doing anything. It really depends on the interactions and they're already an existing client and I know what they want already because we've worked to each other, I wouldn't go to them with a moodbard. If it's a new client and there's enough money in the project, sometimes you're doing it for your uncles, aunts, brothers, cousins shop, and they don't care about move board. They just want you to design a logo or a poster or something. You just go off and do it. But when I'm setting work with a larger client, we want to make this a great. They're looking for a little bit of help and you as a designer don't want to go off and start making logos because you don't even know what kind of logos they're into. A mood board is a great way to interact with a client. Even if you don't go with a client, I create mood boards all the time for basically any project I do. Let me show you the one I did for A. Here we go. There's the move board Frau fox stuff. We started designing the Fox Fox Instagram post for the beginning of this course. This is how I started. It's not very pretty. But I just went through and I was like, Oh, that's cool. That's cool. For me, I'm trying to figure out like, Okay, what can be included in a video at the skill level that we're at a Canva. We're trying to I'm not trying to make it too hardcore, but I want to make sure all the basic tools are in there, so everyone's getting good and feeling confident. I'm doing all this stuff here. So I'm getting my mood board together. Do it for my courses, I do it for logos that I'm working on, I do it for everything. I start with a mood board. That's the whiteboard feature. There's not much to it other than it just has an infinite background and it has dots that I showed you how to turn off. But that is the whiteboard feature. It is the umbrella term used for brainstorms, flow charts, pasteboards, mood boards. They all come under this heading of whiteboard inside of Canva. That's it. I'll see you in the next video. 37. Class Project 08 - Logo Moodboard: Your hunch was correct. The very next meeting, your clients come back and said, Hey, can you design us a logo? You're like, Of course, I can. But where do you start? Designing a logo, the first kind of starting point is a mood board, and we're learning how to use whiteboard, so it's perfect. Okay, so there's two things I want you to do. Well, three things. I want you to create a whiteboard and I want you to add some image inspiration and some color inspiration. Is an example that I did for a different client and it's not so much focusing just on the logo. It is going through websites and finding inspiration in terms of things you're like, Oh, because this is a bird of prey that is local to Ireland and I quite liked it. I was just looking for good poses of it. I was like, I like that pose. I like that pose. The looking back pose. I just threw them on them. They don't have to be perfect. They don't have to be logos, either. But I did find a bunch of logos that I quite like. Just threw them all onto a page just to get the ideas going. The other thing I did was I pulled some colors from some of the logos that I really liked. Let me show you some places that I like to go for my inspiration for M Mu boards. There are these places here, so I've broken them into images and color inspiration. I want you to gather no less than 12. You need a chunk. You need some stuff in there to get some ideas going. Use both the animal and the industry. Yours might be very different. Mine is fox outdoor and camping. They're quite similar in terms of foxes are outdoor and gambing. The idea. But use both of those terms when you are doing searches on some of these sites. You might have your own. Let me know in the comments if you have got a site that you like to go to. These are the main ones that I use dribble with three Bs. Be hunts is another great one. Pinterest, obviously, don't forget about old Google images. I just typed in Fox Graphic. Then we'll talk about the color ones in a sec. So I just go through and take a whole bunch of screenshots, make sure I include the name and the artist or the designer. Not trying to steal ideas. I'm here to get my ideas in some sort of order and the moodboard is really helpful for it. I make sure I take a screenshot and I grab all of these. In terms of color, there's a couple of places to go. I love color dotdobe.com and I like going up to explore and I like typing in. Camping or Fox or whatever your industry is. It can be really good to get some ideas for color. Gain, you can either do a screenshot of it or you can go inside of it and go, quite like this. Remember the hex numbers. I can copy it. Just click on it, and I can go into Canva. You don't need to pay to count. Just go to color.adobe.com. I can say, A right, moodboard, I'm going to grab my elements. I'm going to grab a shape. I'm going to grab a square. Come on square, and I'm going to give it a fill color of that's the number there, the hex number. To what color did I grab? Looks like black. It's not. It's a slate color. You can just go through, copy that. I'm going to duplicate this square by holding the option key on a Mac. Ok key on a PC before I start dragging it and you get a duplicate or you can hit this button above it up to you. I'm going to go through and just pull those colors in from Adobe color, paste it in. Another couple of cool places for color is color d adobe.com, Color Hunt and coolers.co. These are all great places to go in and find some interesting colors. They do change. Some of them that I used to love are now just covered in ads. These seem to be still good. They might not be there when you get there, have a little look through. See if you've got another good place for colors as well, let me know in the comments and you watching this video, check out the comments, see if there are other good places to go. You can go now. I'm just going to dump all mine on the page. I'm going to show you what I do when I'm doing a move board is I'm going to zoom out a little bit. I'm going to grab all the mini screenshots that I took while I was looking through all the sites. I just dump them on the page. Trouble is they end up all on top of each other. They are there. I zoom out far enough so I can go. I've got two of those. You can see I try and include the names so that if I do need to go back and have a look and see who the artist was or the designer was, I can go back. There is a tidy up function inside of Canva. It works. Works Watch this. You can slick them all, right click and go to SpaceEvenly go tidy up, it never seems to work for me. I like I don't know the jumbleness of a mood board. The other thing you can do in a mood board to show even to yourself or to your client is to say, you can make things bigger as they are important to how you feel the brand is going to go. You might decide that you really like these and this, like this color, So bring it to the front Member command square bracket or control square bracket. Get it to the front. You can start doing a hierarchy of, that's cool but not as important as some of these other things. It's a way of showing that. We have learned before how to pull colors from it. Let's say that you do these two colors here. We can grab our elements. We can grab the square, and I can say. Is a color from I drop it there. I'm going to copy it and duplicate it, drag it there, and then grow back into here. You get the idea. Can I grab that color? It's hard, you're in there. That'll. It's just a great place if you're not sure where to get started for brand for any project. Good old mood board. The only other thing is to head it up with a title. I'm going to copy and paste mine. I'm cheating. I'm going to call this one. What's mine Fox? Camping. Do the same for yours. I find not getting too hung up on how it is all some people spend a lot of time on movebards making them look perfect and then going to the client, obviously. If it's for yourself, you can just leave it as rough as you like. But I tend to like to go to a client with rough stuff like this as well and do it early in the process just so that they know this is a scrappy way of getting started just to see we heading in the same direction before I get too far down the design process. Move boards a great way to connect with the client, get their opinions, start circling stuff. Oh, they love that. They really don't think that's going to work or none of this is what they're looking for. That can be really good as well, because there's no point to spending a lot of time designing logos when you're completely off the mark and they're looking for something completely different. Go to the moodboard. All right, there was a long video. Okay? Basically, what we want to do is, I just want 12 images of things that are related to your logo. Stick them in a document. That is it. Don't share this one. This is for you only. So just upload it to the class projects, you don't need to share this one on social media. This one here. We'll start sharing stuff publicly via social media again once we actually have some logos to share rather than just screenshots of other people's logos. All right. That's it. Happy moodboard making. 38. Markup Tools, Stickies, Comments & Sharing in Canva: Hello, it's you. You're back. Hey, in this video, we are going to look at marking up our whiteboard in Canva. Okay, we're going to look at the drawing tools. We'll look at commenting and sharing with our customers and clients, how to use stickies, draw these cool little lines, and love how to MGs. A lot of these are unique for the whiteboarding feature in Canva. So let me show you how they work. Let's start with a good old fashioned shortcut that we already know. Anybody remember what the Zoom to fit is? Right, Command option zero on a MAC, Control Alt, zero on PC. The good thing about using that shortcut when you're in whiteboard mode is that it zooms out to everything you've made. So it's extra especially helpful there. The next thing is that the whiteboard mode has some special features. You might have bumped into them already. If you draw a rectangle or square, so we did elements square. If we add a square, I'm going to put it over here, you'll notice that you get these arrows by default. When you're in whiteboard mode. The cool thing about them is I'm going to delete that one is this guy here, I want to click hold and drag. Can you see the line that comes out of him? I can snap it to there just to add a little bit of flow in terms of that's where that came from. I might do it the other way around, I might say, might do is turn it off that way and turn the arrowhead on that way, so it's pointing up. If you are using the whiteboard for more, I'm going to duplicate this. I got two of them. If you are using it for more flowchart, maybe it's a site map for a website or some flow process, UX design process, something, you can drag these lines out and you see, it'll actually give you it'll just duplicate the box that you made. I didn't do anything, not holding anything down. That could be handy. The handy things. I'm going to go back to my shortcut Command Option zero, control Alt zero on a PC is stickies. If you go to elements, you'll notice this thing here. Look at that. He wasn't there before. Stickies are really useful for doing mood boards. I just use the Sky and that will just do a little sticky note. We can stick it above stuff and we can type things. This might be notes to ourselves or to the client. Has my name as the author and I can pick a different post it note color, but post it should be yellow. I'm going to leave that as yellow. Same thing as the squares. These post it notes here have lines. White here, can draw that and I can just get it to attach. If you're the reviewer and somebody sent you something, if I click on this, I can do a Mojis. I love this idea. Let's look what happens when we do share it with somebody. Let's say that I'm going to send this off to my client as my mood board, and I'm going to say, S, we've got different levels of access. I could send them a JPIG but actually, I want them to be able to comment on it. What I'm going to do is I'm going to say, everyone with a link has access or you could email them. You can type in their email here specifically they will get it up to Okay, anyone with the link can comment, I'm going to copy that link and email it to them. Let me show you what it looks like on their side. I've opened this up. This is what your client would get if they don't have a Canva account and it'll depend. Like some clients I know if I send this to them, they'll be fine. Some of them, they'll have a meltdown. I'll send them a PDF and an email. You'll know from your client which they might prefer. The cool thing about this though, is that the client here can have a look, can review it, send you an email back. If they want to comment, they'll have to sign up. They can sign up for a free account. The cool thing about it, it's interactive. They can see it all, they can move around. They can see your notes here and they didn't have to log in or sign up or anything, but if they do want to comment, they do need to. Look at it if they do comment. I can do commenting, let's have a look. I've got some notes that I want to add to my client. We've got a good Canva working relationship. They know how to use it. What I can do is instead of using posted notes, I can say, I want to comment on this thing. You need to have something selected the comments to attach itself to something. Have something selected. Click on this. You can add your note, tag your client ademojis the good thing about it is that when the person opens it on the other side, have a look, you can see here they can see the comments. Again, if they want to reply, they need to sign in. But you can add a lot of documentation just using the comments or posted notes, depends on what you want to do. The one thing I always forget when I'm doing comments, I'll be like, What did you think? They're like, About what? Whenever I do it, I hit comments and I type something in, type something in, and then I click off and I'm like, done. Looks like there's a comment there. It's halfway through editing. You've got to hit Enter or hit submit comment. Otherwise, it doesn't actually apply just sits there and drafts. I do that all the time. The other thing is, if the client has gone through and left their comments, what you can do on your side is you can click on this button here. Instead of trying to find them all and click on the M, you can just hit this option and it will show you for the current page all the comments that are on it. The other things that are useful for this ideation phase and especially in this whiteboard mode is you get given this draw option and you've got some basic drawing tools. These two here are exactly the same. One thin, one's thick. I'm going to go to this first one here. I'm going to draw something. Actually, I've already missed around with mine. By default, it's a lot thinner. It's down here somewhere, you just draw like you'd imagine you'd use it for. We've used fancy arrows. We can just do a big old arrow here. I wouldn't attempt to writen this. You can. It's just tricky with a mouse. Obviously, you can just use your text element or comments. It is much easier to draw if you're using Web iPad or your mobile like we did earlier in the course, you can just use your finger to draw. Now, this first one here is the pen, this is the marker. These are the same, except the marker by default is thicker than the pen. But if you go down here and say the weight is heavier for the pen, it ends up being exactly the same as the marker. There's no difference between these two tools. Not that I can find anyway. Light is basically the same as these except that they've got the transparency turned down. They're just some pre made stuff with different colors, essentially all doing the same thing. The highlighter here, I'm going to grab my pen, pick a better brush size, and we might be doing stuff like this. There you go. The highlighter, the pen tool, and the marker, basically the same tool, good for just marking it up and scribbling over things. Do like keeping the professionalism out of the mood board here so that it can do its job. It's just a quick ideation, quick ideas, quick concepts over to the client just to make sure we're going in the same direction and I don't get too far down the design process and we have completely different ideas. That is the scary part when you do get started designing in Canva is like, how long should I take? That is one of the trickiest parts when you are getting started designing in Canva is hiding your designs, waiting too long, and then the client may be expecting because you've had it for two weeks, it would be more than what you actually have delivered. Simple scribbles, notes, comments, get it over to them early. I do love this move board function in Canva. The one thing it doesn't have is, if you go to templates, maybe that Styles panel, it's gone. You can't go through and pick color styles for this whole thing. That's the interesting thing about Canva is that some parts have features and that line thing just popping off the side here is pretty cool, but it's not in an Instagram post when you start that. You can get to it. We can make the lines happen. Like this, we can go through and change the colors, but we don't have that fancy styles thing in here. There are missing some things, but you do get some extras like stick. My friend, that's the markup tools, the stickies, the comments, and sharing your mood board with your client. That is it. I will see you in the next video. 39. How to Run Logo Competitor Analysis in Canva: Hello. In this video, we're going to talk about competitive analysis or competitive research. Same thing. This video here is a little bit more theory based, before we go and start making a logo. So less tools based for Canvas. If you're just here for show me the tools, Dan, you can skip this video. But if you're new to design or haven't got a lot of structure around your design methodologies, this is a really good one. I find it super helpful for me. So yeah, let's dig in. Hope you find it useful. Well, first up, it's easy. Let's say, we're designing a logo. We need to figure out what the competitors logos look like. Then we give it a fancy word called analysis. Put it in a little bit of a graph here. And it is simple to do. This one here took me, I don't know, 20 minutes, half an hour, you get good at them. When you're new, they're amazingly helpful for giving you some boundaries when you're designing a logo and also giving you some language around why you've picked a logo so that you can talk to your clients about the reasons why we've picked a logo, while we're doing this, not that, why we're using this colors, not this color, while using this font, not that font. Otherwise, it's the curse of the designer. It's like do whatever you want. You're like, no. It's like the worst instruction ever. It seems like freedom, but it's not. You're not too sure where to start. Competive analysis is really good for that. I'm going to show you my process. There's people that do it more in depth. I like this way. It's the way I use. I find it really good for students as well. Yeah, let's jump into it. Now, competitive analysis is different from a mood board. A mood board is this. We did this already. This is feeling the vibe, the colors, the fonts that you like. Things that you're enjoying the client likes, do you think is going to be good for this project? It's like a creative inspiration session, fun. Competitive Analysis is a little bit more analytical. You need to do both. In which order, it doesn't matter. I like to do both at the beginning of a job. I often start with the move board because I'm excited and these are fun bits and then competive analysis is the boring bit, but it gives me a good framework with working with a client and how do I do it? Basically, you take the brand that you're working on either your own or in this case, the one you've been given for the course. You go and find competitors. How do I do it? I go to Google and type in Camping. Or tattoo parlor or whatever the thing that you are doing. Okay? And often I'll do it close. I live in Limeric. Okay, so I'll type in Limeric and I'll go through and just open up all of these tabs on my MCA hold on Command and watch what happens. I go, and it just opens up a new tab and I just go through and go, Woop, and I just keep clicking them Adra sound effect on a PC. I imagine it's control and clicking them, but double check. But open them all up and then just go through and take screenshots. Now, what we're not doing is remember we did this in dribble earlier on, looking for the coolest looking one. If you type in camping logo here, it's going to give you often quite aspirational logos, ones that maybe have been designed but not actually implemented. It's very different. We're looking for logos that are on the sides of buildings that companies have actually gathered around and actually done because we're going to try and position our brand amongst these other logos. That's what's really helpful about competitive analysis. It's a way of saying, All right, if we want to be in the world, where is everybody else? How do we compare? Do we want to be the same? Do we want to be different? If we want to be different, what is out there to be different from? We need to figure that out first. I go through and often the logos aren't as fun or exciting. But the practical, the bean used. I go through and I take so many screenshots. The other thing is that I run out of often local shops. So I'll go in and I tape Amsterdam, London, New York, and open up all the tabs. That's what I've done. A big cities they've got brands for this particular thing and take a load of screenshots. Then grab all the screenshots. There's my screenshots. Okay, work out how to do that on your device. Take all the screenshots, and then I dump all into Canva like we did before. I'll show you my process. I go Sho Dog. Then we'll just in there. I just just leave them there. I've kept my phases in here. I don't keep them here. I move them around into this space. This is the most important step. Dump them all in, then I took a little snapshot of each step that I do. But really, I'll only have one in the end. The next snapshot is to do this. Put a little bar on the top and put simple and radical along the axis. X axis. Is the Y axis. The axis goes the horizontal axis. Do that one, then all you do is drag them from boring. To not I use radical often radical gets used, but think unconventional or weird for the industry. Because the thing is not radical. There's no universal radical. Radical for that brand, I thought was this, mainly because it's not quite normal for all these camping stores. They've all got this kind of I don't know, nordic outdoory I don't know, simple living in vibe going. This one, beach Bum vibe. It's radical for this industry. I'll show you another one that I did for a different client. So the radical on this one, this is for a bike shop. Radical for them was this stuff. Okay. But if I was in, let's say, uh, a tattoo parlor, this would not be radical or if I was a skateboard shop or a motor sports company. This might not be radical. That might be over here under quite simple, because it's what everyone does. But in terms of a bike shop, it's quite radical these ones. These ones here, simple. Simple's pretty easy. It's the same on both of these ones. Where are we? That is my most simplest one was this one here. Okay, it was just text. It's using Trajan, gay, and that was really simple. Over here, radical, and you just kind of separate them out. You're like, I've got this box all the way top of everything. Move them to the back. Gay I've got this one as the simple one. Then I grab this one. I'm like, Where do you fit? You're kind of simple, but they've done this thing with the plus and it looks like Sweden, like the flag, they've done some stuff with it. It's not really plain. This one here is really simple. I start just moving them up and down and then up and down. This one here, it's kind of simple, but there's a bear going on. It's kind of interlocked. This one here is kind of the same. I end up just kind of moving them around slowly. I'm like, Okay, this kind of simplish, but there's a little logo going on. There's a swan. Duck. There's no right or wrong here. I spend way too much time pushing around. Then when you've got them in the simple versus radical axe, then you start grouping them. So kind keep them in the same axe. But then, so this is still down the simple one, but I've grouped it with other simple looking ones. There's just tech space. There's nothing really going on. It down again. This one here, maybe now that I look at it after doing it, it's together, but this one's a little bit more radical, but these are little gang. This is called a word mark. There is actually not a lot going on at all. It's just text. There's no logo mark. These ones here I've grouped together. Because this has the text plus the logo, a logo type, bit of text plus a logo, these are all very common. Look how many there are for this one here, Logo, plus text, logo plus text, logo text. These kind of all stick together as a gang. But the one on this side, the Cotswold Cotswold outdoors on the left because it's very simple. On this group here, this one here is a little bit more radical, only a little bit. These are all quite similar. Now that I'm looking at these, I'm thinking, this one, they're all so similar. They're all going to stick together. Now, down here, I feel like these need to go up a little bit because these ones here, this one's a word mark. What they've done is it's not just texts like this one here. They've gone and done the text and done something with it. Same with this one here, they've made stylized texts. This atman Du here is very extreme. Kind of group them together because they don't fit in with these guys. You don't have to know the names of them yet, just group them together. That's part of getting better as a designer is starting to work out this thing here, either call it an emblem or a badge. The weird thing about camping, I only found one of them. I guess that counts. Now I'm thinking, these probably closer together, still in the same radical. They're more radical than this because there's I don't know, I feel like they're radical for the brand, and they're grouped together because they're in this circular badge emblem thing. These ones over here, I've grouped together because there's a lot of type plus interaction with the logo. You can see here that tree wouldn't stand on its own by itself because it's connected to the type. Same with this one here, same with this one here. There's no symbol to the left that can be broken off like these ones here. They're all connected and have to be used together. That's why I group those together. Group these ones further along radical because I feel like they are. But these got animals in them, simple one color animals. I group those together. This one here was radical, just by himself. He's not up or down. He's just there because he's radical and this one here had no real buddy as well. What you'll find is let's have a look at another one. Can see the big difference here is in this bike one, there's a lot of word marks compared to in here where there's very little word marks. Word mark is just the type by itself, like these guys. For some reason, camping sites like to have a symbol or a logo plus the type, whereas in the bike analysis, there's a lot more just the words, word marks. Still loads of them. It's funny when you start digging into an industry and you're like, Okay, there's a very similar thing going on. See, down here, there's only a couple of badges for this one as well. But these ones were super basic in the simple There was one more over here, but super radical. These are all word marks, but over here is a very simple wordmark and over here is quite a radical wordmark. I've smeared that group quite far across, whereas this group is a bit more bunched, and these guys are the weird ones. Now, why do we bother with competitive analysis? I just find it really useful for me to be able to get involved in an industry that I might not have worked in before or at least even if it's an industry I do know, getting the logos on the page is amazingly you're like, A, look what they all are doing. Okay, and it allows you to give yourself a frame to work from. Because what I find really useful is where I'm aiming for is in this I don't know, 60%, 70% range. I like building my logos in here. They're progressive in this radical scale without being too radical. I can start looking at some of these things in here and going, Alright, I'm digging this. I'm going to move it over because I like them. To fit into my 60 to 70% range. I like these ones here. These are fine. Okay? I do these if I knew the client was very conservative or they're trying to blend in. Say they're a small shop and they are trying to project sameness. Look at us. We're the same as everyone else. Then you do this kind of layout. It's what the market knows, it's what consumers know. I go in this one. I wouldn't start designing a whole lot of badges. I bet you if you're doing another one, like coffee shop or a tattoo parlor, I use tattoo parlor a lot. Just trying to think some of the other ones that are in the random project generator. You might find a lot more badges, you might find to fit going to make a badge. But without this analysis in front of you, it's hard to frame it. The other thing is, say the client wants to be radical. You don't know what the basic stuff is or most of the industry is doing. It's in these two groups. So if you are going to be radical, you could do it over here in the Emblem badge space or in the weird beach bum hand drawn, sketchy look. You get the idea? Right, they do, Dan. The other thing is that you can keep this to yourself or work with the client on it. I find it's quite a good one of the first couple of meetings is to bring a committed analysis. It shows that you know what you're doing, even though you might be new, but also gives you a chance to explain where you're going to design for A, are we looking to be part of this existing industry? We're going to stick to this group here. Client really likes this word mark here, altered text, simple one, it allows them to point at it and go, I like that. I don't like this, I don't like this, I don't like that. It gives you a sense of where they're liking, where they're feeling before you go off and design a logo. We're going to use this a bit in the next few videos. It's going to help us pick fonts and colors and all sorts of other good stuff. It is to be useful for other things as well. That is it. There was a long spiel about comparative analysis. I really like this stuff. It really helps me as a designer, both in logo design and all sorts of design, just seeing where the competition is and where I might sit. Right. That is it. We'll see you in the next video. 40. Class Project 09 - Competitor Analysis: All right, it's time to make your own competitive analysis for your own company. Okay, so I want you to create a whiteboard and name it, go and collect a bunch of logos from existing companies, not looking for fictional companies or cool looking designs, looking for actual businesses that are operating. Kind talked about that in the last video, then I want you to create a simple axis, simple, radical, dump all your logos on, and then just move them up and down that axis, depending on how radical you feel they are or simple they are. Don't worry too much about, hm I is this radical? Does he mean this, just do it for yourself. And by the time you've done a few of these, you'll have a bit of a like a I get a feeling for what these are and what they're not. Every time I look at my comparative analysis, every time I reopen it, I shuffle things around. There's no absolute way of doing it. Even when I was talking to you in the last video, I was like, Move this one, no, move that one down. Move it up and down turn radicalness. That's phase one. Phase two is then see if you can group them into things that look the same. Now what you might find is these ones here, I guess, didn't get spread out as much as they should have. I'll show you a different one, where's the other one. This one here is a better example where these are all the same type But instead of being a group together like this, they got smeared out because this one's quite simple and this one here, these two here are quite radical, but they're in the same group. I've just there's a long thin group. The same kind of types, some of them are a bit more radical than the others. It's the same in this group here. I've kept the radical ones on this right hand side and the simple ones on this side, even though they're the same thing, it's a combination mark, a logo, plus text. But this one here, I feel like is a little bit more radical, so it's on this side of the be tricky to do and you might have to push it around a few times. Again, don't worry if you don't get what you feel is right. Just get it into some order. The other thing I'd like you to do as part of this is just do a little bit of research on. I'm not going to go through all the different names for all the different kinds of groups, get them into groups and go, I wonder what they call that. The weird thing is, I call an emblem, but somebody call it a badge logo. There's different words. I've put a few of them in here, but just Google different logo types and just do a little bit of research. Do 5 minutes. Have a little look around, have a look at images from Google images. I'm just like examples that can be quite good. So Google images. I just typed in logo types and you can have a little look, wordmark, letermarkPictorial Mc, abstract and have a little look what you'll find is, it can be a little confusing because you're like, Oh, isn't that something else? There's pictorial mark, similar to abstract mark. There's not hard and fast rules. Often, things can exist in two parts together, and when people are separating them out, either might have got them wrong because it happens a bit, there's letter mark here and there's word mark here, you're like, Oh, could be in the same group. I don't want to confuse you, but I also want to let you know that there's sometimes a little bit of fluidity in exactly what groups things are going to be in. But I want you to get your vocabulary up, do at of research, start knowing what a word mark is, compared to a logotype just so you can have those better conversations when you are doing design work. Get them all up, take a screenshot, upload it to your not of your moodboard, of your compared analysis, and then upload it to the assignment section. We don't need to share this one on social media because they're not our logos. They're not very exciting. For you, not for everyone else. When we start making stuff again, we'll start sharing it again in social media. But for now, just class project time, upload it and get ready for the next steps. We're going to use this quite a bit thinking, I might skip this one. I wouldn't, but I'm the boss of you. So it's up to you, but I would go and do it. Anyway, that is it class project competitive analysis. I will see you in the next video. 41. Designing a Custom Logo in Canva: Hello. We're going to make our own custom logo. We're not going to rely on one of the templates. We are going to use some of the premade graphics inside of Canva and we're going to look at the magic media graphics one. We can use AI to generate our own custom logo. We're going to create this combination mark, bit of type mixed with a logo mark, and together, they're a combination mark. Let's jump in. Quickly, before we get started, combination mark just to, I don't know, remind ourselves, we've got a logo type and a logo mark. Forget the word logo. We've got a type, that is a logo type. It's got type in it, and a logo mark is this, the thing, sometimes just called a symbol. I've shared this terminology with you before. I just want to reiterate and share you the combination one. In why it's a little bit mixed up because everyone calls them all different things. Here we go. Word mark. These are words. Used on their own, they're stylized, and that is used on their own. There's no extra symbol next to the CNN logo. But if I go down, that is the logo mark. Here they call it symbol. That's okay. We know word mark and logo mark. Some people call them symbols. If you combine them together, words plus the symbol or in our case, logo mark, that's what we call it. Combine these two together, you get our combination mark. Regular logo. Anyway, this is the more typical way of doing things. It takes a lot of branding and branding dollars to just have a symbol on its own. It has to be quite well known. If you did this and target wasn't in every American city store, I'm not from America and I even know what Target is. There is no target in any of the three countries I've lived in. But I know what it is because they spent a lot of money on marketing and branding, it's part of pop culture. Was say this one here on its own, without this, it's going to be tricky. This one here might get away with it because Dropbox is quite ubiquitous. Same with the three stripes. This one here, not so much needs the text, it needs this combination to get all right. Quick with the talking, Dan. Let's get into the making of the logos. All right, start with, let's go to the home tab along the top. Let's create a new design. Looking for logo. You might find it, recommended to you along the top. If you can't find it, go into more. It doesn't really matter. We're using logo because we want all of these tools available, and most of the things you start with have these. But if you started with, say, Doc, we looked at it earlier, it has a different kind of interface. So it's probably best starting with logo. We're starting with a blank one. Okay, what we're going to do is add our type. I remember T for the type tool. I'm going to go through this fast and just add my text. All right. I've added some really plain text. In a little while, we'll look at picking the right text for your logo. But the moment we're working on this combination logo part. Put in two bits of text just so that we've got something to balance against. I've made my big and bold for no good reason. Remember we're going to pick fonts later on. The first thing we're going to do is start with a pre made graphic. Okay, so we're going to go to elements, and we're going to go down to graphics. Graphics is where you might find something that's going to work. I'm going to type in Fox and just have a look at what premade stuff are in side of Canva. There are lots of pro ones. I really like this one. Go and the cool thing about it is I do get to change color of this one if I need to. So have a look through, and what I'm going to do is I'm going to select this drag the box across all of them. I'm going to move this to the top. Before I start dragging, I'm going to hold down the option counterclt counter PC so I can get a duplicate. What I want to do is actually find a few different versions of the premade graphics. Now the only problem with the premade graphics is that everybody gets to use them. You are unlikely to be granted registered logo trademark on these because you didn't make these. These aren't your original work. Now, this will depend on your client and who you're working for, what you're working for. Most logos that are made in the world aren't gone through the proper registration process. There's nothing wrong with using a pre made graphic. If you like it, the client likes the only trouble is there's not a lot of customization inside of camera. At the moment, there's just not a lot of drawing tools. We look at the AI tool and we'll look at premade graphics. We can change the color of this, but we can't do a lot outside of that. We are limited a little bit. I should spend some time going through, see what's in here, see what might work, or pause. That looks. You are going through these, what you might do now is jump back to your mood board, see things that you really enjoyed before. Can I find something that is a tail? Start searching within the pre made graphics to see if you can find something that's close to what you want or at least something you like from your mood board. Same with the competitor analysis. It is interesting now to go through and say, what have other people done? Can you see here, this is less of an actual mountain and an actual tent. But I'm assuming it's a mountain. But they've gone for something a bit more symbolic. Now I'm going to stick to quite the literal fox theme, and go through and pick a few more graphics. I'll do that at the end because what I want to show you is some of the tools we've used earlier on. I'm going to duplicate that, draw a box around them all, hold down the option key or old key on a PC, drag them down. I delete that one there, and I'm going to look at graphics. I'm going to look at the. We're in elements. We're inside of graphics, and we're going to go to the AI generator. Scrolling down magic recommendations, no, no. Actually, it was back one, wasn't it? Graphics, there it is the AI generator. Let's create our own. And we're going to look at this option here. You can use an image if you wanted to. Graphics tend to be the more I know, iconic. I'm going to say iconic. I mean, iconographic. That's not a word, Dan. Simple flat vector graphics that might work better as a logo. So I'm going to type in Fox and Fox I'm going to put in Fox tail. Oh, that is cool. So I clicked on that, so it's moved it out here. Let's go back into there. Let's go back into my generate what you'll find is, let's say this one here. Unfortunately, the moment, you feel like oh, I just want to pull the fox out of that. It's smushed in there and I can't work out a way of getting inside of it to pull it apart. At the moment it's a fixed graphic. Hopefully that'll change in the future and you can pull elements out and get a bit more vector drawing inside of Canva. For the moment, we're a little bit limited with what we can do. But when you do find something you do like, you like this, you're like, feather fox's tail, you can generate more like this. I'll go through and make another set similarish to this. All right. Those are all very too similar. I'm going to go Fox's tail and in the shape of a tent. Logo. Now, one of the things we're doing as designers these days is there's a lot of prompt designing, where you're trying to think of ways of getting AI to help me as best as it can. It's getting better. Oh, I do like this. There we go. I'm going to work my way through now and just do nothing more than type stuff in and see if I can get a result that I'm thinking about and remember jumping back to my mood board. Don't worry about fonts and colors. We're going to do those in separate videos, but I want you to, I'm going to set a class project now and we're going to type out some basic text and then come up with some versions of our Fox logo. Earlier on, I said these ones here would be tricky to get as a registered trademark because it's not original. You did not make it. This because it's AI generated and it was human interfaced. I typed it in, I encouraged it to give it for me this. It's unique. I could go through the logo registration process and it's totally valid during the registration process, which very few people unless you're a large company go through the process of. It just needs to be original, can't be copying anybody else. But just so you know these are unique enough to be used in a process where a larger company might go through and register the trademark. To learn more, there is a learn more option here, just about how to use some of these AI generated graphics. All right, so we've made ourselves a logo mark mixed with some texts, making it a combination mark, which is super typical if you look at our competitors or at least most of them there. This part here is the logo mark. Combined with text, though, is a combination mark. One thing before we go, I notice now if I go in and change, say my fonts, this edit screen, or this Edit panel is on the left now, not on the right. It was a change that just happened last week. Last video I recorded the edit was on the right hand side here. Now it's all over here. They've smushed it all on the you go. It happens. They're always trying to upgrade Cava and make it better and make it more usable, a little bit painful for a course creator, but there you go. I thought I'd acknowledge it because the beginning of the course, if I went to effects, they're all over here. Now, they're over there for the rest of the course. There you go. All right. That is it. We'll see you in the next video. 42. Class Project 10 - Combination Logo: Alright. This class project, we're going to be working on our combination logo. We're going to focus just on the symbol part of it or the logo mark part of it, like we did in the last video, add your business name, in plain text. I don't want you to experiment with fonts and colors yet. We're going to look at doing that in an upcoming video. I want you to make a minimum of six logos. You can add more. But three of them using existing graphics, that one there's an existing graphic from Canvas. So is that one, and so is this tail down here. People have access to the pro version. Some of you have to do a little bit more scratching around in the free symbols. But don't worry. The existing graphics to make up the logo and three using that magic media graphic feature. The AI, where you type it in and try and get what you need out of it. There's one on mine, another one, and another one. What you will notice is my ones is some symbols lend themselves to being on the left hand side and some of them in the stacked order. Often you need both versions for a client, but just at this stage, stack them if it feels right, put them side by side if it feels right. I don't like many of these. I haven't spent a lot of time balancing them out, so I don't want you to either. We're going to refine this as we go along. It's just a good fun time to go through and just throw things on the page, see where you end up. Now, make sure you don't forget about your mood board and your competitive analysis that you've done. Flick back through them to get inspiration and then when you're ready, lay them all out, remember, minimum of six, take a screenshot or export a PNG, then upload it to the class projects. Don't worry about sharing on social media yet. We'll get the fonts and colors going first, but definitely make sure you upload it to your class projects. All right. That is it. Enjoy making a logo inside of the limitations of Canva. Sometimes it can feel a little bit restricting and sometimes it's quite liberating, only having a certain amount of tools to get where you need to go. Like little creative blinkers. All right. Enjoy. I'll see you in the next video. 43. How to Pick Fonts for Your Logo: And in this video, we're going to look at how to pick fonts for your logo. Now, you can just pick up any old font. There's no real rules. But there are some guidelines that I'd like to share, just some rules of thumb that might help you at least narrow down the fonts. It can be tricky just scrolling through all of the fonts and just picking them all and not having any framework to work from. My tips and tricks, you might disagree with some of them. You might do the opposite what I say. That's totally fine too because you need to know what the regular way is to be able to do the opposite, if you get what I mean. Let me share some of the tips and tricks that I use when I'm picking what is quite an important font for a brand. It is the font used in the let's jump in. First thing is, I kip my first page that has all the different logo marks all over it. I picked one. Even if you haven't really decided on one yet, just pick one. I find picking fonts just using the same symbol or logo mark makes it life easy. Even if you double back and go, I'm going to change this out to something else. Otherwise, you end up way too many versions and it's hard to compare. Also duplicated mine a bunch of different times. I'm going to zoom out a little bit. Let's talk about how we're going to go and pick fonts. It can be tricky. You can just click on here, click on this and just cycle through all the fonts and just go and pick a bunch of them. There's nothing wrong with that. If you want a little bit of structure and I don't know, some rules to follow, follow along. The first thing I do is I go and check out my competitive analysis. What you'll find is that there will be generally some consistency. Back here, this is where most of the market is. This is some of the more radical stuff that I decided member, and this is way out radical. So if you know what you're trying to do as maybe it's a small brand and you're trying to fit in with everyone else. You're trying to look like you are, maybe bigger than you are or more established than you are, then it's probably best to pick a style of font that's in here. You can borrow somebody else's font. There's no trademarks on actual fonts, something that's being customized like this, you won't be able to copy. But I bet you it's just a standard font with a slightly altered T here. So you can borrow other people's brands by just using the font. That's why some big companies will design their own fonts. You can other thing to do is that you might look in here and say, right, is there consistency around the fonts? Most of these here are what's called a Sand sera font. You can see one of them is not, this one here. This one here is a serif font. Seraph of these little feet. See the bottom the here little feet on the bottom. Those are ser Sanderf Sands is Latin for without, is without feet. That's like this one here. This R has no little feet at the bottom. Serif Sanser. If I was trying to be a bit more progressive. Some of these ones here like this one. There's rounded font. What you'll slowly do after time is you'll start to work out the types of fonts in their names. Some of the things you can do to help is, let's click on this one. I'm going to click on both of these. Chef, click them both and click on the font over here under fonts, you can go see these little labels here. They've broke them into the main groups. Handwriting is easy. Corporate is corporate. Display is anything weird and wacky. You'll start to get used to things like, look, San Serif without feet, Serif with feet, rounded. Discussed that before. Modern. You get a sense for what the names are kind of circling through these. If I wanted to fit in with the rest of the brands and look like I'm part of the gang already, I click on San Seraf and I'd go through and pick a San sera font. Now, this is where you spend ages scrolling and clicking. Nothing gets you past the scrolling and clicking. The one thing you can do, though, is do yourself a favor. If you're picking a font, whenever I'm looking for a font, I'm less inclined to pick this one. Actually, I've got mine set to free just for the people that are following along using the free version. I'm less likely to pick this one. Why? There's no weights to it because a really neat trick for working with fonts and trying to get some separation and a bit of hierarchy is when you've got different weights. So let's have a look at Barlow. Where do we go? Oh, Barlow is a good one. I get excited because I'm like, Oh, look at these different weights. Whereas this one here? Doesn't have any. This one here has only two, regular weight and a bolt, which is good. But what you can do with something like Barlow here, you can say, right, I want them to be black, but I want the bottom part. It can be the same font weight, that's totally fine. But what I like to do is go through and say, Ar, I'm going to make you medium. I gives you this I don't know, it adds a bit of hierarchy, says, This is the most important thing and this thing is secondary. I use my rake to tap it around. All fonts need a bit of lining up afterwards. I find that's probably too heavy and I'm going to go to bold. I'm digging it. Here's a bump over again. That's one way of doing it. Look at the competitors, figure out where you want to be, to be radical. Do you want to be the classic style, fit in with everyone else? And remember if that's going to be different for everybody's brand. If you're a tattoo parlor, this logo like that is going to be very radical. Because tattoo parlors don't do this sensible combination mark. Do you know what I mean? It's good to know where everybody else is to know where you want to stand. You want to fit in? Hand out. Simple, radical. Another trick for picking a logo or text for a logo is to go for opposing font style. Up here, if we stick with Barlow semicondensed, bottom here, it's a rule, not a rule. The rule is don't use two different Sand Serafonts together. If you're going to use B at the top here, use it down the bottom as well and a different weight. You can totally flout that rule. But if you're looking for a little bit of structure and a little bit of rules to pick fonts by, it often can look a little weird when you've got one font there and that one there is a Sanderf and that one's also a Sand serf. Often the good trick is, if you're going to try and do something different in terms of different fonts is to go completely different. That one there is a San serapont down the bottom here, we're going to use handwritten or a serifont. Let's go up the top here, let's go back from Sanserf Let's go to a serifont and find something it's going to work in here. Let's go Joy Serif and another trick is, we've got all cap. There's no reason why it can't be camping and outdoor. Often that contrast of San serf and Seraph is a nice combination for the two. There's also the random just clicking and picking fonts as well. I'm trying to give you a little bit of structure in the course. If you're like, I just want to pick a font, Dan, you can pick any font you like. If you want your font and cactus shaped, western themed, that is totally fine as well. Figure out what everybody else does and either match them or do something completely on purpose, then pick the font and a different weight. If you're trying to combine two different things. If you're just doing like this, that is easy. Often not. And if you want to pick two different fonts, it's often best to change the font category. That is a Sanserf and this is a Serif or this might be handwriting that might be Sanserif. Have a look at some of the compeor analysis. Actually, let's look at a mood board as well. It's funny how consistent this is. They've combined the names with no space and just gone uppercase to break the words up. They've done it there for Zen camp, there for that. Same for fun camp there, Hot camp. You can see it here. That's a good example. There's quite hand drawn or display font at the top here. It's quite fun. It's not very sensible. Get down the bottom here is a very clear, simple SNSera font. Look at better analysis. Now, when you're looking at competitors, some of them are just not nice. I'm not going to point at anyone, there's some terrible ones in here. This one here, see, they've gone for the weight. They've gone for same font, slightly different size like we've done, and they've gone for a lower weight. Same font. This one here, they've gone for two different fonts. This one here is called a slab serif. It's a seraph, like we talked about, like this one hand, but this one here's got a big Baduhi slab on it. They call that a slab serif. Are you meant to know these all? No. But I bet you in Canva, they probably have Canvas sands. Do they have slab seraph? Have a look, look, look, look, look. Slab, Sarah. There it is there. Fun. Narrow. You'll find them all in here. And after a little while, you get a sense of what they're called. Now, the way I've given you is quite clinical. Another way that I'm going to show you, oh, I drag that out. You can actually drag these tabs out from each other if you're using the Canva app. Okay, it's not what I wanted to do. Drag them back in is sometimes it can be a little bit I don't know, I feel happy just going through the boring fonts and just kind of experimenting and doing combinations. You'll be like, you might be so boring. Where is the exciting stuff? I'm not going into font. I'm going into the text tab, and let's just click on. Can you see down here font combinations. Somebody's gone through and found some interesting combinations already, and it might just be a way. Let's click on this one here. Even if you don't plan on using it, I just like to go through these guys and go, Al, what is that one, Dynamo condensed. And there's dynamo down here, obviously outlined. I think, Oh, no. What I've done is they've gone and added an effect to it and gone hollow. Oh, fancy. That can be really helpful to go through. I'm going to delete those now. I might go, right, I'm going to try this one in a dynamo. I'm gonna have to clear all of that off and just type in dynamo. There is a couple of dynamos. I'm gonna go that one there. But there's no light version. But there's this weird one. Anyway, you get the idea. You can go through these and just get a sense of what other designers at Canva have put together. Otherwise, it can be a little bit tricky going through and going, A and just picking from this list over here of boring old fonts where I don't know. It's not very exciting. Sometimes it's better to see it in situ like here. All right, so I'm going to go through and pick some other font combinations using some of the rules and maybe breaking some of the rules. Hopefully, you found that interesting, maybe give you some ideas about how to pick fonts. You might have your own ways that's totally cool. But I thought I'd share some of the industry standards and some of the ways that I go about picking fonts for quite an important job like this for picking a logo. 44. Class Project 11 - Logo Fonts: Class project time. I want you to pick fonts. Go through and look at all your combination marks from earlier. Pick one of them, even if it's not your favorite yet. Just pick one of them. I find it so much easier to pick font when you can have a consistent logo mark, and then you can double back later on once you've found a font that you like and double back and try it against a few of these other logo marks. But for the moment, grab one combination, duplicate it out eight times and pick fonts. I like to go further. I feel like I should only do four, but I always push myself further than I need to go often sometimes you pick the easy ones and you're like, that's cool. That's cool. And you're like, I got to do eight. You end up pushing through and you're like, ah I often find some of those ones where I've done too many. Not too many. You don't want 20, but sometimes just past what you think. You're like, that's good. I'm going to stop there. Go past the comfortable stage and you end up having to experiment with fonts and colors and symbols. Often some of that time can be the most rewarding in terms of, I don't know, finding the thing that works. Do it eight times. Experiment with some of the techniques we learned in the last video. Even if you disagree with all of them or just want to go against them, it's totally fine. Knowing what some of the rules are is essential to breaking the rules, if you know what I mean? Know what we're fighting against. So go through. Do your eight, circle one with the markup tool. I've used the markup tools over here, the drawer. Circle the one that you like the most. Take a screenshot or share a PNG and upload it to the class projects. That is it. We're not showing this one on social media yet. We'll do that next when we get some colors in here. Stay away from colors. Experiment with some fonts. Circle the one you like. That is it. Have fun picking fonts. Which one do you like the most? I do sometimes pick my fonts by the one I dislike the most science. Anyway, enjoy. I'll see you in the next video. 45. How to Pick Logo Colors: Hi, everyone. Hey, in this video, I'm going to share my tips on how to pick colors for a font. Hey, you can obviously pick any color you like. But I'm going to show you the tricks and tips that I use to go off and explore colors, not only just to find interesting color combinations, but also to give you some language that you can go back to your client with. You can talk about complimentary and analogous. You can give kind of a background of the meaning of the color. Okay? So all of that in this video. But again, you can just go pick any color, but I wanted to show you my tips and tricks for how to pick colors for logos, which is quite important color selection choice. Oh, and we'll go through and make some swatches that we can reuse throughout the course, as well. Let's jump in. All right. First up, make a new page and copy and paste the one that you want to use onto this next one. We're going to do colors. You'll notice that I circled that one in the last one and this one, I have a different font and a different symbol. I just chose different things. The font here, I was looking at. I like this kind of, like, I don't know, Scandinavian looking outdoorsy thing. I went with a rounded font, a bold one. I chose a different logo mark because this one here was created with AI and it doesn't give me a lot of options for recoloring it. I went through and picked graphic. Not all the graphics either have the ability to go through and say, I I like this one, I can di it. For some reason, you'll notice I still can't go and edit the colors easy. Was I found this one and this one has two easy colors to adjust. Canva will get better at creating stuff from scratch, but the moment, there's a lot of using existing stuff, which is great and quick, but sometimes you want to go and make things yourself. Maybe something like Adobe Illustrator is what I might use for creating a logo if I wanted to be fully custom. But in Canva, we're going to use AI or use some of the graphics. I found one, let's adjust the colors. And quickly, I'm going to go through and select it all, hold down my option key, hold on a PC and drag out a copy, hit Command D to give me another one. Same with this one here, select them all, hold on the option key first, drag it out, and then go Command D. I've got a bunch of different color options. All right now picking color. The easy way is, well, the starting ways to go and look at competitors like we've done everything else. You can see here, it's predominantly red and green. No blues. There's one. It's just really interesting to see. Over here, gets a bit more over the place, but oranges, green, red, a little bit of blue, I guess. So it's just interesting to see where everything else is, and it gives you a frame of reference when you are chatting to your client when you have to justify your color. They might be like, Oh, I don't like green. Like, Well, we're trying to fit in. Trying to fit in. We're trying to compare ourselves to these other quite well establis brands. So green is a good choice in this case. Another thing you can do actually before is you can go in here and start. I was trying to get my change the color of this and I went to elements. I went into my Goto graphics. I'm going to go down to the AI bit. Where is it? Actually, it's going to there it is AI generator. I typed in the same thing I did before, but I typed in green colors. It misinterpreted a little bit because it went and put some leaves on there, green as in the eco friendly one, but it actually got me closer to where I want. You might have an experiment to see if you can get the colors to do what you want by just typing them in here, that might be good enough. Anyway, little segue. Another really handy way of going and picking colors is just going out and typing in pinches is a really good place. I just typed in color palette outdoors. You might be like, that's good. Okay? Either take a screenshot or download the image. So I'm going to save it and then bring it into Canvas. Let's do the long way. Let's go uploads, upload your files. There it is there. Where did mine end up? Oh, it's not actually in there. It's just upload it. I'm going to drag it out. What we can do is we can say, A, you on that one, you and eyedropper and I want to start with this and the red. It like those together. Anyway, the red, you can work your way through other people's color combinations. Don't like that one. I'm digging that. Either use your favorite place to go and find colors, it might be printers, it might be dribble, quite like getting colors from here, undo that and speed and pick this from my actual actually, they didn't sped at all. It was big ran font. The idea stealing colors from other people and other images. We don't use the word stealing down. We use the word appropriation. I can do the same thing from my competitive analysis. I can say, A, these two, let's say this is a big competitor and we're trying to fit in. We're not going to copy them, copying them. We're going to see what it looks like. Can we align ourselves without copying by picking very similar colors? Maybe not exactly the same, but it can be important to at least see what things look like. Yeah, I'm digging it. Oh. All right. Add the orange. We're appropriating somebody's else's color, but we're mixing our own flavor. Mm. Now, sometimes the colors kind of fixed. Al Fox really wants to be orange because that's what foxes are. The other thing is, you might get a client that already has a brand color and it's important for the client or you think it's appropriate to carry it on. Then you're looking for colors that work with it. A cool little trick you can do is you're looking for mainly complimentary colors. So Canva has this really cool resource. It's called canva.com slash Color slash Color Hyphen wheel. I'll leave a link to it in the class projects. You'll see it under the upcoming Class Project 12. What's really cool about it is let's say you have an existing color. Let's go and grab it. Let's say that orange there is something that you have to use. You don't get to decide. It's already decided for you. Grab it. Copy the hex code for it. We're going to go over to Canva and we're going to say we're going to paste it in here. This little thing down here is quite useful. Basically, it shows you where it is on the color wheel. This is helping educate you as well when you may be dealing with a client about why we're picking colors. This is a complimentary color, this blue here. We might get copy that one. Say is. Then the other color I'm going to use is the red, let's use the add new color and just paste that in. Those two there complimentary colors work together. Do I like them? I don't. The word complimentary is less of a it's going to work together because they're 100% to compliment. It's more they are across each other from the color wheel. Watch this. If I move this around, whatever the complimentary color is on the other side. Are differently complimentary, but I don't know, F 1980s ninja turtle. Not what we need. Can you undo in here? You can't. All right. I want to go back to their color. Actually, let's go paste it in. All right. Down here, you can work through these other ones. Analogous is split out a little bit, colors that work a little bit further around the color wheel to the left and a little bit to the right. These are these two colors and you might decide, copy this one. Paste it in and go, you are going to be that other color here. Let's copy it. The color is going to be that red. All right. How we feel about that? I'm not sure analogus is going to work for us. Now, it does come down to really personal preference. A lot of the colors I end up picking are things that have been successful for me and clients in the past. Sometimes it's just blending in, doing what everyone else does because it's hard to do a green energy company that's not just greens. But I want to give you some tools to I don't know, explore other colors meaningfully, I guess. The other tricks for picking colors is using the styles. Let's just grab one A one. Let's make a new page, and let's paste it. Let's make it nice and big. We have to put one per page when we are doing this next one because if we go to design, go to styles and come down to color palettes. It changes the whole page because we do it up here and do the same thing. It changes the I'm pretty sure the whole page. That's cool, but it's not quite what I want. I want to leave those guys and I want to experiment down here. Blue fox. Duplicate it. Let's search for outdoors. Got no stars. Outdoors ui, then. Anyway, let's go through and see all our color palettes and just work our way through. And remember, if you click it again, it'll shuffle them. Who, digging that. Let's do one more and let's bring in an image and more of it might be a photograph from the store. It might be a brand that they carry, it might be the coffee they make or something quite specific for them. For me, I found this. I really liked something about the colors in here. I like that one too. I'm gonna grab that one. I'm going to go into Canva and I'm going to on my mac I can just drag it on. Drag in your screenshot. Or you got to drag it right in the middle of the page, though. Otherwise, it doesn't work. Let's find this one. Remember the trick we learnt before about we can say right click this thing, we can say apply colors to page. Ooh. The same thing again, but we can randomize them. Oh. I get very excited. There's the inspiration. There's what we ended up with. I like the off white background, gray background. Now it doesn't have to be somebody else's design. It could be a photograph of someone, something, maybe the door of the shop, something quite special, you can pull the colors from. Might be a great way of getting your color schemes. One of the things you need to be armed with, if you go in and say, right, this is the color that I want. What is it? I'm going to copy this is you need some reference of explaining why you've picked this color. You can like it, but often a client needs some verbiage to help them understand why you've gone they might be like, it's a bit bright. But if they know why you've picked a bright color, it can often help them understand the color. And another good resource from Canva is if you go to, I'll put this link in the class projects as well. Canva.com slash Color slash Color Hyphen Meanings. Can't really paste that in there, but I can put in let's say it is this color here. Find something that's quite close. Let's say it is Amber. What it'll do is it'll give you a bit of Explanation about why you could use Amber. Then we're talking about warm undertones, golden hue, could be the setting sunset, the amber of the fire. If you call it bright yellow, if the client sees bright yellow, they might not like it, but if you call it amber, they might love it. It's not so much Amber always means these things. Often, you can frame Amber a couple of different ways, but you need to be able to communicate what you mean by that color and sometimes it just helps you you'd be like, like it. Why do I like it? How can I rationalize what I like? Because it's hard when you're just like, that's cool. You can't go to a client with that's cool, even though it might be just cool. You need to give it some language so that they can understand it and sometimes they might be just wanting to pick a really safe color. You might be able to draw them out into more extreme colors or maybe unconventional colors because you are able to explain what it means, what it can and give your color some voice. The other thing about this exact same place is you can see it's giving you other colors that are similar to that amber and color combinations, very handy. One last trick when we're picking colors. Often you want you've got your primary colors, but you need some secondary colors to help you. You can't just use these two colors forever. Or can be handy if I had S from my square. Actually, that's for a sticky note. I can't remember what square is. What is it? That's right. I took me a while. Come on, Brain. I like to have a square here. What I'll do is I'll use my eyedropper tool to pick the first color. Then often what I'll do is I'll show you I'm going to zoom in zoom down a little bit is I'm going to use my trick to duplicate a version, D, D, D. Often five can be good. Okay, so I'm going to say are my middle color for this version. This one here I'm going to have. Actually, I can't go much darker, but I can go into the slide here and say, actually, I want a darker version of this color. I don't really need a lighter color. I don't really need any darker version, but I do need a lighter version of it. I'm going to say, come up a little bit, and do I need a lighter version? Yeah, why not? It gives me that same color but a few flavors of using it. Sometimes you might need a lighter version of that color and a darker version. I like to do that. We'll do the exact same thing here. Remember holding down Option on a Mac on a PC before you start dragging and I'm going to go, probably going to use four for this one. I'm going to go use my middle color to grab that. Where is that that. I'm going to say, I actually want all of these to be that orange color. That is the last color you used. I said, you are going to be. Now I'm going to do the exact same. I'll speak through. I'm just going to say you are a darker version. Now when it comes to lighter versions, you can do one of two things. You can go lighter, but I bumped into as light as it can. You can actually desaturate it as well. That's lighter, but still the same vibrance of color. You can make it lighter down this way, but you can see I start washing out the color. There's no real hard and fast rule, other than I've bumped into the top there, I'm going to go a little bit this way to wash it out a little bit. Then this one here, I'm going to do the same up this way and it's going to go even further. I'm going to have quite a washed out color. That might be for some type against a dark background. Awesome. I find that once you have found your color is to make a few little color palettes and swatches that you can use throughout your designs. I'm not sure I'm 100% loving that colors yet, but it's good to see it out in those color swatches. You get the idea. All my friends, that's all I got for picking colors. I hope some usefulness was in there for you, and I'll see you in the next video. 46. Class Project 12 - Picking Your Logo: It's exciting. We're going to pick our logo. We need to in this class project do three things. I looks big. It's not that big. There's three things. I want you to experiment with color, pick a color and pull out an array based on that color. There's a little squares there, and then I want you to pick a few versions and share it. Let me go through a little bit more detail. This first one here should basically just the last video we did. Pick one of your font combinations, pick one. Even if you're not happy with it. Create a your page, duplicate it nine ish times. It can be eight, it can be seven, it can be 12. Doesn't really matter. Go further than you think though sometimes it's the last one that you end up really. Then I want you to experiment with these three techniques we learned in the last video. One is using inspiration from other people's images, pinterest, any inspiration pulled from a screenshot. Then go through and use the styles. You have to put the logo on its own page and experiment with that design style. Design styles and look for color palettes, play around with that and then go and try on some of the competitors colors. Go back to your competitive analysis and have a little look and try on some of the direct competitors colors for size, see how they feel. We do something close to it that gets us in the same category, but that is not directly copying. Maybe we go for a darker version or a lighter version anyway, you get the idea, try those three techniques. Any techniques you like, really. Next, pick one of the colors that you either love or hate the least. I want you to do color array. Basically it's just member, pick the main primary color from the logo and then spread it out a bit darker, a bit lighter, get a sense of the color. I've done two here. I actually did six and five. Really didn't need to do the grays. I ended up looking very gray. But you can just do five or you might need four or might need six colors to get a good sense of it. So do that. Lastly, the fun bit is create a new page and grab three to six versions of your logo. What we're looking for is we're looking for a mixture of we're going to use the same logo mark. I'll show you mine. Let's use the same mark, but play around with different fonts and colors so that there's not an array like 1,000 different logos to pick from. You as the designer decide on the mark and then go through it and have a few options in terms of the font and the color ways. Then I want you to ask for a bit of feedback. Got to make sure you number them when people are feeding back to you, they go, I like number two. The colors like the font. Now, which one I'm actually asking now, Which one do you guys like? Do you like this more playful handwritten one or the rounded font or the San serafont? Any colors digging it on the comments? I'm a one kind of a guy. But anyway, what I'm looking for is to do that. Make sure you number them, have about three to six of them, and we're going to upload three pages to our class projects. What I want you to do especially around this one, is I want you to give at least two comments to other people. Remember, I can't get to them all, and it's super valuable for you to be able to articulate what you think is good and bad about them. Remember what do we call it? We call it the constructive sandwich. If I was doing this, something nice and easy would be, I love number one. I like the colors that you used, but I think the font, I think maybe trying a serifont for that one would really suit that brand and that kind of identity, but I'm digging the colors. Just something short and simple. It helps you articulate your own work later on when you've done it for other people. Do it to other people. I can't check. It's like a secret handshake deal that we've done. Share the three pages. One, two, three, and make sure you comment on other people's stuff. Now for this one here, share it on social media. I'd love to see what you're doing. Make sure you tag me in the posts and make sure you ask for feedback. Say, look, what does everybody think? If you're new and you're scared, just say, Look, this is my first ever logo project. I'd love some constructive feedback. What do you guys think? Make sure you tag me in these either in the groups or Instagram or Twitter, up to you. But yeah, looking forward to seeing what you're doing. Making logos is fun, but can be scary. Get out there and share it. A big ish one, but a fun one. All right. That is it. Enjoy the project, and I'll see you in the next video. 47. How to use Gradients in Canva: What have we done? Look at all of this. It's clearly a video about gradients, but there are some bad ones in here. I acknowledge. We go a bit crazy. We create all the gradients. The main part of this video is to show you that some things are really easy to make in terms of gradients, and some things are actually impossible, which is handy to know. Let's dig in and figure out how gradients work in Canva. They're a bit weird. Start off with. I just made a new page and put my logo on it for no good reason. Let's talk about gradients in their wedness. Click on the background, click on the color for background, and if I scroll to the bottom, nothing weird about this. Look, there's colors that are all ready to go. Some premade colors. Let's look at adjusting one. I've picked on this one. If you want to adjust them, you go all the way back to the top of this list, and you can click on New color it says, There you go. If I want to adjust it to be left to right, I can drag it. Uk. Can I drag it? Yuk. I've dragged it left to right. If I want it to be top to bottom, there's a button. Feel like that should toggle. It doesn't. You need to go, I want the purple at the top. There you go. I wanted an angle. Do you want to change your angle? You can't at the moment. You have to just live with that angle. You can see it's going from top left to top right. Want it in the middle? Easy. Want it a little bit off the side, not quite in the middle. You can't do that currently. There's this one here it's offset to the top left. You can add another color if you need a third color. Again, remember you can readjust them to get them how you want. Now, that seems normal, just a bit limited. Let's say that I've got this fox logo though, I'm like, Okay, I want this to be a gradient. I want this dark part of the top to have a gradient and click on that and I go Sc scroll down. I've only got basic colors. So things can have it, some things can't. It depends on how it was made. A lot of these graphics were created outside of Canva and brought in for us to use, which is awesome. They didn't come with gradients. So graphics do. Let's have a look at that. Let me see if I can find one. I've gone into elements. I'm going to go down to graphics and there is a section called gradient. There you go. You can just search for the word gradient or you can go to this gradient section. There's some pre made stuff with gradients. So it's a little bit limiting that way. But let's say that we just want, I don't know, a circle with one in. There you go. Pre made already got the gradients going. Oh, that's an interesting one. I'll show you that one in a sack. Other shapes, this one here. Actually, it's just a regular old shape. Let's have a look at more custom, look at this one. This one has gradients already applied. Some of them have some textures as well. This one's really cool and you can see at the top here, I can change the colors of it. Let's go through and just pick another color for it. It's adjustable, but I can't really create my own shapes and then apply it to it. Can't apply it to text at the moment. Text has a color, but no gradient. I bet you if this was your life's ambition to have gradient on it, I bet you you could do it through one of the apps. There's probably a gradient applier. I think I've used one before. Trouble with it, it removes the edibility of the text, but that's something you might. I wanted to show you is these guys. These guys have transparency. You can apply it to backgrounds, fine, not to some of the graphics. But if I grab the R tool for the rectangle tool, the rectangles, you can see, have the ability to apply them. If I go back to my regular old shapes, graphics, some of them. Shapes, I'm pretty sure we can do it to all of them. Let's go to this one, and let's go to and scroll down. So we can do it to these and remember to adjust them straight to the top, and then we can adjust the angle and pack the colors and switch the colors. All this is very gradient. Other things, actually resources. What I do when I'm looking for gradients is two places I go to one called grabient.com, a place to go and find interesting gradients. I know, I go back to this quite a lot. Let's say we do like this particular. I'm trying to find one. We like these three. You can see the if I click on that. I can see U, going to be, we go, it's going to here. Let's going to that first color. I'm going to paste that down here, that hexodeimal number, go back over here, copy, and you can see we can work our way through and get gradients from other places. You're wondering how I'm flicking back between these two, I use Command Tab on my Mac. I think you can do it with, is it Control tab on a PC to toggle between applications. There you go. I've got my colors there. That's how I pull up from Grabient. The other one I do is let me go grab one. I'm just scrolling through dribble and let's say you do this gradient here. I'm just going to take a screenshot, je ****** Okay, I'm going to go to Canva. I'm going to click drag that out. My mac lets me just drag it straight from this little side thing here. Not sure everyone can do that, but let's say I want this. Actually, grab shape, square speech bubble, and I can U down the bottom. Let's apply just any gradient just so that we can go to the top here and say, under gradients, I want, eyedropper to the bottom there. This other color is going to be from the top part. You can see I can borrow those colors. We can't do a lot because it's applied a lot more here and then the gradient is not linear like this one here. We are a little bit limited that way, but I want it to top to bottom. I'm going to switch these around and that's how I would get the gradient colors from this. The only trouble is I want be here soon. There'll be a button where I can actually say, all right, I want it to be just a gradient from the bottom to about here, and then I want it to be mostly that blue color. I want to squished to the bottom. We don't have that control at the moment, but I think it's important for you to know anyway, because it took me a while to work out that I couldn't do exactly what I want to do with gradients. There's enough, but not everything. There was one other thing actually is these guys. These guys are actually hollow in the middle. If I bring them to the front? Using Command on my Mac or controlling your PC and using the square brackets, bring them to the front, I can see through them. That is done by it's got two colors. One of the colors here is being set to transparent. This one here I could do it too. The blue at the top here, if I want to make that transparent, what I do is I glow in the colors. I find it not in here, I can do it in here. Click on this and use the eyedropper tool to get this blue, and there it is there, but I can grab this slider here and that's how transparent it is. Can you see it's going transparent? D to the bottom, but you get the idea. Now, the blue color at the top is totally opaque and the one at the bottom is when it gets right to the bottom here is completely transparent. They're getting these shapes here, same with this one. See through them. All right. That's gradients. I do like gradients. They're a little quirky inside of Canva, but that's okay. Now you know. All right. I will see you in the next video. 48. What is a brand kit: Alright. In this video, we are going to make a brand kit. What is a brand kit? It is just the collection of the things that you use in your brand, for your company over and over, like a logo, like colors, like fonts. We're going to put them all in a nice place. So working on our documents or templates that we've got inside of Canva, we can open up a brandkit and say, on the logo. And I want to shuffle through the colors, but the colors that I've picked, not just random ones. Same with fonts. We need fonts. It needs to be the right size, the right color, the right style. Done. It's all in the brand kit. They're super helpful, and I'm going to show you how to make. Go make one. Okay. First up this brand kits is a pro version. If you're on the free version and you do want to upgrade, remember there is a link at the top of the class projects, that'll get you to my affiliate link to sign up to the paid Pro account or the 30 day trial, up to you. Okay, first thing is a brand kit is a pro only feature. You can do very limited stuff inside of the free version with brand kits. If you don't have the pro version, you're not ready to upgrade, you've just got to basically it's not hard, you just end up copying and pasting this into a new document and actually not custom size, put a new Facebook post and you just paste it in. So it is fine. You can just say, I'm going to copy and paste this from document to document for the rest of eternity. That's totally fine. It becomes even trickier when you're working with multiple brands. You got to open up old documents and copy it and paste it. But also, if you're going to give this to a client to work from, it's going to be harder for them to work, whereas a brand kit is really nice and easy. All right. So first up, let's go and look where the brand kits are. So with the document open, it's over here. There's a brand option. You can see in here, it's got our brand kits. So logos, colors, fonts, a bunch of other stuff as well. But those are the main ones. Or you can go back to this home tab and go to brand. Okay? And here it'll show me the brand kits I have. You might have something existing. You might have a few already. Okay, so you can have multiple brands. What we're going to do is go into this first one and at the top here, change it to Fox hyphen brand kit. I just add hyphens. I don't know. Might have colors already in here. You can go through and just delete them and clear it out. You can share them with other people. You're both working from the same brand kit that can be really handy for a larger companies. Even just two of you. It doesn't really matter whether you're working from here and adding your colors and logos or within the document. Look, Logo color fonts and inside of the document, logo color font. It doesn't matter. Let's work inside of a document because we need to grab some of the things. What I've done is credited a new page and I made a version on my logo and I made it really big. It's better to start with a big version of it. You can scale it as you export it, but just make it nice and big. The other thing is to make sure it's on a page that has no background gradient or anything on it. Just there is a background, delete it, it's all on its own. Right. Next thing is that I'm going to go to Share. I'm going to go to download. I'm going to say, actually, I want to show you what This is kind of weird, right. So I'm in my brand. It's called Fox Brankit If yours hasn't updated, you can hit Command R or Control R on a PC just to kind of reset everything, kind of resets Canva and sometimes you need to do that kind of say, Hey, go and look at the new Bankit name, where is it there? So it's Fox Branket and you say, I'm going to add image. You're like, H, it's asking for a file. Why can't I just go and go, you can't at the moment. So what we need to do is export our logo as a format, we're going to do a PNG, and then import it afterwards. Okay, so let's go and export it. Go to Share, go to Download. It's defaulted to PNG. That's what I needed to do because I need it to be transparent. SVG is good but can have problems with transparent backgrounds and stuff in Canva. Let's use PNG. Let's go transparent background. And what pages? I'm going to turn them all off and just do the current page, which is my last page, page eight. Yours will be different. I'm going to export that one. What size do I need it to be? I can scale it up, scale it. I've made it an appropriate size, so I'm all good for that one. Let's go to download. I'm going to put it into a folder. I've created a Canva downloads folder and I'm going to call this one. It's not a concept anymore. This is my final. It's Canva logo, and this is going to be because at the end here, we'll make one that is horizontal as well because they could be handy. We'll do that at the end. Save this one. Now what we can do is say, find my brand Fox Brand kit, I'm going to go to add my brand logos. It's going to say, which is it? There it is there. Click open. There we go. We've got our logo as part of our brand kit. Why this is useful, I showed you the intro here, but it just means now I can say, let's go back to this one. Let's go to some other document. Go to my brand and just say, it's looking at the very old brand kit, close it down, open it up again. No resetting. Let's go that command R, control R on a PC. There it is there. Weird. Hasn't got my brand in it. Wow. This is weird. Alright, let's have a little look. It is definitely in there. Oh, Dan have forgot. You guys saw it. You're like, He hasn't hit Save. I'll leave that in the course cause that might happen to you. Okay. Don't forget to hit Save. Now I can go into these other ones and show you there go. Look, I can go in here. Again, reset. Remember that's Command on Mac Control RPC, there it is there, finally. I can just click and add a logo. Super easy, super quick, unless you forget it safe. All right, let's look at colors. Let's go to this one here. I'm going to use this document because I've got my colors in it. There they are there. Okay, so I'm going to go back from logos. I'm going to go add our colors. What colors? We're going to name s. We're going to have primary. It's really common to have primary colors and I'm in Europe, primary colors and secondary colors. It's up to you. I got two groups here. You might just have one. I've got my first color. I'm going to click on it. I drop a tool and I'm going to click on this first color, and I'm just going to work my way through and add them. All right, there's my brand colors. I can go through and say, All right, I want another color palette. You had a custom palette. I'm going to go and call this one my secondary. You don't have to have a secondary color, but I have it because I already mixed it up and I'm going to go through and do this in speed mode. And when I'm finished, I'm not going to forget to hit Save. Come on, Dan. Oh, look at us. It looks fancy having brand colors. The next one is going to be fonts. So we're going to go fonts, and we're going to pick our title font. I'm going to click on it, and what font is it going to be? I need to figure out, I got to remember what font I was using in here, I've grouped mine a double click to go inside of it. It's called Frank Ferder. Frankfurter normal. I think it was Frank Ferder Normal. So let's go in here. Let's go Frank, there it is Frankfurter normal recently used, and that's going to be my title font. There's no reason you have to use the logo from your font in your work, but it makes sense. This one here, my bottom one here is going to be H Vertica. What is it H Vertica now? There it is there. Ha Vtican now display. I'm going to go my subtitle is going to be hopefully recently used, and it's not there, so we're going to go, hell Vertica, you got it. HVtican now display. I'm not worried too much about the font sizes now because I'm going to have to adjust those quite a bit depending on the use case and I'm going to hit Save. Now we've got our logos, we've got our colors, and we've got the fonts that we want to reuse for a project. Let's go show you a simple use case of actually using these now and putting them into practice. Let's say that we go, let's make a new design. I'm going to pick a new presentation. Now we're at this point where templates actually become a lot more useful. I'm going to pick any, this one. Click on it. We've got our template, but it would be nice it was in our brand colors and brand fonts. I'm going to go back out of here. In design, we can go to our styles. Now we've got our colors. Look at that. Pulling from our color palette and it goes through and we can do that cool random thing as well, so it readjust them to get the level that we want. There's our secondary colors. Now, there's not a font equivalent where you can just smash away at that. It's a little bit different. You click on the font and you go up to the font here and you should see text styles. We've got our brand kit styles, and we've got our title and here, we've got our subtitle. Or if you want a new bit of text, you go to your type tool and you can just click on this. Look, if I click on Title, I've got a new bit of text, it's in the right font. It's not in the right size. It won't appropriate the right size. There's always a little bit of changing that way, but it's just a great way to keep everything on brand, especially when you're working with other people rather than going and figuring out and doing the old big slide through this, trying to figure out where that font is again. Super handy. The other one is a logo. Actually, let me just play around with the font. Select it all. Maybe the shortcut, hold down Command and Shift. Did I tell you the shortcut? Control and Shift on a PC, command and shift on a mac and use your greater than and less than buttons. I think I've already done that. Anyway, so you mess around with the fonts, mess around with the placement, and then you go, right, I need a logo. I'm going to go to my brand. I'm going to say, click at once. I'm going to shrink it down. What we'll do in the coming video is we'll do different layouts of the font. We're going to need a white version because that's quite dark against the background, but I was going to hit the Ciki for a circle. I'm to say going to be that brand color. Look at that fox brand color, off white color that I wanted to I'm going to use my command and square bracket or right click it and say a layer and bring to the front. I'm going to shring it down, put it in there. There we go. Se them both. I'm going to group them, and I'm going to move them down here. Lo, we branded something super quick and easy. Obviously, there are ways of just going a little bit longer and copying and pasting colors and just copying logos from other documents. It's not a deal breaker to not have the Pro account, but a brand kit can save you loads of time, especially when you're working with maybe getting this branding ready and then handing it off to a client. It's definitely more of a professional way of work. Alright, that is a brand kit, how to create it and then how to implement it and use it in other templates. Can you see now the power of templates. We looked at at the beginning. Gay templates are awesome, but you have to change quite a bit. Now that we understand a lot of, you know, cava, how it works, how to create stuff, make our own things, now templates become like, oh, I can just quickly go through and just use the template to get started and then change it to get it all on brand. And we kind of know what we're doing now. I hope you're feeling that. I'm feeling it. I feel it for you. I feel like we're getting there. Right. That's going to be the end of the video. I will see you in the next one. 49. Light Dark & Stacked Versions of Your Logo: Hello. Hey, in this video, we are going to take a logo and turn it from whatever version that we've got. I've created a stacked version of my logo, and I'm going to make the horizontal version. I'll also make just a logo mark on its own and one that is on light, one that can work on a dark background. This one can go on a dark background. This one doesn't work so well on a dark background. I've got two versions, one with a circle, one without a circle. I'm going to take you through my process of trying to get this to work. There's no new skills in this one, so if you're just here for the show me Canvas stuff, you can skip along. But if you are looking for a way of like, how do I get this brand to work for me and what are the expectations that maybe if I'm creating a brand for somebody else to use? Even if it is for yourself, what kind of things am I going to need? Stacked horizontal? Then we're going to add them to our brand library case that we've got them for easy access when we need them. So if it sounds interesting, let's jump in. All start off. I'm still in my logo document. I've made a new blank document. I'm going to copy him over to here. I'm going to shrink him down so he's a little bit more appropriately sized. I'll have my stacked version that is on white. Then I'm going to have and an on dark version. You might just call them primary and secondary. It's up to you. I'm going to grab for the rectangle tool and I'm going to put in a chunk of this here just so I can see it against a dark background. Don't like that color. I'm going to go for black. I'm going to I'm going to copy and paste them across. We're going to use our trick. I'm going to hold down the option counter mac counter PC, drag them across. Can't really see them. Actually, I can't see it because it's a bit behind, so I'm going to shuffle them to the back. Command and hit the first square bracket. Or you can right click, remember, and line, go to layer and send it to the back. Cool. This one here, it's up to you. Do you want to go full white or do you want off white color? I'm zooming in. Command plus, Control plus on a PC. This one here, I'm probably just going to go for a full on white. It is there FFF. Same with this one, this one here, I'm probably going to keep the red, but this darker color down the bottom. Wo what are we going to do? All right, what I might do is go, you are going to be this color here, and then this color is going to be what is it? Let's go to my brand colors. Do I go for the lighter version? That version. Oh I know what I'm going to do. I do like that. And for this, I'm going to go to my colors. I'm going to go to my brand color there, and I'm going to use that off white for both of these. There you go. That's what I'm going to do. You might go full white. It depends on your logo, right? Your logo might might just like to be all white. I'll show you one of my logos. So you might bring your laptop company. Okay? You can see, I've got this long version here that is completely white. That's what we use when it's on dark background. We don't use any color, and that's what it looks like when it's on a white color. I've got another version that is stacked. There's the white version, and then there's the colored version. So often you need a minimum of those three. The stack version and let's do now, Zoom out a little bit. Let's do a long version. I'm just going to copy all of these. I'm not going to go through that shortcut anymore because you know how to copy and paste. I'm going to say what I might do is I might just do one of them. I'm going to do Zoom in. I have to shrink this down just so it fits in. I have to scale it up again afterwards. I'm going to say Fox. This is where it's really tricky because does mine fit like that? Does that look okay? I don't know. What size should it be? There's a lot of back, playing with it. It's generally always on the left. Should it be flipped over? Should it be like this? No. If you do find one that's quite tricky to get into any sort of spot, a little hack you can do is you can trap it. I can go see for my circle and I can say you, my friend, are going to be. Maybe it could have a stroke around the outside. I might give it a stroke with no fill. Not what I want to do, I think, but I could say, All right, I'm going to trap him inside of a circle like this, send it to the back. You might side that, that's what it's going to work for this guy. He needs to be trapped inside of a circle first. I select both of them, group them, and that might help you out. I'm going to ungroup them because probably what I might do is go to this one and say, A, copy you, make that. I'm just now actually, before I start getting into just messing around trying to figure it out, there's no new skills here. You can skip along, but it is not easy often. You might have a big long name along the top here. One of the things you can do is that if it's uppercase, it's genly easier to construct it. This might have to be on two lines to get it to fit. You saw the bring your laptop logo. This one here is just super long, a bit awkward. We tried stacking it in little bits. I just doesn't work, so it makes it tricky. What I'm going to do is you can hang around. I'm going to see if I can get this work and happy with this. Now, I like to tap using my keyboard, going tap, tap, tap. I might need to make that font just a tiny bit smaller or is it 3.8, 3.7, squeeze it in, use the arrow keys again just to get it and tap it along. It's looking good. What I might do is actually go to my brand colors and say, Oh, I'm doing the stroke, are? I want to go for the fill color, go my brand colors, this one, and then I'm going to grab that version of it, the dark version because I made it brighter, remember, against the darker background, I might say, actually, you are going to be the darker version of it. What is Dan doing? Is that dark enough? Yeah, get rid of that one. There we go. Does that fit in there a bit nicer? It could be in a square. Doesn't have to be in a circle. And now I'm trying to line them up. And now, what am I going to do? I'm going to go, it's been way too long going. Alright, should that be? I go to group these two now, kind of happy with the size? Is this going to be smaller? How is he making it smaller from both sides? You hold down the option key on a Mac? Oh can of PC when you're scaling, and it'll scale to the center? Is it very small? Is it like here, just with the F? Oh, I don't know. There's no actual official rule. What you'll find as you'll do one, you'll think, it looks okay. Then you come back to the next day and go, Oh, what was I doing? Nothing lines up, it's tricky. Don't be afraid to go and make a new version of it if you're finding it's giving you problems. Does it need to be really big like that? All right, which one do you guys like? Top, middle, bottom? Let me know the comments? I think this one's going to work for us. Okay? This one I'm going to do for now. I'm not going to get rid of these because I'm a hoarder. I like to keep them around. I'm going to group it. I'm going to group these guys just to make them a bit more manageable. This one here, I'm going to delete, and I'm going to go Yup should do. I'm going to say good thing about it is I can probably keep using that or maybe not. Let's get this in order. I'm going to go, you can see how document colors are getting quite long. Yours might be simpler. But I've just got so many on all the different pages that it's getting a bit unwieldy. This one here I'm probably actually going to go and get rid of you. Actually I want you because I want it to be the right size. I'm going to grab that version of it. It's funny I'm using the light version on the dark version because it is inside of a circle. I have to move backwards a little bit, Command or Control square bracket, then this one's going to be something from my brand kit colors. You see how cool the brand kits are now? Do I like this one? I think I like that one. I don't want the stroke on the outside and I didn't realize I had a stroke on the outside of this one. I'm going to get rid of that as well. All right, so there's going to be six things I need. So you guys probably just do it, Dan. Don't be a hoarder. Okay? So I'm going to have these versions, but I'm also going to have the logo on its own. I'm going to say copy and paste this. Group it. I grab you and you group it, copy it, paste it, and then I'm probably going to go. I want you as well, copy and paste it. You copy and paste it, select them both, move a whole new shift to click two things at a time, scale them down. I want all of these things, I think, added to my brand kit. I'm going to export them all as images. There's a couple little tricks to this. Let me show you Let's make a new page. What I want to do is I want these two to be the same size. So if I go over here and copy and paste it and scale it up onto this page to export it, I need that one to be the same size. You can get these guys nice and close, select all of them, deselect the background color by holding shift and clicking on it. I just need these guys. I copy them, go over here, paste them, and I make them roughly the same size, you guys. Going to cut this guy, so I'm going to use my Command X to cut or Control X on a PC to cut. Make sure he's in the middle and then go to share, download PNG, like we've done before, transparent background. Which page current page, which is my page ten, yours will be different. Let's download it and let's go and do some interesting naming. What am I going to call this? I've already half created this one, I did earlier on. I called it stacked and this one's going to be my on white. It goes on to white backgrounds. It's probably I always call it on white, but on light is probably better. It goes on light backgrounds. Some will call it just the light logo. I don't know why. I like to call it Olight. It means I can delete this guy. Actually, it's just the one on new page. Let's paste him, get him into his middle part. Areas, same place as the one that's on light. This is the on dark. You're like, doesn't have a dark background. We needed to be transparent, so we're not going to put the background color in. Now we're going to go share and we're going to go download and we're going to leave it all the same except I want it to be the current page, done, return, and this one's going to be called on dark. I'm going to click on this just to steal the naming, this one's going to be on dark. Like we did before, I'm going to go to my brand. I'm going to go to logos, let's edit it. Let's upload them. Let's find my delete that one there, delete that one there. I'm going to say just these two so far. There they are ready to go. It means when I have a dark background like this one, I can say, right, brand. Remember, it's not appearing there? Who remembers how to rejig it? Command R, you got it. Control R on a PC. We didn't say. I pretend I'm going to do that on purpose because you guys will forget, it was a looning experience. I totally forgot. Now I can hit Command art still not in there, there they are. I could say, bam, ready to go on a nice dark background. We've got our on dark version of the logo. Look at us. Now what I'm going to do is do the same thing is I'm going to go to a new page and I'm going to say YouTube and do the exact same thing. I'm going to make them the right size, make sure they're right in the middle of the page and do it for all of these. Now, was this helpful? I hope there's no new skills, but it is a bit tricky if you are doing somebody's logo or your own logo to try and find different use cases of it, and it by itself is what we know as the logo mark. We haven't really got a word mark because we haven't really customized that. It's really hard to do inside of Canva. We've got a font, but together, we know that they're called combination marks. They're all lumped into that they're just logos and mix it with colors and your brand voice and the vision for the company. Then you're starting to get a brand together. Is the big fluffy one. Logo is the thing you make and within that there's different kinds of logos, and we're learning some of the language for that like combination mark. All right, I'm going to stop talking. I hope there was something useful in there. Yeah. That was fun. I don't know. I think we're making something cool. Hope you enjoyed. Hope you found some tips in there for you. That's it. I'll see you in the next video. 50. Class Project 13 - Branding: Right. It is class project time, it is branding time. We're going to create some of our branding elements. The main one is I want a couple of versions of your logo, like we did in the last video there. There's three main ones, dark and white, horizontal version, a stacked version on white on dark, the same for horizontal, and then the same for your logo mark or your symbol, your icon. There's not a hard and fast rule for that name. I've done two. You don't have to. You can just do. Main one and then take a screenshot and share it. The people that are on the Pro account. I want you to then add it to your brand kit and take a screenshot of that. You'll see my example there. That's for the pro users only. If you're on the free version, just make the different logo layouts and share it. Share it both in the class projects and share it online and make sure you tag me in socials. I do love to see what everyone creates with their unique Alright, so go fourth. See if you can work out logo layout if your symbol is just really tricky to get it to layout. Like, it stacks really good, but it doesn't work really good horizontally. Sometimes it's just really hard and it's like, Oh, man. And that's really important to learn because sometimes you design a logo, you might like it, and you're like, This is going to be horrendous to use across different materials and different projects. So A if it doesn't work out, that's good. It's good to learn the things that are tricky to do. I didn't really practice mine beforehand. I was going with the flow for this course, and I feel like mine's come out right. I circlized mine, trapped it, like I said earlier, in a circle to make it a little bit more usable. Just a little tip for you there. You might give that a go. Anyway, have fun making all the different versions of your logo. Is this exciting? I don't know. I find it exciting. You're like, no more logos. Don't worry. We're getting to the end of that part of the course, but go do your not homework and enjoy it. I'll see you in the next video. Bye. 51. Working with a word style doc in Canva: Hello. Hey, in this document, we're going to look at the difference between a document and a document. Some documents have a lot of this Microsoft Word, Google Docs style formatting and tools. While some documents, even though we created a document, this is US letter, it has more of the design side of Canva, like the Instagram post we've created already. They're both documents, but one has a lot more of the tools used for text heavy content might be an essay. We're going to be doing a proposal for some paid marketing for our company, but it can be anything that you'd normally use maybe Microsoft Word for or Google Docs. Can do it too. All right. Let's jump in. All right to start with, I've got everything closed. I'm at my home tab here, this home icon on the top, and I'm going to create two documents. Let's go to credit design, and let's go to Doc. The thing you're looking for, the word is Autosize. That's going to give you all the Microsoft Word, Google Docs formatting, if we create something that seems very similar, so I'm going to create this it's just a blank document. If I go to another one and I say, right, I'm going to credit design, but I'm looking for, let's say, a document, but I want it to be US letter or there we go. USetterO maybe a four. Let's click on this one here. What's going to happen is this one here, you can see the icon at the top here. This is the icon for I meant that it just keep going on and on and have this type of formatting along the top. Remember that Microsoft Word style formatting. Was this a four or US letter document is basically like our Instagram post has all the same features as that. It's more of you construct it from scratch in a really custom way. Was this has some rules to it. It has fixed margins, it has a type box ready to go hover over in this gap over here, you can do this plus button and it has lots of other things like headings, tables, dividers, page breaks, all the normal word processing things. We can do tables and columns. We're going to do all of that in the coming up videos. But I just wanted to call out that you might end up in a document that you think is a document, but really it's more like a design page. We're looking for this auto size document. You can't convert it later on. You just need to start a new document and copy and paste anything you might have got started with. What we're going to do is just give it a title. Okay, Fox proposal, paid marketing. There you go. Nice simple video, but we need to start off correctly, looking for auto size. That's it. I'll see you in the next video. 52. Font Combinations & Pairing in Canva: Hello. Hey, in this video, we're going to look at something called font pairing or font combinations. Same thing. It's just a way of finding a font and finding another font that pairs with it, combinations with it very well. It's really good if you're new to design, you're going to get things that work nicely together. I'm really experienced and I still go through and look for font pairing when I'm working on a new project. I'll give you some tips, some tricks. There's no hard and fast rules. I'll give you some places to go look and find them. We're going to choose a heading, subheading, and body copy. I'll give you some tips on how to pick them, how to not cause future headaches for yourself. Let's dive in. Font pairing or font combinations. All right. To get started, let's type in the word heating. Let's call this one heading one. Select it all, make sure it's got heading one applied to it. Whatever the default is. Yours will be different from mine, and then I'm going to put it in subheading and I'm going to select it all and go to heading to go to this H two. Heading one, heading two, hitting slash subheading. It's really typical for designs, you probably bumped into that before. Now, when we're picking fonts, you could use your heading, could be the same font that you've used for your logo. I could go into here, I could go from font to textiles and then hopefully in your brand kit, if you're using the pro version, you should see whichever one we make for our brand kit. What I'm going to do is not use it for my heading. I'm just going to leave that special for my brand. Why? Because it's quite distinctive and this one, the font that I picked ends up only having upper case, which is a bit of a pain. I'm going to prick a different heading font and a different subheading font. All right. Now we can go to fonts and just pick fonts from this list. That's totally fine. Okay, I've decided I'm going to use a San sera font and I was looking through, and I really like this one called Playfair. Play fair. I'm going to use Playfair Display. I'm going to I like the headings and semi bold. Now the problem is I need a subheading that matches it. That's actually right, Canvas Sands. But a really nice trick is once you've got a font that you do like, whether it's the subheading or the heading or you're using the one from your brand, it doesn't matter. Is the word Playfair display. I can do that. Go to Google and type in font pairing. That's the term that we want. Okay? Either font pairing or font combination. Font pairing is probably more common and I've typed in fair play display and I did an image search, and I'm just looking through I'm going, A there's Playfair, and I'm not even going into them, I'm just looking to see what fonts are going with it. I can see tiny there. It says Moserat's being used with it. This one here to click into but this one here? Nunam down here, SourandsP. It's just a really helpful way of going. All, I've got a font. I need some support of what fonts going to go with it. You can just borrow from other designers. Canva has a really good one. If you type in Canva font pairing, they call them font combinations. They've got a pretty cool document here of giving you some examples. Even if you don't have one to start with, you might be like, Oh, I do like how those work together. What are these two? Where is it at the top? Oh, no, it's these two case they've used League Spun and Libra Baskerville. That's what it is. You're like, I like to see those in action. You might decide to use those fonts. Site I like is fonts in use. You can type in basically any font in here and it'll go through and find you use cases of it because sometimes you're like, do I like the font? You see it on other people's stuff, you like, that's it. It's awesome. Funny, you see my Frankfurter one. I didn't realize how ancient the font was. Now that I see it, I'm like, Oh, I had that game, all of these things. It was big in the 80s. But I'm not going to use it. I went and clicked on a few of the links that appeared in Google. You can see I've never been to this site in my life here, but I just hadn't had to look through and tried to find playfair mixed with a few different fonts, try to work out what they were. I just be a handy trick if you are new to design, and even me, I've been designing forever, and I'll still go off and have a look to see if I can find a font. You can find a cool combination. I went through and picked sauce sands for mine. There's another reason I like sauce sands it's because it looked cool, and it's pretty simple looking. This is quite extreme Playfair, and this is quite a simple one. We've got this serif version with a sand seraph balance. I liked it. The other thing you can do is subheading at 18 is going to be my supe heading. I can use the same font and change the weight for my body copy, so I don't have to go pick a third font. I could use Playfair because Playfair, I think has a bold and let's go bold. Playfair. Okay, it has a bowl. Oh, it has lots of different sizes. I do like that. Okay, what I'm going to do is for my body copy. I'm going to still pick sauce sands, font, sauce Sands Pro, but I'm going to use the regular version. Now, there is no actual rules for fonts, but I'm just I guess trying to give you some I don't know, structure to work from. It's really common to have the body copy the same as one of the two fonts that you've used for either the heading or the title and just play around with the weight and the size. Most important, I am big and bold. Second most important on the page. Subheading, I am smaller, but I'm also bold. Body copy is a lightweight font, we've gone for regular because it's less important than subheadings. Size and weight can help. It's called the hierarchy of fonts. What's the most important to the reader? Can they skim and just figure out what the documents about by skimming the heading and get a bit more detail from the subheadings, then get into the details with the body copy. The other thing to do with your body copy is just to run your finger along all the scientific things on your keyboard just to make sure it's got it all. So fonts, like my Frankfurter doesn't even have lowercase. They're not a very good body copy, but also some of them won't have things like amphisans and percentages and dollar signs because they might be small free ones. Just double check you got some flexibility in the fonts. That's why a lot of people end up using saucands, canvas sands, what is it Roboto, Calibri, Inter? I'm trying to think off the top of my head, what are the really common ones. But those are the main ones. The main ones I can think about right now anyway. All right. I hope that was helpful rules. Let's go and turn them into character styles in the next video. 53. How to Change Text Styles in Canva: Hello. Hey, we're going to look at something called text styles inside of Canva. Basically, they are pre made styles, heading, subheading, body copy, so that you can wrestle a nice big document, okay and get it to be all similar fonts. Let's do this. Okay? I'll go through the whole document and change them all through the document. Okay? Body copy headings so that they all become this new font. I'll show you how to do with the free version first, and then I'll show you some of the benefits of the pro version using your branding kits. And if you know textiles from some of the other programs like Word or any of the adobe programs, guess what? Works nothing like that. So let's jump in and show you how it works in Canva. Right, so textles. Let's highlight this first bit along the top here. I renamed it sample to make it clearer. Because what happens is if I go into and I pick my font and I am in fonts, I'm going to go to Text Styles and you'll be like, Oh, look, I've already got some document styles for me. There's two parts. There's document styles, this document, and then there's the fonts that have come from our brand kit. Look at that at the end of the video. A, basically we get to be it it's a bit easier. We're using brand kit fonts, consistency across documents, but there's ways we can make the document styles work for us as well. We've just got to change every time we open a new document, pick the right fonts. It's not a huge deal, but knowing how document styles work is weird. Well, it took me a little while anyway. They're very intuitive. I didn't realize how intuitive they were because I didn't create any of these styles. They're just here. You're like, how do we get those? It just magically knows. If I type in something, let's go here, something here, and I pick font going back to my fonts. I'm going to pick something quite visually different. If I go back to my textyle now, it doesn't update very well. Sometimes you hit Command R, Control R on a PC or close down Canva reopen it. Now I can go in here and I can see there's a C all that wasn't there before. Now, look, there's two body textiles. I didn't make any of them. That's what got me I was like, Where are these coming from? It's Canva. Canva goes, Alright, it's 12 point, which is a body copy size. I'm going to make a style for you called body copy. You're going to have two of them now. If you make something in the subheading size, Okay, so as long as it's smaller than the title, if it gets bigger than the title, it'll assume it's a title or a heading. But if I make something smaller than this heading size, the, again, let's pick a font, Frankfurter, it's going to guess under tech styles. I can come back out of styles, go to C or look, we've got two subheading fonts. We are. That took me a while to get my head around. But now, you know, it makes them on your behalf. The trick now is being able to update other ones so make it change at the moment, I got two of them, two different subheadings. I really want to do is just go, All right, sample, you go to this one and click in there and just change the font and they all go and change. It doesn't work like that at the moment. I feel like that's got to be the future. Come on, Cava. For the moment, though, let's do a real world change. I'm going to start from a template. I'm going to go to plus, I'm going to go to a doc, might have to type in doc Remember, you're looking for the auto size one where you can go back to your home page. I'm going to create a blank doc going to go my templates. I'm going to go to Doc templates. I'm going to scroll down and find one. We can all use this one here. Sco. Just looking for one that has a really clear font structure in there. I'm going to click on this one. Oh, that one looks good. Doesn't really matter which one it is. I'm just looking at one that has a really strong font. Let's have a look. No our document. We're going to go into this looks like a heading, Let's click on it. Let's see what from font to textiles. Canva thinks it's a heading. Perfect. I want to change my heading. I want to go poof. Here. But I can't. What I'm going to do is I'm going to put in new fancy heading style. I'm going to select it all, I'm going to pick something very. Click on there, back to font. I'm going to pick something completely different. And we're going to see what Canva has called it. Let's have a look. Back to textiles, I'm going to go to CO. Look, I've got two heading styles now and says, Hey, look, it was big and was the same size as the other things. It was probably also a heading. What I can do is now all right thing that already exists as a heading that's all the way through the document. Can you see it there? I can say you are now this and see down the bottom here, it says, Oh, would you like to change all of these? Yes, please. Now through the document, it's gone and change it. That's how you can wrangle in either one of your projects or one of the templates to change everything in the document. You can do it for the body copy here, any subheadings. You just got to get a sense for what Canva has decided to call them and make sure you click on the CO to see. There's three different body copies. It's trying to keep it simple, saying just one, but we know that there's a few different ones. There's a italicized body copy, there's a non italicized version. If I want to change all the italicized ones to be something else, let's pick a font. I don't like it, but I've done it because it's different, I'm going to go to see what just make sure it's ended up in here. There it is there. It's become a body copy font. I'm going to say you grab you. I'm going to say under CO and now going to be this new one and it's going to say, Would you like to change more? And it has. Look, here we go. Wrestling, getting it to do what we want. It gets a little easier when you are dealing with brand fonts. You don't have to pick them every time. Can go a couple of ways. We can go into here and say you. Let's go from font to textiles. Let's look at our fonts up here. I've only got a couple and I can edit them here or the exact same thing, but I can go and go to my home tab, go to brand, find the brand kit that you're working from. Where's my brand kit fox. Scroll down, and you end up at the same place. It doesn't really matter. I'm going to go the hittings that I've decided is I'm using clay fear. Size wise, go through and pick one of these that are predefined. You can pick 31. There's no problem with that, but often these are good breaks in terms of the sizings they've used. 36 is a nice clear difference between 32 if you want it to be, say, heading and subheading. I'm going to use that and I'm going to use bold, not sure. This is going to be my heading. Perfect, and I'm going to do a subheading as well. I'm using sour sands. Now for sources, I'm using the bold, 24 is perfect and I'm going to change my body copy. To source sands, but it's going to be make sure it's the regular. Now when it comes to body copy sizings, it's somewhere in between here 12 and 16. 16 generally works better for things that are going to happen on a display, web stuff, Instagram stuff, anything that's going to be printed out generally is a better size at 12. Nice and legible, looks appropriate for a printed document. For some reason, 16 just feels better when it's on a display. Okay, and let's go do the same thing. Let's create a new document. Let's create a doc, pick a template. I'm going to apply this one here and I'm going to find something that's in there that's probably reused throughout the document. I'm going to go to my font. I'm going to go from font to textiles and I got all these handy ones. I'm going to say you are now my hitting. Apply them all and it should be changed throughout the document. The thing that got me that was a bit strange is that I thought you would change, let's say, what's this? That's probably a body copy that you create another one and apply it to an existing style in a document and then go and update and replace it. It's a little bit. I can see the benefit of why it's good to get started, but then Controller Dan wants to go through and just be quite literal and specific. Aren't. The other thing to be careful of is that there are more in here. You can see there's quite a few in the document styles, but you can only see a couple of them here. It's trying to be very helpful. One last time I want to change this to be bold. What I'm going to do is I'm going to copy it. I'm going to just paste it somewhere, and I'm going to say, you're going to be bold. Now, hopefully there'll be another body copy style. Let's go in. Let's or where is it there it is there. I'm going to say you now are this one. Would you like to change more? Yes. Look at us. We're doing it. Mastering the textiles inside of Canva. They are a little bit strange, but now we know we can join in the strangeness. All my friend, that is textiles inside of Canva. Document styles for the document. And for those who have the pro version of Canva, you can go a little bit further and have a bit more. Brand consistency using BranchidFonts. All right. That is it. I'll see you in the next video. 54. How to Style Tables in Canva: It's now time for the most exciting part of the course. You've been waiting for it. It is how to make a table and Canva. Hi, Mark. We need to know mainly around the styling because it is a little bit strange. Okay? We'll look at that. We'll just quickly go over the basics, Edding, removing, merging, the way to select things. It's a little bit unique for Canva, but if you know tables, is going to be easy, where it gets a little bit more nuanced is kind of how to do the styling. Yes, we make a brown on brown table. It's with the tutorial went anyway. And right at the dang round, I'll show you how I use Magic write to kind of use AI to generate a bit of placeholder text. Here you go. It is Tables time. But Dan tries to make it exciting by talking enthusiastically. Well, let's do it. All right. Adding a table is easy. I put a return in. We're looking for this little plus button here. If this doesn't appear, it wasn't appearing for me for a little while because this help thing was open from Canvas. They were like, Hey, tell us how we're going, and I couldn't get the plus thing to work. Took me a while. I ended up having to default too. You can see it there and the shortcut is the Ford slash. That's the quick action. The quick action here just means I can type in whatever I want. So I type in table and enter it that way or hit the little plus button, if we're going to decide on what kind of tables we need. I'm going to have two rows across and I'm going to have four down for my table. Now, adjusting them is easy, just drag them. We won't go through all the details of how to work with tables, skim over the basics. If we need another column, hit the little plus but another top. I'm going to hit Undo. The other way to do it is to click in the cell and then you get these little dots. Either the ones that represent the columns and one that represents the rows. The top of the columns here gives you a lot of that detail, but listed out. You'll be like, I want to add a column or you can use the little shortcut, undo. The other things hiding in there are things like merge. If I want to merge all this big group here or if I want to merge I select this. This thing here at the end, is a little three dots. It's really great way of selecting that entire row. I merge cells that way. Undo removing cells is the same. You can delete a whole column in there. You can once you've got content, I go to type in If you have got columns that need to be moved around, you select the whole thing and you can move it up or down a row, or you can just drag this thing afterwards. You click on it and pops out, you can pop it back in and then just drag these things around to move to different parts of your table. Another helpful thing if you have got anything selected, you'll see this other option here. Obviously, there's the easy delete, but you can see in the more, basically, you get the same list as you did over here. Same features, just different ways of accessing it. To select the whole project, I find it's easy to grab the move option. You can't really move it. You can. You can obviously drag the table around using the move. But it's in the flow of document, more like a word document, so you can't move it down a couple of pixels. You've got to be in line with the text. But I find grabbing that move one is a great way either this way or this way to grab the whole table because what I want to do is look at some of the styling. Let's stop with the boring table stuff. Let's start with the styling. Overall, now that I've got everything selected, you can go up the top here and say, All right, I'm going to do some styling. You got to be quite purposeful. I'll demo and it makes sense. If I say all of the squares, even the ones in between, are this other color, they'll all change. Now if I'm like, actually, I want to change maybe just the top and the bottom of this. I just want top and bottom, but I don't want the sides. I can say, Ro, you are up here going to be just top and bottom and sides just because there's no exact top and bottom one. I want you to be this other color. I'm going to pick a real crazy color so we can see it. I also want it to be really thick. What you notice is, it's done it, but it left the guy in between. So now if I want to get rid of that, I select the whole thing and I say, right lines in between, going vertical, horizontal, vertical. Go then. As I want you down to a border weight of none, and now that'll go. There's still two cells there. You can still see there's two cells. I can have two things. Do you get the idea? You do. It's a one way street. You don't change the whole thing. You don't say, right, I want them all just to have the tops, you do the tops, and then you remove the bits you don't want. So what I want is what you saw at the beginning. I'm going to kind of get it back to some sort of normalness I could undo, but I'm going to show you let's go to be, all are going to be this gray color, and they're all going to be. When it's got these dotted lines in here, it's like, I've got a couple of things selected, so I'm not sure what you mean. So you just have to type it in. So now we're kind of back to square. Lines everywhere are two. Before I starle this column, let's look at the whole thing again and we've been doing the border. Have a look at spacing. We'll give you table spacing and cell spacing. It depends on what you need. Generally you just need cell spacing. Table spacing will obviously separate the cells and have a gap in between them. It's not what I want. In this case, I want to maybe open up the spacing. At the moment, you might be able to figure it out, but I can't figure out how to do it individually for cells. It's quite a global one. Now I want to style this column separate from this one. What I'm going to do is I'm going to select the whole column and then I'm going to go into my borders. This is where you can get a little bit lost you're like, I want the tops, the middles, and the bottoms to be a dark brown and I don't want these horizontal, vertical. Come on down. Vertical lines to be anything. I want them to be you do? You can either make them all blank and then add the tops and bottoms, tops, bottoms and middles, or you can do it the other way around, add the tops, bottoms, and middles and remove the outsides afterwards because you can slick more than one. Watch this. Let's do it one way, Dan. Show them one way. I want to go the top. If I just do the top, I could do the bottom afterwards, but you could do the tops and the bottoms at the same time. Can you see the highlighted? I can say the middles as well, because I want the middles to all be a brown color and I'd like them all to be a heavier weight and going to five. Cool. Now I've got these sides. I forgot the sides. It's a two step process. I want to clear these off now to select all that whole column. To go into here and I'm going to say, I want the outsides to be a weight of zero. And there we go. What I also want is with it all selected. I would like to have a fill color, where the moment it is this whole row is filled with no fill color. I'm going to pick one of my primary colors. Let's go in and change all of the text. I'm going to select the whole thing. This whole column to say, instead of doing it individually, I can see, I'm going to see you're all bold and you're all going to be the color of one of my primary colors and bold, just so you know a shortcut is Command B. Okay, can you see Command B? Auto Mac, Control B on a PC and command onto MAC control on a PC, I isalxs. Underline is Command or Control U. There's a few. If you're using these strike through, or what is it? I can't remember what strike through is. I don't use that enough, but there are shortcuts for a lot of the kind of really common, uh, font changes like bold underline and italics. Doing over here, I'm going to click this whole column and I'm just going to remove it all. I'm going to say, all of the bits are going to be a weight of zero, and I'm just going to have them listed on this right hand side here. Is this a great table design? It's one that shows you all the features. Let's just call it that. It's good enough. One of the last things I want to show you is seeing here, if you want to slick the cell you're in, you can get it. It's not super hard, but a real common way across multiple programs is curse is flashing in here, and you hit the escape key on your keyboard, it will select the entire cell you're in. That works in every program that uses tables. Gates are really common to hit escape on your keyboard, top left of your keyboard. This one here is not too hard to grab. You can generally just grab the cell and work on its own. Why? For no good reason to make it an uglier table. There you go. Thing I wanted to show you was in this cell here, we want some draft copy. I'm not a very good at writing. I find yeah, I'm not a wordsmith. Magic write. We've bumped into it earlier on. Let's have a little look at it. It's AI writing. It might not be in this prominent position by now, but you're looking for Magic write, and this is what I told her to do. I said, give me a paragraph about the objectives we should hit for Black Friday, paid ad campaign for a camping store, and head Generate. And I got something at least it's a good first draft. It's a way for me to get started. You might be using other AI tools for this. Magic is Canvas version of it. What I find it mostly good for is falling in bulk copy just to fill a copy, knowing that we'll go back and spend a bit more time on this. As such, we're going to go through and just make it how long we want it to be. There you go. Yes, we're probably going to need some lines in between, Dan, because that's not good. You bought a weight of one, and I'm going to pick one of the light colors. There we go. Little bit of separation. Alright, that's it. That is boring old tables, but are useful in canva, and we style them, you too can make one that is brown on brown. You get the idea, though, hopefully. Let's make something prettier in the next video, I promise. See you then. 55. Design Header Banners in Canva Docs: In this video, we're going to look at these things here. They're called design or I call them hitter banners. They're cool because you can insert them into this kind of flowing dock. This little mini world where you get to go back and kind of design all the things that use all the design tools that you know from, say, earlier in the course and put things, logos and fonts and brand colors all to work in this little micro world, and then throw them into a document, make them reusable. It's the best of both worlds. Documents stuff along documents with styles and all sorts of word processing stuff. But also, we can throw in some good design bits. Through this thing called design, AKA hitter banner. Let's temp Alright, so we're going to replace it up the top here, so we're just going to delete that we're looking for the plus again, or maybe you can use the quick actions, which is the Ford slash key and type in design. And either way it leads to this. You're like, What is this? This is like a mini Canva inside a Canva. Can you kind of see appear on its own. It's like a little design that we can embed inside of a doc. So we kind of get a best of both worlds. We get that kind of interface where we're working with Instagram earlier where we have all this kind of extra stuff over here. We're not confined by, you know, some of the limitations where we've got things like, you know, it has to be in the flow of texts. Text can be anywhere. The other cool thing is that we can use templates. Okay, so I can say this fine one. This one, we like this one here, awesome. And for the people who have got the Pro account, you can go back and say, Look, I've got styles, and I've got my own styles. My Bankit styles, boom. I got brand fonts, boom. Look at us. I do like this part of the course where we start using stuff and then clicking a few buttons and being awesome. This is the real power of Canva when you start having a few resources around. Even if you don't have brand kits, knowing how things work, it's not hard to change the colors and fonts, but it is handy. All right, so we've got this in here. I'm going to change that to that. We can just I'm going to adjust this to suit our needs now. Going to ungroup it. I'm going to grab this part and delete it. We know how to ungroup stuff. That's cool, but I don't know what's there for. This thing here, this would be cool to be the logo. Let's ungroup that. Let's grab this. There's a little hole there on the image. You're going to delete that and I'm going to say, I've got elements. Actually, I've got brands and I've got a logo that's in a circle, which one? No one? No one. Undo that one. I want this one. Good. I'm going to fit that in there. Oh, I actually replaces my image. That's not what I want. So sometimes that'll happen, and what I tend to do is try and be deliberate and kind of get it next to the image, but not over it. Okay? And then I use my rakes. By dragging it, it kind of tries to be helpful. So go to the right size, and now I'm using my rake and if you hold shift, and use your down arrow, left arrow, right arrow, you select it first, and then just use your arrow keys to move it around. Holding Shift makes it jump a little bit. Now it's not trying to do stuff and connect up. I'm just adjusting the size. That looks cool. Let's pick one of our images. So replacing images, we did ages ago. I'm going to go to my uploads. I'm going to scroll down, be messing with all sorts of stuff and we can do a search. I'm going to go down and find one of the AI things that I was working on. There we young, and to grab that's cool. Just dump it on the page or drag it out, and then you're just trying to drag it to do what we did with that logo and just switch that. Same thing with the colors. We can manually go in and change them because there's a gradient already built in. What I can do, though, is go back to here, go to design, go to styles. And even if it's not my own brand colors, you could go through combinations, color palettes. But I've got my primary colors, and I'm just going to smash away this to get something that I like. Basically where I started. This, I want to use my off white, so I'm going to go up to here and go to my brand colors. I think they're already my brand color. Excellent. Font size, select it all. I'm going to hold my command and shift key down. I'm looking at my period and comma or greater than or less than. On a PC, it's control shift and use the greater than or less than or on my keyboarts down with my full stop period comic keys, those two. That's looking good. That is going to be what I'm going to do. That's it, save basically just throws it in like a little document. I can't adjust the text here. I can't say, let's get in there. You've got to double click it to open it and then go in and do it. I realized my font is not big enough because it's bigger here, but it's getting shrunk down on my page. I'm going to hold down those keys again and and there's going to be a lot of towing and frowing to kind of go. Alright, is that better, save back in. That's better. The other thing is that it's quite determined by the margins, okay? You can write click and say expand it to full width to kind of go across. Now, they're kind of referred to as designs. I call them header banners. You'll note from the title of this. There's not a really specific name for them. You can start with a blank one. We jump to a template, but you could literally go in here and say, Alright, I want another one, I want it to be designed and just start designing your own one, like you do for everything. Don't need a template. Go away, 'cause I'm boss. I know what I want, and you can design it. Here you go. Alright, I feel like the design that design the niceness of this. Somebody else designed it is kind of maybe dragging this. You notice I add some colors and stuff to it. It's still pretty bad. It's right. A table should be really plain, but I'm trying to make it all designery. Anyway, that is the design, Okay, little mini designs inside of documents that give you that kind of flexibility of moving stuff wherever you like. Whereas this in this text flow, we know from Word Docs or Google Docs, is that there's kind of, like, this flow, everything kind of flows after each other, and it's quite tricky to get things into the right place. Alright, my friend. That is it. I will see you in the next video. 56. Highlight Block & Dividers & Quotes in Canva Docs: Hey, in this video, we're going to throw everything into one video. It's all the little stuff that is unique for Canva docs that is not quite normal. We won't do the normal stuff. You can figure out how to add bullet points on your own. But I'm going to show you things like this. What is this thing? It's a nice little highlight panel. Same with this quote here. We do page breaks, we'll do links and dates. We'll try to use an app called Laurenipsm to add bulk text here. This is the Everything video. Everything that's left for Canva Doc's like a second draw down. Does everybody have one of those? Just everything's in there. It's a little bit messy, but you know where to go. I just get on with the video, Dan. Geez all right, before we get started, I'm coming back from the future to add this because it's a significant thing that I forgot to pay it in. Once you actually have got your doc ready and you want to print it, you go to File and you go to there's not a print. What you need to do if you want to print this out, you need to go to share and you need to download it first as either a PDF or a Docx, whichever makes more sense for you. No editable, editable. Sometimes you not editable. You just want to send it off in an email and have people print it without changing it. Docx is more of a if somebody who doesn't have Canva, they can be using Microsoft Word to make adjustments. Either way, you'll know which one is better for your system to be able to download and then hit the print from that. If I open up my PDF on my computer, it'll open up in Preview on a Mac or Acrobat on a PC. Everyone's got different software and you print from that. If you are looking for the print button, there's no print button. There you go. Let's carry on with the regular course. Let's jump into the video. All of those things are hiding in here or the forward slash key, the quick actions. I'm not going to cover everything in here because most of them you'll be able to work out on your own, and that's boring, checklist, bullet points, number list you can do. Let's cover the things that are interesting and that might be a stumbling block for you. Let's start with most interesting quicky ones. Let's go to highlight. Basically, it's a highlight buck you saw at the beginning. Let's put in the success one, and I'm going to be tracking the success metrics. Win for this project is going to be 20% year on year growth from last November. Now, all it is is basically a two column grid that's got added. Like a table, slightly different. You can adjust By doing the normal stuff, you can add another one. If you need it to be a table, don't use this. Put a table in. It has more controls. This more column based thing is a simpler version of it. But the cool thing about it is you can do the things like styling it. Watch this. If I click in here and I hit escape, I select just that column can grab the whole thing. Click off, click in here, I can say, right, I want the whole thing, and then I can say, I want the color to be not this, I want to adjust it and maybe make it a little bit more saturated by dragging it this way. Let's go really high, get the idea. And similarly, we can add border styles. It's a little bit more cut down than the tables. Okay, so it's just a border around the outside, but a lot of the same skills will work. And that's what this little thing is. It's just a little block of text. I find them really juicy for projects that have a lot of boring details. You just need something to kind of, I don't know, some more easily digestible, skimmable content. And there are a couple of other ones basically the same thing. Let's have a look. Quote. Okay? So let's have a look. There's quotes in here, exactly the same thing. It's just basically putting in three columns now instead of just two. We could do the same thing here by going, Alright you are grab the plus. Okay? I've got now three columns like. They're just putting in pre formatted columns, like a table, slightly cut down. They, in this case, have put big quotes in the corners to help you out, but they are helpful. If you need to design some of these little pullosR I don't know, can make some pretty heavy annual reports or newsletters, a little bit more exciting. Other things I want to show you is we've got start dates, there is adding a date. What I find though is adding them into a table you do it? I'm not sure how. What I end up doing is just putting them here and say, I want this date thing, which is in here. I'm just going to type it in date. There it is there. I'm going to select a date, I'm going to go this date, and then I can copy it and paste it in here. Other things that are useful, if I select something, I can add a hyperlink. All right, done. Okay, Hyperlinks easy. Other interesting things is page breaks. So you might not know the kind of international Breaker page shortcut is hold down the Kaman key and a MAC Control K PC and return. You can just a page break, puts a space in your page because otherwise, Canva does like to go on forever and ever and ever. I'm going to get rid of the page break. What you can do is you can enter it in here. There is an option in here or are you Page Break. It's up to you how you want to do it. There is a shortcut to get into logos as well. If any white logo in here, you might have a logo that you run at the bottom of a page. We don't really have one. We've got a horizontal one, okay? But anyway, is that a shortcut? Everything else I'll let you work on on your own. The last thing I want to show you is sometimes when you're designing a larger document, which this isn't this particular one, but we're learning the skills for it with our character styles and tables and things like that. But let's say we do just need a whole bunch of block text to make this thing longer so we can start styling a long document. You add something called Lenips Some of you'll know it, some of you won't. Basically, it's just mixed up Latin words that looks like English and you can style it but doesn't have actual content in it. Let's have a look at bringing it in. We're going to use an app in your apps, type in Lorim so. I'm going to search for that. There's a bunch of different apps. This one here works. Not all of them work in this separate document format, so quick Lorim does. It's just really handy to say, I need 50 words because I'm going to put it in here. I'm going to go to paragraphs and I need five paragraphs, or I need a bunch of paragraphs. Hm. Only have five. Anyway, what I want is down the bottom here I want to add it to the design. Can you see? It's just a bunch of text. It's something that I can style. So I'm going to copy and paste it a few times. If I'm designing this and I don't have the content yet, or I'm going to the client and we're looking at the design, not the content. Sometimes it can be problematic when you grab last year's content. You end up spending in the meeting going, somebody going, you can't write that or we don't write that anymore or that's last year's stuff you're like, no, no, no, we're looking at the design. What you can do is you can say, Heading three. I'm using my heading two style, but you get the idea I can go through and style this thing. But I'm using Latin. I can go in here and say, what would the first paragraph look like? Maybe I'm going to do bold, Command B. That's why I'm going to do first paragraphs to help separate it out. What I might do for headings as well, I might go into spacing and I'm going to say I'm going to do line spacing, headings are going to be a little bit taller than everything else for a bit of a break. But anyway, Lauren Epsom is a really common thing for designers to throw into websites, ads where you don't actually have the copy yet or you want to remove that from the conversation. You want to be designing visual design, visual communication, but not the actual specific content. Because we looked at magic right before people have I think it's a pro only version of AI creation. You can use Chat JBT or Google's Gemini, whatever the hot thing is at the moment. But sometimes that can be just as bad where you're like, that's not right. That does make sense. Laurenxm can be really useful that way. Anyway, I don't want to cover too much more. Basically, now it's just a word processor, wrapping it up. It is used for longer documents. It's a replacement for word or Google Docs. Is it better? It is better than the fact that I have all of my design elements. If you need your documents to have a really specific look, we all know when we make a design and send it off to a client and they start using word and it becomes, I don't know. They start destroying it, using half of it and stretching it sideways, Canva can be the right kind restriction for maybe a client to use, even for your own stuff. There you go. That is it. I will see you in the next video. 57. Class Project 14 - Proposal: When he's going to give us another class project? It's been Angers. Oh, I heard you, and I'm ready. It is time to make your own proposal. Basically, what we've created so far through the course, I want to make your own version for your own client if you haven't been kind of moving it along step by step. So now's the time. So basically we're here the requirement. So you're going to your client and you're going to pitch them on an idea. So you've got an existing client, which is in my case, the fox camping in outdoors I'm going to go to them and have an upsee' like, Hey, guys, what are you doing for Black Friday? They'd be like, I don't know. I'm going to pitch them on my Black Friday proposal, but paid marketing, I think it's going to work well for them. So I'm going to make a little pitch for them or a proposal. Okay? And I want you guys to make one for your company, and it's going to be in the doc format. We're using that kind of word style format. You don't have to do it like mine. Mine's an example, but you might just look at other templates and go, Oh, I'm going to use this kind of style. I don't want you to start with a template, though. I want you to make your own stuff. I want you to bump into some of the issues, figure them out, make something on your own. A big part of this is going to be picking some fonts. So look at that font pairing. You might jump back to that video. But remember, we've got a heading, subheading, and body copy that need to kind work together. Happy for you to just jump out and copy somebody else's. Or maybe find your font that you've used on your brand and decide to find something that matches that or pairs with it. Once you've got it, I'd like you to add some content, use either Laurenipsum or AI. I don't mind where you get it, whether it's magic right from Canva or Chat TBT. Just some placeholder text that you've got something to style. It doesn't have to be heavy. I just want to see one page. You can do multiple pages if you like. But I want you to design the header. Remember that? It's called design. I call it a header banner. That's that thing at the top there. There you go head a banner and I want you to style it based on your brand, and I want you to have titles. There's going to be two titles, the overview and the details, the details is going to have the table that I want you to style, and overview just has a block of text. Somewhere on there, I would like you to use either a highlight block or a quote block, whatever you would like to use. That's a success metric down the bottom here up to you. When you finish, I want you to take a screenshot of your first page. You might have to put that page break in. You talked about page breaks, without them, sometimes they can get a little bit kind not knowing where to finish. So remember, instead of page break, command return on your keyboard or control return on a PC, the little in there as well. Separates it out. Mine's not a perfect A four or US letter, that's okay. Because it's harder to go through and say, share download and give me a JPEG or a Peng just do a screenshot and upload it, upload it both to the class projects and on social media. It's this weird stuff where it's where the rubber meets the road Branding is fun, but a lot of this is what we end up doing a lot as designers, a lot more anodying simple things that it's these small touches where the brand is consistent across them all, which gives journalism. I actually makes it quicker because we know what colors to use, what fonts to use, and what color images I've been using in the past. Brain consistency is awesome. Anyway, go make that and enjoy and I'll see you in the next video. 58. Presentation Templates & Styles in Canva: Hi, everyone. In this video, we are going to look at presentations inside of Canva. Oh, they have animations. We're going to start by looking at a template and just run through all the perks for the presentation feature inside of Canva. It's different from some of the other workspaces that we've used. The tools are really focused around a PowerPoint alternative. They're very intuitive and they're a little bit different from some of the things we've done. Let's dig in, check it out. Let's get started. Let's start with a template. Either click Create a design, hit the plus button, go there. There's lots of ways of getting. That now. We are looking for a presentation format to start with because it has some secret hidden awesomeness. In terms of the presentations, I'm going to click Show. I'm going to find one that's free that you can look at. Doesn't really matter which one we start with, and we're going to say, we're going to customize this. The first thing we can do is if you're a pro account, you can go to design, go back and say, right styles, and then I can come down to my brand guidelines and say, everything in this current presentation, that's pretty cool. I need it to be on brand. Look at that. I need to be the colors. Not that color. I want it to be a Light version. It's quite distinctive first page, but you get the idea. If you are not a pro version, you're like, Geez, Dan, quick with all the pro stuff. You can actually go down the bottom and say, Hey, that thing you did recently, recent design styles, you can cycle through, and L. Look at that. That's the Google Doc we did. It's gone through and it's picked the styles from it, which is cool. Shuffle the styles, shuffle the colors. So it's picking the styles that we did. Remember the textiles and all the colors that were used in that doc we did. It's tiny. I can't even read it. Digital Marketing proposal. That's right. But you can go through all and you will find the stuff we did way back in the early course with our Instagram posts as well and use. And then it's just a matter of going, and if you're a free account now going and copying and pasting the logo from an earlier doc. If you're on the Pro account, you know that you can go along here and say, right, in my brand here, I want to throw in the white logo. Background is not dark enough. I'm actually going to use this across the document. I'm just going to put that there. The one thing to note is that the first thing I started looking for is like a master page or kind of a templated background, so you get at it once and it goes across all of them. They don't have that feature. You can do a brand template. It's a little advanced for this course. But basically the goal here is to go you copy, paste, and just click on all of these and just paste the elements along. Good thing about it is remember, I've got this here and let's say I want to use the darker logo against this background is I can click and drag it. And if I get it on top, can you see replaced it? It was the light version. Now it's on. Other things that make presentations super different is list of the templates. Templades are great because there's loads of good stuff already in here. It's done some funny things with some of the text. It's decided that it's going to use my hitting font for this one. There's a little bit of messing around to tidy them up and often you need to change your text, then you need to make the font smaller. All that regular stuff happens. Now, the other things that are different about presentation is obviously, you can present. You can present straight from Canvas. It's pretty handy you can present from a browser. You don't have to use the actual app. I can present full screen. Let's go and do that. So we're presenting our m presentation, I can use my error keys or my clicker. You'll see the animations we'll do as well, page transitions. Not very exciting transitions, but animations. Let's go. I can hit Escape to come out. The other difference is I can add notes. See down the bottom here, it's quite different down the bottom here. So I can say notes and I can say, A, these are the key points for me to hit. I can my own notes so that the audience can see this and I can read this on another screen. That's why here there is a presenter view so that the presentation on my screen, but I can also see my notes. But the data projector only sees. Can you see this two versions of this going now? I'm going to close down my presenter window. There's two. The audience is seeing this version on a data projector. I can't do it obviously here with the screen recording, this is my version so I can see my notes to myself. All the regular presentation stuff. In terms of getting it out, you can present straight from Canva, which is super easy and convenient and has extra features. But sometimes you do need to go through and say, say you're part of a team presenting, you might need to go and download PDF, probably a Power this depends on your organization. I find when I'm helping people, often they want PowerPoint, everyone's using PowerPoint. You can use a PDF. I'm not sure why that's the suggested one. I guess if you are emailing it to somebody, it's a presentation. It's just to go out as part of an email, welcome email. Here's our presentation as part of it. I guess that's why they've got it there. But if it's going out to be part of an actual presentation, maybe a PowerPoint document, PPT. There's an overview of presentations. Let's go and make some of the things ourselves we are going to make our own one because we know now templates are amazing. Now that we know how to make stuff, right, you're like, I can make good looking presentations, and I can edit them. We won't obviously go through how to ungroup and group and work with text. I'm just going to show you a few of the things step by step that are unique to presentations to give you the kind skills that you can make your own and adjust your own and get them ready for either yourself or your client. I've had a lot of caffeine. Can anybody tell? That is the presentation function inside of Canva and starting looking at templates using our styles. Let's dig in a bit more in the next video. 59. Production Video - Creating & Adding Content: Hello. Welcome to this production video. You're like, What is a production video? Well, production video is just a video that I need to actually throw some content on the page for us to how to use in the course. And you can totally skip this one. Okay? It's just going to be me adding text. I'm going to talk about how I use a bit of AI to kind of get my presentations into kind of some sort of order to get started. I'm going to bring in some bullet points, okay? Images. It's all stuff you already know how to do. So there's nothing new to learn in here, skip along. If you want to hang out and kind of there's always some sort of interesting stuff in these things, hang out. But you have permission to skip over. We make these four. Alright, let's go. All right. To get started, I'm going to try a different way. I'm going to go this way. I just type in present and the 16 by nine here is the real traditional basic one. That 16 by nine is an aspect ratio. It's kind of like 16 across the top and nine high. You can see there that's the pixel dimensions. So this real typical for a presentation. I'm going to name it. Now, for me, for presentations, okay, the company name, presentation, and then the thing that it is and a version of it. It's just so that I can go through all my Fox presentations pretty easily, and just kind of compare the end part of it to see what unique is. If you kind of mess it around, you end up looking through all sorts of stuff trying to find presentations. Anyway, one of the things that I like to do when I am creating a presentation is it's hard to know what goes in them. This is a little thing that I use. I'm using JGBT. You might be using something else in the future. But I just like to you can see here, I'm like, I'm going to make a five page presentation. I quite limit it. I tell exactly what I want, how many pages. You can see here I want why we should upgrade our website. I've asked what the title and content for each page should be. I don't know, it's a really good place to start in terms of titles. You don't have to use it. I go through and change everything. I'm like, Okay, not on that, but that, I find it's a good place to get started. You can do things like I don't know why I'm so polite to JTGBT, but anyway, I want two bullets only, see if I can cut it down and be more efficient. It's gone through things like shorter titles. There we go. I don't know. You might find it helpful, you might not, is what I'm going to use to get this presentation started. If you want to use the text that I'm using just as placeholder text, it's in here in your exercise files, there's two versions of it, either a PDF or a rich text file depending on which one you find easier to cut and paste out of. What I find is often it's just a good start. I'm like, Okay, enhancing online ordering efficiency, a website upgrade I know everyone's got a different take on AI. I find it's just a good start point. I knew they end up using the thing, but I do find it a good way for me to get started. Some people are better at this. I'm not so good. All right, background here, I'm going to go, actually, I'm going to use my brand colors. You can use any color you like. I'm using brand colors because I can. Not everyone can because obviously on the free version, I do like that. Actually, I'm going to go back to that. All right let's make another page, and you'll notice that presentations use that kind of more thumbnail view, which is probably more appropriate for presentation. I'm going to go and copy and paste my where is it? Bullet points from my second slide, the current challenges. Bullet points are easy. I'm going to number them just in case maybe in the presentation, it's easier. In terms of the alignment, it just cycles through them all. So I'm going to go left aligned. In terms of the sizes, you really need to present as a test to kind see how big these are, but often it needs to be a lot bigger. Okay. We're going to try and be consistent across slides. The other thing that's quite nice is when you play around with the spacing, we're going to play with the line spacing on this one here. In terms of colors, I'm going to make one light, one dark, I'm going to mix around with the colors just for a bit of visual interest. It might help me as well when I'm presenting to know which slide I'm on. I do like this line option here that I was using. Actually, let's create another one. I just appeared that on you. So remember it's our line. I'm going to pick Yeah, that color. I'm going to go to my text. I'm going to use my Bankit. Now, I know not everyone has the kind of Bankit because they're on the free version, but if you have to do the long way, you can go through and just type it out. I'm going to go through and pick a font size. Again, I'm going to stick to these and try and get some consistency from here on. All right, remember the other thing is, wow, we've done that, we drag across everything, let it all one go, C group it. And I'm going to put in I want to put an image in the big circle. So remember, who remembers from earlier on? Remember, we're going to use a frame. It's not a crop. We'll go. I'm going to try and make something super big. If you hold down the option KanakonaPC, it drags from the center. I'm going to go something like this, and then I'm going to go to my elements. I'm going to go to photos. I don't know about you, but for this part of the course, I feel like we've got to a place where we can do anything we want. I know there's some interesting things about presentations, but we're like, I can do anything I want. Look at me. Building stuff. It's looking good. I'm going to type in. I'm going to type in frustrations because I want to try and match the titles, and that guy looks good, drag him into the right spot. He doesn't fit. I want to go make an AI version, probably not going to spend the time. Now, I got to find that frustrated without looking like they've lost it all. Mild frustration. That's what I need. She mildly frustrated? Let's go and flip it around, see if we can get her Oh, yeah, perfect. Oh, she got a coffee. I thought it was a cell phone. Anyway, you at there. Yeah, that guy feels mildly frustrated. I'm gonna work on my logo again, brand, and I'm just going to do the logo hint game. No, I don't want to swap it over, remember, tries to swap it out, who remembers? You do. Get it the right size first. Hold shift, and use your arrow keys. Do, do, do, do, do, do. Was that painful for everyone? What am I doing this one as well as lower the transparency on this and then copy it, go to this first one, go to paste. Now what I wanted, copy, paste, switch it out. That one probably doesn't need to be transparent. Why am I singing? What I might do just to speed things up is instead of making new ones thing again, I'm going to say duplicate this one and I'm going to go through, grab this next bit. Copy some texts, you wit there. Okay, got the text in. I'm going to throw in three images just that we can play with the layout function later on. I found three images and I just duplicated the shape, and you can see here I've been quite really rough with this. This is what I'll do is I won't spend too much time designing it because I'm going to rely on the presentation layout features we looked at maybe earlier on. I'm just dumping the things that have to go on the page. Bullets are there, titles there. I like the line, three images. Not worrying about colors, not worrying about layout. We're going to do that when we get to the next video with Layouts. I'm going to make my home page look like my finish page. There should be five pages. I'm just cutting to the chase. All right, thank you, Page. I'm just throwing this all in here, so we've got some stuff to work from, and if you're following along, get to do the same thing. We'll turn this into a class project at the end once we run through everything, but for the moment, I'm just clicking on pages. Everything is in. All right. Thanks for hanging out. Let me know the comments. Did you hang out? I do wonder who actually hangs around for these things. Anyway, I got to stop giving permission to skip them at the beginning. All right. I'll see you in the next video. 60. How to use Layouts in Presentations in Canva: Hello, everyone. We're going to look at a feature called layouts. It's the secret little tab here that appears only when you're doing presentations, and what's really cool about it is watch this. I can just click. All my content, all my images, just get reshuffled around in different ideas. They're endless. Ish, one of my favorite things of all of Canva. Boring, but I find it very useful. Let's dig in. So get layouts inside of presentations inside of Canva. Okay, so we're going to start with a new page, and I'm going to drag it along so it's for my finished page here. It's a great way to get started. I know that I want to do something around there where we up to slide four proposed features and benefits. Okay, but I'm looking for a layout, and this thing here is new. So under design, you'll notice that we've always had templates and styles. What is this guy? This guy is special for presentations. So if I click on him, look at that. It's a whole bunch of really well thought out presentations. The reason I really like it is that they're very light on text, which is one of the I don't know, fundamentals of a good presentation. There should be lots of talking information, but not so much presentation. Keep it short, be concise, and these are a nice, good starting point for all of these. So you just click on them and it just adds it to the page. What you'll notice is something weird happens over here, you're like, What happened? An going to delete it all? It'll go back to this. You're like, is it doing? Basically what it's trying to it's trying to be clever, and it is very clever. Let's say that I know I want an image, and I've got a few bullet points. I might decide that scrolling down, scrolling down is Alright go back to the top. I'm going to pick the one I already picked. Okay, so it gives you this kind of overview of all the different layouts. But once you go into one, it says, Alright, you like an image with a heading and stuff. I've got some other ones, some alternatives within there. I've got headings with an image. Okay? I've got ones with the image down the bottom. Okay, this one here has just the heading in the text without the image. Come on with a line on it. I just gives you lots of versions of the thing you already have on the page, gives you other flavors of that. Let's say I go back to this one here that I did, which has a title, a line, some bullet points, and three images. Can you see it changed over here? It says, Hey, looking at your page, and you're on the layouts tab here, it says, I might do this. Look at this. Oh, look at that. I decided that I'm going to make your heading a bit bigger. I'm gonna move your bullet points over here, put images over here. What about this? Super handy. I, I find this the bets feature because you're like, Oh, thanks. You know. That's why I said earlier the last video, I was like, I just dump everything on the page and then work out layout later. 'Cause what we're looking for is maybe a little bit of difference between these pages. Okay? What we'll do here? Oh. Okay, look at that one. All right. Come down, Dan. I want to go back to the one I designed. But I don't know, I find this one of the really cool features in Canva is having a bit of flavor throughout the presentation, not just the same one. You can go and make adjustments and once you get the layout, then you can go into your styles and either use, if you're on the free account to look at pre recent design styles or if you're using the brand kit, you can say, actually, I want to go through and mess around with this to try and get it different from this one, just to get a bit of difference. I'm going to go to my secondary colors. Oh, I do like layouts. One thing I forgot to mention is you can break it. So I'm going to throw in a bunch of stuff. You at there? Alright, coping and pastes, lots of stuff let's if I can break it. Layouts. We couldn't find any layouts that match you a crazy mad thing. Hey, so you can see it doesn't handle complex designs very well yet. So you might be that person, and it's just part of it. Okay, so what you might do is kind of cut it down to something more manageable and then add all your other more complex things. Afterwards, sometimes grouping things can help as well. So it's not trying to rearrange everything. You've got a lump that you've grouped together, and it can rearrange it as a when I do find students struggle a little bit with starting with a template completely and then trying to throw their stuff into it. That can be helpful for design kind of styles, but I find easy for myself is actually just start with a blank doc, throw in the content that I think needs to go on there, an image to the bullet points, maybe an intro paragraph or a title and just throw them all on there and then look the other way. Start using the templates, but with your content. I find that's I don't know, easier way to do it. Throw in your brand colors, and you're away. All right. That is me very excited about what is, I guess, a really simple feature. But if you've wrestled your way through Keynote or PowerPoint or any of those, I don't know, this is. Right, I will see you in the next video. 61. Page Transitions in Presentations: It's time to look at transitions between pages. It's easy to do. Here we go. Got cool flows, we've got dissolves, we've got slide ins and we've got chops. You're never allowed to use a chop. They're easy to do. It's a quick video. Let's dive in. Define transitions, what we're going to do is you need to click on the background. Whatever that happens to be, and you will find them. Over here, there's a transition option. No, they're not. They went and move them. So there's a little update for the video transitions have moved. So you be able to click on the background and I will in the rest of the course, if I do jump back into it. I think I've caught them all, but if I do do it again, there might be transitions on the top there in the video, but they're not there in real life. What they've done now is you've got to click on the page here, and there's a couple of ways. If I want to transition between these two, what I can do is just hover in between, and then that appears. Little icon, that's the add transition button. Then you'll get to where I am in the video ad transition. I'm going to turn it off to none. Show you a couple of other ways. I don't know. They've taken away one way and three new ways. What you can do is click on this and say, see this little dots here, and you say, you. Transition. End up in the same place, add it dissolve. There's a little icon in there. You want to get rid of it, click on it. Down here, this opens and you can see none, close it down. If you've got one existing already, you can click on the icon and back into here. They've gone and removed it from this contextual taskbar on top. There's a third way. There is a third way. You can click on the page and say Add transition. Lots of ways now, three ways instead of a one way, but it's not the way I recorded the coursing. All right. Good luck. Don't worry. Transitions are still easy. They just went and move them. Enjoy the rest of the video. Click on the page, click on the background, and click on transition. You've got transitions. I get this first one here and I'm going to go dissolve I'm just going to work through a couple of them and add them. What you'll see down the bottom here is can you see the transitions start appearing so you can click on them to bring them up to edit them, and you'll see that previews it, which is I good, bad, I know it's doing it. You can see they're all slightly different. This one here obviously has direction and duration and the dissolve here, let's go to the first one dissolve only has how long it takes to dissolve. The defaults are all pretty good. Once you've found one you like, you can go through and say, I want them all to dissolve and just go to apply to all pages, and it will go through, can you see and just apply the dissolve to all the pages. Different line wipe. They're good enough. These are all nice and simple. They can get a little bit jazzy. Okay? I really don't like circle wipe, but they could just be me. I find they're a little bit distracting from, you know, the chop. It's a bit distracting from the presentation. You might find, they don't have barn doors and hands up for who knows ban doors from PowerPoint. That's the worst one in the world. Or the blind one. You remember that one? Anyway, they've got nice ones in here, so you might find that actually flow is it's kind of a Jesy. I'm using Jezzy and using my hands, but it's not too bad. And you'll see it's just simple controls from them all. Ps. Remember just to preview your presentation. You can present full screen, I'm going to go present, and I'm going to use my arrow keys on my keyboard. Just to cycle through and see which ones I picked. Lots of dissolves. All right, so we won't labor over this and this is easy. Just make sure we click on the background, apply it. You can apply to all. Don't use chop. All right. I'll see you in the next video. 62. Class Project 15 - Presentation: My friend, it's time to do a class project. I wanted to get your presentation up and running. It looks heavy going, but it's not. Basically, make what we've made in the course already if you haven't. I want you to use a presentation format. I would like you to start with a blank document rather than a template. The content, it's up to you. You can just write out your own content. You could use placeholder content doesn't actually have to say anything. Remember the Loren Ipsum app we used earlier, or you could use AI to create the titles and bullets. Have a minimum of five pages, I want you to use two plus images. I'm giving these restrictions just to make it easier and quicker. If you end up with one image or 20 images, I don't mind. I guess experimenting with this format, finding the limitations with it. So once you've got some stuff in, I want you to make sure it's branded, using your logo, your fonts, colors. This is the main bit. I want you to play around with this layout feature, and see if you can add stuff, change it, see where it breaks, see where it looks good, and then I want you to experiment with the page transitions as well. Doesn't have to be much, it could be super quick. When you've done it, I want you to upload your class project. I want you to do this. In Canva. Actually, before we do that. We think about presentations? What's this? Want to click to open it. Half opens. You're like, it's open. You're like, because that's what I was doing. I was like add a new page. Can I add page? Why can't I add new pages now? Presentations allow you to present straight from here rather than going more into the editing function. You can go into it by clicking this open tab, or you can just click on it. Watch what happens to the side over here, jumps into editing mode where we've got all the stuff and I can add pages now and I can delete pages. I don't know why I shed that, but I don't know. I stumped me when I first saw it. I was like, why not the same? Presentations just work a little bit. Uh, okay, the thing I want to show you for taking a screenshot is over here, go to Good view, just take a screenshot of your five or more pages. You can't have blank ones like that, Style them all, do as they say, not as they do. Again, they don't have to be heavy going, make them quick. Take a screenshot of those five pages, upload them. Share them on social media as well. It's interesting to see if everybody's take on a good presentation. Like, you might be screaming at your computer going. He's doing it wrong. I'm totally doing it wrong. Like, I done lots of presentations and I've got some general rules that I folded into this, but you might be way better at it than me. There are loads of people out there with way more kind of presentation experience. Right, so enjoy making your presentation. There's just really three bits. Add some stuff to the page and experiment with the layouts and the transitions. Those are the main things to do. All right. I'll see you in the next video. 63. Animating Pages & Page Elements: And in this video, we're going to look at animation inside of Canva. We're going to focus on doing it inside of our presentation. Watch this. When we load a page, instead of it just swiping on, watch things load. Go to the next page. Things individually do stuff like that slid in, what did that do? That typewriter in, no, just faded in. So we're looking at, things moved. Images are moving. It's a little different from a page transition. It's basically animating the elements on the page rather than the page movement. Instead of sliding across the whole page, it starts animating little bits as the page loads. Call it animations rather than transitions, and the cool thing about it is once we learn it, we can apply it to old stuff like Instagram posts to add animation in life to those. All right, let's jump in, get started. To get started, we're going to click on the page itself like we did for transition. What you'll notice is the word transition now is called whatever one you've picked. Mine happens to be flow, yours will be something else, either transition or one of these other names. The one we're looking for now though, is click on the background. Instead of this, this guy, Animate. Very similar. It's a page transition, but it's like a page build. Everything's going to animate on the page, you can do it. Let's click on this. You can do it for the entire page or you can do it for the thing. Page text. If you have nothing selected, it just gives you the page ones and you can hover above them. If you click them, you apply them. If you hover above them, I'm not clicking these things, it's just giving me a preview. You can just work your way through and say, A I like simple and we'll give you some extra options on them. Do I want it to animate both in and out of the presentation slide. When the page loads, and when you leave the page, do you want it to animate or just one of these? Some of them are a bit more like, let's have a look at hill. You'll find some of them that have a few more details like this one here. Wipe has both on Into on exit, but you can play around with speed and direction. You see these crown options here. These are pro only features, but luckily, all of these animations, they're all really good by default. Some programs, you load them up and you're like, man, that's bad, but I think I can make it good. These are by default good. So once I've clicked on it, I've applied it. I can remove all animations from this page, or I can apply it again. I can apply to all pages. Easy, easy. They're very similar to the transitions, but they are more to do with what happens to the elements on that page. You can still see here, it has a flow. I'm going to change it to maybe slide in. This is going to try and do both. It's going to slide plus all the animations that I put on this one. Watchs close this down. Let's go to you, click on the background, go to Wipe. I'm using wipe. See how both of them look. Let's present, present. Okay. So there's that wipe. It's deconstructing and wiping. Can you see it there? It's like animating off using that what was it wipe. But it was also using this one here, which was slide. It was sliding and click on the background wipe. That got me a little confused at the beginning. I like those feel like the same. See where they've broken them up. The reason is that we can do it per element. Let's do that now. We're done to the page. Let's go to this next one and say, I want this image now to animate. Not the page. I'm going to work on the photo. Page just guesses and does it all for you, whereas I'm going to say this photo or can you see changes to this text. This photo, I'd like to do one of these things. Do I want to breathe? Little baseline slide in, blur in. Okay, looking for something simple. Wow. Don't use Pop. You can see some of the features in here as well. P only pen. All I want to do fun stuff now. The same thing as before, once you've applied one, you've selected it, you've clicked on it. Remember, you can hover without applying it. Once you've clicked on it, you can remove the animation. Now you can work your way through and say, I want this to slide in, I want this to do something else. I want this to type in. Oh I hate that one. Okay. I don't hate it as much. Hates a strong word. It's a lot. You can see this one here typewriter has quite a few extra little bits. Do you type in by word, by character, shift? That's probably a bit much, huh? You get the idea. Well, last thing I want to show you is if I go back to my home, you don't have to be back at the home page, but I feel like I should. I'm going to go to this one. I'm going to go to remove all animations, and I'm going to go to the top of this one. I got the page selected. I'm on Animate. There's this one here called Magic Animate. It's pro option. Basically, it's going to go through your whole document. Its a little wild minds already done because I was practicing and it goes through and decides what is a good option for all the different elements. Let's change it all to. Let's go to this one. Let's go to. Let's go to handmade. And they've decided handmade is a chop. My least favorite transition. Here we go. Handmade. There you go. Do I like it? I think I just like being a little bit more purposeful. They're trying to use AI for everything. It was cool when I first used it, the professional one, just throw the data in, get some layouts going. The magic animate and keep it at professional, I don't know, things just look good. Super quick, and that is the real big benefit of using Cava. You can do things, get it on brand, get it out to your client, and look like a superstar, super quick. Now, remember this can be applied to we're doing it in presentations at the moment because it's quite appropriate, but you could use it for our earlier Instagram doc. There's a lot going on that one. Let's have a look at this one here. I can decide that this text here can be animated as well. We can't do the page transitions, but we can do animate. We can say, I would like to get it to slide this way. The big change will be is that it can't be just the JPEG you export it at, so I'm going to do this, and I'm going to do that. Awesome. What you'll find is now if I go to share, this now needs to be a video, more appropriate for a real or a story. I go to share and I go to download, it's going to default to MP four. That's just a really generic video format. Instead of your PNG or your JPEG. That is good because it will keep the animation in there. You can do animated gifts, a little bit jumpier and the file size is quite big. Depends what you're using it for. If you're trying to go out to say an email banner, you want a bit of animation in there. Animated gift is better than an MP four, but if you're going out to social media, MP four is the go. If it's going to be a plain old post, needs to be a JPEG or a PNG. We go. Look at us. Animating our presentation and now being able to animate anything in the past. Oh. Good point. Can you see in here? All right. I want this table to animate in. Doesn't have the option. It's a good highlight of picking the format first because there are some features that are more appropriate for longer documents and some better for presentations, some better for graphic design, print, you get the idea. One of the key things that I finally worked out when I started with Cava is like, every time I open a different document, things are different and animate is just one of them. All my friend, that is animating inside of Canva. Awesome. I will see you in the next video. 64. How to Create Charts in Canva: My friend, it is time to look at charts inside of Canva. Boring. Actually, they're not. If you've ever struggled with charts and graphs, look at these, look at them animate. They're really easy to make inside of Canva. There's just some tricks with working with them. It's easy to do, and they come out the box looking great, which is awesome. All right, let's get our chart on. All right, let's make a new page. I'm going to drag it to not quite the last one. Number five. Let's go to elements, and let's go down to charts. There it is there. Let's go to see all. We'll make a basic one together. We'll just put in the data and then we'll import the data. Let's start with a doughnut. I do like a doughnut. Kind. Very good. So there's two parts. There's parts along the left hand side here for the data, and some styling along the top. Now, one of the things that happens is you'll get out of the data. Gain, you'll click on this and you'll lose the data. Gain you're like, where did it go? You click on this again to open a backup. You can go in a bit further and go to Expand Data Table. If you've got a lot more rows and columns, you might need to see in this larger view. You get a few extra details in here as well. Just going to use this smaller view here for the moment. I'm going to click in this cell here, hold Shift and click this out to select them all, delete on your keyboard. Super intuitive. We're going to put in two items. We're going to put in one that is in store sales. And this is going to be 70 and this one here is going to be online sales. And this is going to be 30 to back up my whole. Now, ours is set to percentages. I think that's just what it is by default. And if you need to go and change any of this, there's a couple of ways of tackling it. We looked at this when I click on my actual graph, I've got data, which is open that window or edit. It's overall stuff and data is the data in the graph. Okay, so you can see in here numbers versus percentages, depending on what you want to show. What you'll find though is if I go to data and I end up at this Expand table that I showed you earlier on, this is the full view, you get a bit of both. So we'll get our data, but also percentages and numbers, doesn't really matter which way you go. Let's go to Edit here and I'm going to show legend and you might decide to toggle these going to show the representative colors along the top, and then I can turn off the labels here. Probably don't need them both on. What's really cool about camera as well is you can decide that, A, I don't want to donut chart. I want a pie chart and you can see it even animates between them. Makes me happy. Okay, so you can flick between different graphs, depending on your needs. Oh, no, my colors have gone weird. Colors, that brings up a good point. How do I go through and change the colors? You can do it up here or in the data, you can do it along here. You can right click and say Edit Color. Wrong. There we go. Alright, let's look at bringing in some data. So let's make another chart, and let's bring it in over here. And I'm going to start with a bar chart. Okay? I got all bar charts, and the one I want is this one. Now, in this one, it's got a comparative chart. I've got some data in your files here. You'll see. I've got this, just some real simple stuff. There's a more harder one here if you want to play around with, I left it in there. But there's a CSF or an Excel file really common for any sort of simple data. But mine's only got one column, so I'm not doing comparative. It's more just over time. I'm going to say, am I going to do it here? Let's go in the expanded table. It works the same. This is just a bigger view. I can click on this guy here and hit trash. I want to get rid of that column and you see it updates. Let's go in and port data, which you can't do from this view. You do it from here, upload data, and we're going to go either one of these two. Let's use the smaller one, the CSV because it's a little manageable. You can see in here as well, is I had leave it in there. I've got this data and it's got US dollar signs in there and it's not working it out. I can try and fix it. I can say, right, if I could at the top of the column, what kind of data is it? It's a number. Did it work it out? It did. Sometimes it doesn't. Sometimes if you've got messy data, that's where something like AI is really helpful. If I got a big CS fee, you can actually copy and paste it into SGBT and say, Could you clean this up and remove the things? It's really good at tidying up data if you are ungod at x Alright. I'm back from a couple of videos and I was just thinking about charts. I was like, I didn't tell them that. I'm back to tell you. That's only a simple thing. So when I click on my graph, I can go to data. What I tend to do instead of using the upload data or typing it in, I end up just copying and pasting it. I've got some chart data here. I just going to grab a chunk of it, copy it, go back in here, and I can just click in this top left corner, hit Paste and magically just overrides everything and adds the new data. Often, that's what I tend to do, especially with stuff that's like say, it's a monthly reporting, you've just you got it all styled nicely. You've got it all in nice graph. You just need to update it, update the month, update the stats. It might just be this column. Maybe the prices have changed. Copy and paste is your friend. All right. Back with the video. I'm not going to go through too much about how to work with data. There's 1 million different things that you might be unique to you. The big ones is that if you go to things like expand the data table, you get a little bit more control, you can say, can colt this column and I can say, let's go this one here, insert a column before. Afterwards, delete columns, sort them, play with a format, but know that you might have to go off and clean it up somewhere else in Excel or get somebody else to work on the project to get it to a day that you can use. Design wise, that's what I like is you can do a few things in here as well. You can see along here, I can play with the colors. Let's do that. You can play around with the roundness of the graph, how rounded do you want it to be? Fun but not very accurate. Column spacing. You can play around with the fonts. You can see here, I can say, you now play fair display, do that. What's really cool is it's really easy to resize them and get them to fit into your document how you want. I might have to do some tiding up of the actual items because that's quite long. Would you get the idea? Last one is that once you've got it, you can go back through. Click off, click back again, go into charts and you can say, charts, you are now a different kind of chart. You're a line chart. Will this work as a line chart? I actually just created a new one. How to swap it is actually different. Let's come out of that. Let's go into the Edit and then go into here and do it. Not different enough. Last one. I like this one? Doesn't make any sense for our data, but it's cool. All right. That is charts inside of Canva relatively intuitive and they come out the box looking good, which is the best bit about all of Canva. Everything starts looking good and you can make it more on brand to make it even better. That is it. I will see you in the next video. 65. How to add QR Code App in Canva: Hi, everyone. We're going to look at an app. For QR codes, we're going to generate this one here, make it a cool color system, make it some cool colors, and mainly just to fold back in this idea of apps that extend the ability of Canvas. It's not really built into it. They're just separate apps. So over here. I'm going to show you how I go through and decide which apps that I might use, how to pick good ones from bad ones, and we'll add a QR code, which is the easy. Friend, let's get in there. All right on my last slide here, I've made space for my QR code, and I've added this little title here that people can use their phones to use the QR code to download the prospectus or it might be this presentation specifically. You know what QR codes are, you probably could find the app on your own. I just want to show you just to get us back to using apps because there's some really cool ones in here and I'll show you a few little tips on using them. If I type in QR, QR code, code generator. Sure. What I do when I'm looking for apps is I'm looking for one that's potentially made by Canva. This one here, if I click on the dots, it's made by QR toga. I don't know who you are. This one here made by Canva. I'm going to use the Canva one just because I know that this Bitly one that I've used. It's good if you've used Bitly but you got to login with your account and you've got to sign up for a free account and it does cool things, itt tracks your links and stuff. But I'm like, often, I'm just looking for Canva make one? Because often it's quite simple. It's not trying to get you to sign up for anything. Often, that's what I'm looking for. This one is made by Canva. Let's give it a U. They're really easy to generate, okay? Generate code. QR codes can be any size, especially on a big screen, this one is going to be presented on a data screen. They'll be able to use their phones. When they use their phone camera to take a picture of this, it will show them the link to bring your laptop. But you knew that. Some of the things you can do with QR codes that are interesting is this one here you can customize. When I say this is really good because it's from Canva, one thing it doesn't do it have eye drop at tool. I really want the eye drop at all. Come on, Canva. Because I want that background color because I want to try and remove the white. You can actually have a QR code. As long as there's enough contrast, it doesn't matter what colors they are. I know that this color back here is what is it? F nine, F nine. F six, hang on. F six, F six, E nine. There you go. The weird thing about it is hit Enter and it hasn't changed. I'm like, why haven't you changed. Let's click on it again, type it again. Got to click on it first. It's still not changed. What ends up happening with this particular one you go to click Update code. Foreground color. Again, I don't know what my brown is. I remember what the cream was for some reason, but I don't know what the brown is. I should go and check that. But for the moment, took a guess. It's pretty close. The other thing to remind you about apps is you can tidy them up by hitting a little cross in the corner just so that you've got a nice little toolbar here to come out of that. That is how to do a QR code. More importantly, kind of see if you can find an app that it's 1,000 QR codes, see if you can find the Canva version of it, or a brand that you know. Alright. Easy one. That's it. I'll see you in the next video. 66. Class Project 16 - Presentation Polishing: Class project time, we're going to take the presentation that we made in the last class project and just take a little bit further. Add some polish, and it's going to be two things. I want you to experiment with the animation, and I want you to add two charts. So the charts are easy, okay? Figure two bits of data, you can make it up, or you can do what I tend to do. And I'm trying to have placeholder information or find interesting stuff. Okay, you can go off and just like I do this all the time. Like, it's just placeholder interesting statistics about. If you add your brand there, it's surprising how many reports have been out there, interesting facts and infographic style stuff. Lots and lots you can find and particularly good for this course because it doesn't have to be all that serious. The other one is if you add the word fun statistics about camping, you get these sorts of things. The world's smallest camper is called Cramp. All right. I didn't actually read that. We all need to find that out, right? All right. We need a picture of the cramp wait there. That is awesome. Camping bicycle. I wouldn't want it to be windy, but anyway, that's how I go off and got to get some placeholder stats. Because this is something for your portfolio, you might find something that's relative to your industry rather than just typing and I got wholesale prices that don't make any sense. Dot charts, experiment with the animation parts of Canva. Now, not the transitions. If we go on a Canva, remember there's two parts. If I click on the page, there's a transition, and then there's this one. Mine's called professional now because we've already added an animation to the page. You remember these? But I want you to play around with these page animations and experiment with if I click on the text, maybe the text. I want you to play around with just individual animations. Maybe pick one for the whole page and then the next one, just do it individually. Just so that you've had some practice, made some things, move it around, see what can be done, see what can't be done. Even this graph here. The graph is called an element instead of, remember, there's text and images. You can even animate the graph here. They call that an element. So experiment with animations, create two charts when you're sharing your class project, basically, I just want to see the two charts. It's really hard to see how much you've experimented with animation. So don't worry about that. Do it. I'll know. But really, I just want to see the two charts. To two screenshots of your charts, make sure they're on brand colors and upload to the class project. Upload them to social media only if you've done something interesting. As in something I don't know, fun, creative with the actual graphs or the data that's in it. Something humorous maybe. If it's a boring graph like wholesale prices, you can just upload it to the class projects. It's maybe not a social media thing. It's a challenge now who can make the most interesting graph and share it with me and tag me on social media. All right, happy playing with your presentation, and I will see you in the next video. 67. How to Adjust Images in Canva: Hi, everyone. Hey, we're going to look at adjusting images. This is the before and this is the after, the before, the after. Canva can do many things, including really good image correction. There's lots you can do. Let me show you how to get the most from image adjustments inside a Canva. To get started, can you create a poster? I'm looking for a portrait poster. I don't mind. I just typed in poster up here in the Little plus, and I don't mind if it's in inches or in the Asizes metric. Just make a portrait one for me, and then I want you to import two images. They're in your exercise files, they're called Image adjust one and Image adjust two. Put them on the page. What I want you to do is I want you to duplicate. We're going to start with this one. I'm going to have two of them. We'll leave this one down the bottom as before and we'll do this one as an after after we work our magic. Now, using two images of mine. There are just shots I took of my local village. There's some really cool features in there, that cottages. What we're going to do though, is because I've shot my own images, I didn't have all the settings perfect in the camera and they're a little bit, not perfect. If you are using images from stock library site, somebody's already corrected them, but there's lots of times you have to use your own images. Let's get the best we can out of them. I'm going to zoom in Okay, I've got it selected. We can go to this edit option here and there's this one here called adjust. What we're going to do, you can hit Auto adjust, stand back and it's pretty good. You might only do that. I'm going to undo that just to give you a few tips on how to edit your own images. Often, if I don't care that much about it, I'll just hit Auto and off I go. If it's a really important shot, I'll spend more time. Trick I'm going to give you, my tricks are is this order of how to adjust them isn't necessarily start with this and start with that and that. I'll give you the way that I get it into shape the quickest is down the bottom here, under this texture, I mess around with clarity and sharpness first. Don't worry too much about what they actually mean. Why does blacks versus shadows. What you need to understand is the effect on the image. I've got it selected. Over here, sharpness and clarity are very similar, but you can words. They just different algorithm in the background that is trying to adjust the image. Clarity is probably the most exciting one. You can get so much out of an image with just a little bit of clarity. Then deciding on how much gets applied. The trick with all of these sliders is don't worry about where the number is. Click Hold your mouse and don't be looking at the slide. I'll be looking at your image. Then I just I do this all the time, just going back and forth and I io, go until I find something, I'm like, that seems good. Then I'll look at the number. I'm like, Yeah, 29. Sometimes I've lived, it's gone to negative and sometimes it's gone to positive because you can go liss and above. What was that out about 29. Same with sharpness, I'm just going back and forth. Oh. It's amazing what you can get out of an image. I've gone quite high on sharpness. Not because sharpness needs to be high, just because me dragging it back and forth. I start with these two and then I'll jump back up to this group of light. I feel like this is the next best group to deal with. Again, don't worry too much about brightness versus highlights versus whites because they all the same thing. They're dealing with different parts of the white spectrum. More again, start at the top here, click Hold drag and then look at your image and go, do I want it there? Is it too much? Touch back decided it needs to be brighter and then left and right here. Okay? Where do I want it to be? Nothing. I'm looking at it. I'm like, I look back. I'm like, three. Okay, so I'm going to work my way through these. I'll speed through them. There you go. There wasn't much done to it, but if you can kind of see the difference between this one and this one, I don't know, it's quite significant. Next one I'll look at is probably temperature. Okay? Temperature it's just a really gloomy day, and it was a gloomy day. And it's pretty typical filing, I'm just going to warm it up. Not much. I'm not going for that one, but I'm just going to warm it up. You might live in a really sunny part of the world or it might be shot indoors. Again, you need to warm it up. Tint, something's going wrong with your camera if you're dealing with tint too much, which happens, especially if you're shooting inside with some funny lights going on. I don't often use it. The next one is these two. They basically do the same thing in this program. They should be very different, but they're quite similar. Watch this. Crank up vibrant, back down to zero saturation, doing very similar work. What you'll find is just use vibrant. Vibrance tends to, but it doesn't seem to be as extreme in Canva, that normally when you crank this up, it will raise up the colors. I'll raise up the saturation of colors that are currently not saturated. Looks at all the colors that are quite weak and bumps them up, and that often gives you a good look. Whereas saturation generally just grabs them all and yanks them up. But in this, it's so subtle that just use vibrant. Now, we could sit here and discuss them all forever. You can reset them there. But I don't know. I feel like you can get some really good results, dragging the sliders back and forth, not worrying too much about what the sliders mean and more about the end product. Not going to make it a class project, but what I'd like to do is this option here I've left for you to experiment with, do the exact same thing I just did. Make sure you go to edit, go to adjust, and you can work anyway you want. There's no right way. I'll just give you the ways that I've done this 1 million times, so I start down here. I know I get the big results out of a couple of things, that gives me my good starting point. Alright, have fun playing around with the This is actually a school near me. I've got such the cool building. If you do this kind of editing stuff, and you're like, Well, this is pretty cool, wish she did more, you might want to check out. I've got a light room course or a photoshop course as well. You can check those out where you found this course. But yeah, cross over. Enjoy playing around with the school, using the colors. Make sure you have a before and after as well, so you can see your handiwork. This doesn't need to be supplied as a class project, just something for you to play around with. All right. Enjoy. I'll see you in the next video. 68. How to Darken Images for Text Over the Top: Hello. Hey. In this video, we are going to take our image adjustment skills and take this image here, turn it into a background image where we can actually read the text over the top. We're going to darken it up because you can see there the text kicks lost in the background. It's a neat trick for case poster, but it might be social media, paydds, posters, business cards, anything where you need text or an image or a badge to step out from the background and you want to turn the background into more of an abstracte Plus, I'll show you how we go and tint it. One's warm here and one's cool. All right. Let's jump in. To get started, I created a new page, gave it a colored background, added some text down the bottom, and I've brought in an image from my exercise files. It's called Image adjust three, what I'm going to do is I'm just going to move it down here and crop it quite heavily. Okay, remember, you can't use the corners, you to use the sides to do the cropping. I'm going to do something like this roughly and this I'm going to make white text. You white. That works. You can see it disappears in and out. I picked an image purposely that is quite consistently dark. It is really tricky if you've got an image that is really bright on one side and really dark on the other side, doesn't really work. I'm going to show you two tricks to doing it. The first one is actually I'm going to duplicate it because I'm going to show two different ways. This first way is basically what we did before. But instead of making the image perfect, so we're going to edit, we're going to go to adjust. Instead of making it look great, we're going to make it look dark and basically just grow anything that sounds bright and drag it down and the ones that sound darkish like shadows and black. So let's have a little look. Brightness down, highlights down. You can see already it's good enough for what I need it to be. Then you can just work around. I picked an image that well, the image that I ended up picking was pretty easy to do, but you might have to play around with a little bit more like, do I crank up the shadows? Maybe the contrast generally coming down is better. It makes it more consistent. Just play around with do I need these up? But mainly just the whites down. That's white highlights and brightness. Difference between them all whites are the pure whites that are in the image. High lights are in the light ish zone, not pure white like this one here. You're just in a lot more of the color or the bright colors. Brightness is overall. What do we do with all the colors or make them all bright. You don't have to remember that, but sometimes it is weird that they're all. They all sound like they're doing the same thing. Pure whites light colors. Everything, make them brighter or lighter. All the other trick that I do is depending on the image. I'm going to drag that up there as well. I'm holding down my option key to get a duplicate. A key on a PC. What I do is I go, All I want to go to my elements. I'm going to grab a square or rectangle. I'm going to drag it to be the exact same size. It should snap to this. And because it's not an image, I can use the corner. It's not snapping to the bottom, so I'm going to use this. So it all snaps to it. Then what I do is I put it behind it. Actually, I'm going to pick a color. Often, what I like to do is tint the image. If I use pure black, that's fine. It's going to just be a gray scale stuff. What I tend to do is I go, Alright here, I'm going to go into my colors. Instead of just pure black, which is down in the bottom corner here, I can grab this hue slider and say, I want it to be a midnight blue black color. You just drag it up this way into this sense here. Can you see it's a different color? I'll do two with them. Let's do this one, but we're going to do a warmer black. So we're going to say Hue ug do do. It's generally just these two. You can mix any color. You can have a purple black. That's cool. But generally, I just work with a warm black. It's a little hard to see on screen. You don't want it to be brown, I want it to be black still. Dragging it down. Do I want it to be rich? Yeah, somewhere around there. What it means is you can see the difference in the comparison here, warm. This one here is probably not rich enough. I'm going to bring it down here. When I say rich, I mean saturated, I want it to be dark but have a good strong blue in it. It was too light before. Then what we do is we say send to the back, which is Command F square bracket or Control first square bracket on a PC or you can right click it and say layer sender back. Now what I do is I just play around with the transparency. Can you do more than one at a time? Oh, you can. Chef collected both of those, and I can just lower the pacity. I'm getting to the same result, but can you see it's quite a different color? This one here is quite cool mid nighty blue, a cool mid night color, whereas this one here is a lot warmer. Is that important? I don't know. I think this might be like, heck is he talking about? I find this a good way of doing it as well. Do I have one or the other? It depends if I want to tint it or not or just pull the colors out of it. I don't really have a specific hard and fast rule, but there you go. The other thing we might do as well is with them all selected, we can. We can go to effet and use either lift or shadow. I'm going to use Lift and just separates a little bit from the background. You can't really see it right, but there's a little dropshado on it now. Can you see there? Probably not enough. Only because mine's probably perfectly good the way it is. I don't really need the drop shadow, but that's another trick you can do. I'm going to go to lift, tensity, crank it up. I was going to be quite dark now behind it, separating from the background. All that is how to darken images so that we can put text and graphics and logos all over the top of it, using it more as an abstract background. My friend, I'll see you in the next video. 69. What is the Magic Eraser in Canva: We are going to look at something called the magic eraser. Basically, when Canva uses the word magic, they mean AI. And AI eraser does that. You kind of just see this chair here, BM gone. See this canoe here, Bam gone. See this prius here with a tent? Bam. It's super easy to use. It's pretty good. It's a pro feature, so some of you will be only able to watch. Some of you will be able to do it with me. Let's jump in. All right. First up. I want you to bring in magic eraser, one, two, and three from your exercise files and put them on your poster page. I'm going to zoom in on this guy, Command plus. Control plus on a PC to move up the page. With it selected, I'm going to go to Edit and I'm going to go to the magic studio. This is remember the general term they use for all of their AI stuff. The one I want is magic eraser. Let's click on it. There's two options. You can brush something out. You can say jug. You can be relatively rough with it. That's probably a little rough, but let's go to go. It's pretty good. The other way is if I undo it, the other thing before I move on, you can play with your brush size. If you've got something big or small. But it's pretty good. You just be relatively rough with it. Click. We'll spend a little bit of time analyzing it and go, Hey, do you mean these guys? I'm going to say, yep, that guy. I'm going to hit a race. What I find is it's good at getting most of it, and then I get the brush tool to actually, let me show you. Okay, take it back. It's done a great job. Often, I do that then switch the brush tool and grab anything that it might have missed. Sometimes it misses just a little something that might be you know as a human that it's not part of the scene, but the computer has missed it because it looks, part of the background or something. Sometimes you need a bit of both. All right. Let's close that down and scroll down. Let's do it on this one here. Let's go to Edit. I'm going to try and break it so I can show you ways of unbreaking it. I'm going to go to Magic race. I'm going to go to click and show you what I mean by it. It's good. Watch this. I want to be able to click it and use the brush tool before it goes and process because it takes a bit of a time. You see what it did there? What it tried to do is that it saw the shadow there and went, I'm just going to smooh the shadow around. I'm going to undo using Command Z, troll Z and a PC. I'm going to go to brush. Again, I'm probably just going to use the brush for this one. I'm going to find something appropriate because I want the shadow gone. I want this part, kind of footsteps from it. I want to get that bit of the shadow as well, I'm going to try and grab it all, and again, I'm pretty loose with it. Only because I'm like, Make new stuff of this because that's kind of an anomaly that maybe, I don't know, makes it easy to see that something's been kind of doctored. All right, pretty good. Sands ended up in the water. The weird thing about some of these is that it's getting better and better. I bet you when you're doing it right now, go and do it. Yours will be better. AI, these AI models are all getting so good so quickly. A year ago, AI was really bad funny. Now, it's really usable in a lot of other design programs. The one in Canva now is not quite up to some of the other ones, but only just behind these different models and the different AI algorithms end up leapfrogging each other and then next week, Canvas is better than anybody else. I play around with it. Hopefully, when you're doing it, there'll be other options. You can go, I want Option one, two, and three. It comes up with more than just one thing to play around with. But that's what it is at the moment. Let's do one more. I'm going to close this one down. Let's look at this guy. This one's a little bit more tricky. I'm trying to get harder and harder things as we go through. I'm going to say you, magic studio, magic eraser. Let's go to the click and it's going to really struggle. Looks grab a chair, let's grab the car. But if you remove the car, go to half a tent. In this case, just from my experience, is that just grab a bigger brush size and just go jib db db and grab it all. It's so much better at grabbing a big chunk than trying to spin ages go around it with try and get it all perfect. AI in general, works better with a broader kind of brush pattern. You got it. Oh, I was good. That's the best one I've done. I've practiced this a few times before recording just to kind of test some things. There's some weird junk, but I don't think you'd notice. All right, I'm going to zoom all the way out. Who remembers the shortcut is? It is Command Option zero, which doesn't work if you're halfway through the magic arrasatol. A lot of things aren't going to work. Okay, so you got to close it down now. I can hold Command Option zero, Control 00 on a PC to come out to full screen who's getting sick of all these shortcuts? Hands up. I'll slowly stop doing. Ah, this is essential course. I got to beat them into here. All right, because what I want to do is I'm not going to use them. There was a test. There was a test. I want to use this at the top here, and I want to go and crop it at the top. I want to use this for my top of my poster. Two things before I go, I just wanted to double check that everybody remembers if you double click on it, you get all the cropping tools, we've been using the edges just so that if you do want to move this up, you can double click it and just drag it around. Click off. So you just need to double click on the image or use this cropping tool. While since we did that. I thought I'd remind you. The other thing is that I've given you some exercise files to play around with. So we've done one, two, and three together. There is four, five, six, seven, 89, just to have a play around with. I know not everyone has the Pro account. I'm not going to show the features a bunch of you will have them. But also, I don't want to turn it into a class project where you've got the free account you're kind. But I also want to give you some practice stuff. Bring these into Canva and just have a mess about with them and find out the limitations. I've given you some ones that we played around in this lesson that actually work pretty good, I guess, to get you excited by the tool, but also show you some of the limitations like this sand here. It can get worse. I've given you some examples that go from pretty easy through to really tricky, just so that you can get a sense so that you're like, Alright, some of them are hard, some of them are easy. You don't have to share them with me. I just want you to have a little mess around with them. All right. So that is the magic eraser, pretty magic. It's getting better. Play with the examples, and I will see you in the next video. 70. What is Magic Edit in Canva: Hi, everyone. We're going to look at something called magic Edit inside of Canva. It's a way of taking an image and adding things that weren't there before. See my sea shells down the bottom there? They look great. See my Seagull? You can get varied results. It's still really useful and it's free at the moment inside of Canva. I'm going to show you the dos and don'ts. It works sometimes occasionally, instead of a man crossing the road, it gave me a pile of Cinda blocks. There were some better options, but I thought that was funny. Anyway, let's jump in and look at Magic Edit inside of Canva, where we get to manipulate photographs. All right. To get started, import two files, one called Major get it one and one Magic Get a two. Let's zoom in on this first one. I've selected it. I'm going to go Command plus plus plus plus plus and use my scroll word to move up or the little slide bar here. When you do select a poster every time I open it, it's like, do you want to print it? I do not want to print it. It's a cool feature. You can go off and use Canvas your printing, but what I need for now. We're going to close that down. With it selected, let's go to Edit. Let's find the app. It's not a magic studio. It's along here. It's called Magic Edit. Now, like before, you can either brush it on or click. We're going to brush it on. I'm going to put in some shells about there. Let's go. Going to type in shells. With Canvas Magic Edit, you sometimes need to be a little bit more explicit. So you don't. Okay, I was messing around with this before and I was getting mixed results as I had to say shows on a beach because I was getting some weird results, but this is the best one I've got so far. I guess why I want to include this in this course is that it's good is at the moment. In a year from now, six months from now, it's going to be amazingly better in Canva. These are los and the wrong scale. It's getting so much better at it. Let's click Done, and let's go to Magic get it and go back in and go, Alright, I want this time to put in. See you girl. It's pretty good. A taxi gull, okay? Yeah. It's there. You can see it's picking up the light. It's almost there, okay? Oh, but not quite. I look forward to coming back and redoing this video when it is more advanced and gives you some layers and some more consistent ones. The thing is, if you keep hitting generate, it'll keep doing it and you'll get something that'll work for you. Or, uh, a bird in a bottle. Not quite a seagull. All right. The one thing it does say down here is before you start, it says, try not to do things like nobody's going to know that that's not a real seashell, but things like people, especially hands and feet, AO finds it tricky at the moment, but it was always getting improved. Let's look at this other one here and bump into one of the other issues I'm having zooming out. Let's have this one. It is good ish. Same thing. Go to Magic Edit. Let's say I want to put something in there. I want to put a person, I want gaming, walking across the street. What I'm finding is that it keeps thinking, I said, the first time I did it, I said he was in a coat, like a long coat, a change coat and he said that was inappropriate. I'm not sure why. I can kind of see where they're going with it, but there's a lot of times where it just says, Hey, this does not match our values. At the moment, there's a lot of things where I can say person rather than man or woman that seems to get around a few things, but you might end up bumping into against their terms and conditions. Oh, they did it. I don't know. Why man in a coat is different. Ah, look at that guy. He's walking into the next dimension. Block. Man walking across the street. So it hallucinates a little bit at the moment. And when I say a little bit, a lot. But again, this thing is going very fast. The same technology and a lot of other similar design apps that I use, and it is miles ahead, and I doubt Canva is actually doing it themselves. I imagine they're licensing it and that company is busy trying to make it really, really good. Maybe Canva doing it, but this stuff has come along even just this year. I bet you your results will be. Still, magic edit is great for adding things to it. You do have to play around a little bit to get something that you want and at the right depth and the right focus. Really good at the stage, more for idea generation, ideation concepts, maybe not the final product, but using it for the final product is only just around the corner. All right, so that is Magic Edit inside of Canva. I'll see you in the next video. 71. Class Project 17 - Magic Edit: Hello, everyone, it's time for a class project. It's going to be a fun one, and we're going to let's have a look at the class project. So I want you to practice with a magic edit tool, basically. Find an image that's related to industry. It can be pretty vague like me. I went for kind of outdoorsy stuff. But to be honest, that's not what's really important. I want you to add and adjust something. Just get the hang of magic edit, see what it can do well, what it does badly. So experiment with one or more images, and I want you to pick out your best result, okay, and post it with a before and after. Okay, so we can see what it started with, and we went. Extra points if it is humorous. Okay? So what I'm looking for is like, I don't know, a contradiction doesn't have to be super professional. It can be super professional. It doesn't matter. And when I say extra points, there's no extra points. It's made up. But if you want to do something a little bit more interesting, I've gone for the safe option, okay. You can be a little bit more edgy, but please don't be rude and nothing that's going to cause any controversy. It just causes me trouble on social media and the comments and moderation and all that stuff. So keep it clean, people. But have some fun. Think of something that can be I don't know, opposite, contrasting, interesting. If you can't think of anything, don't worry. Just do something. I want to see it before. After, you can't really see the ones I did. Obviously, a dinosaur with a Nas, good work done. And this one here. I put a city in a lake. I'm so creative. You can be more creative. I'm going to pretend I did this lame one here so that you feel better about yours. That's what I'm going to tell myself anyway. All right. Have fun playing with magic. Edit. It will be getting better. This one here doesn't quite work. It was the best one I could pick out of the lot. But it's still pretty good. Going to get better. When you're finished, upload it to the assignments and share it on social media as well. I'd love to see what you guys do. Make sure you tag me or share in the groups. All right, heavy magic editing. 72. What is Magic Expand in Canva: Hier. In this video, we are going to look at something called magic Expand. It's when you've got an image and you need it to be wider. You need to invent background using AI. We can drag it out and say, I need more beach. Go. And bam, it invents a new part of the beach. Okay? You can cycle through the different options. One of them somehow has a magical castle on it. That's okay. Some of them don't. It's a great way when you've got a photograph and you need to extend it to add text or in this case, to kind of extend it for a Facebook banner. Just a really weird aspect ratio. Magic expand is really helpful. So let's jump in and figure out how to get the best from it. And if you thought the castle was weird, you wait till you see the people running on the beach. Let's go. All right. To get started, what I did was I created a new Facebook cover. It doesn't really matter what you create. I just want to have something that's kind of like long letterbox shape, okay? And I have imported the image. Okay? It is called Magic Extend 01. And with the image selected, we're going to go to Edit and we're going to go along to our magic studio. On the end here. Okay, Magic expand, it's a pro feature, and it works okay. One of those ones where it's getting better and it's going to be great. I'm going to leave it at freeform and just drag out the side here. How big? If you try and do this whole thing, let's just see. I'll do okay. Small parts, it does better for larger parts, it's a bit tricky. Trying to invent a lot of new background here. Let's click Magic Expand, let it do its thing. Okay, pretty impressive, but I can see the thumbnail of here. A, it is. AI in its infancy and with these natural, we ignore those people. Wow. Creepy. With natural kind of nature, that's why I pick the shot because it tends to do well with, you know, things that aren't really buildings and stuff, is tricky. The geometry gets a bit weird, but with natural stuff, it does a better job. Look at that. That's pretty good. We'll all ignore that one. I'm going to hit Done. Let's look at another one. B onto our posters, I've imported the second image from the exercise file. It's called Magic Extend two, and I don't need you now. Remember, you can drag stuff off the side to delete it. And what we're going to do is the exact same thing. It's going to work good for the sky. Oh, let's give it a go. I'll show you. Um and you can compare how yours is working, 'cause I bet you it'll be different. Okay? So if I want more sky here, say, I need some text, I need that kind of weird gradient in there. Okay? It should do that okay. Alright, it's done a brilliant job. Like, sometimes trying to mimic that kind of weird gradient in the sky can be tricky. Somehow, we've got trees up there. That's still kind of cool. Kind of see the line there. Try it on your one. I bet you. By the time you're doing this, it'll be even better. So just so you know, it's not you if you are doing it and you're getting some strange results, it's just this thing getting better. And like before, I know the underlying technology is actually better than what's being produced here in Canva, so Campbell will make a big leap soon as well. Alright, so magic extend, great for those times where you just need something that's longer than it should have been. We've exaggerated it here. Okay, I do a lot for paid banner ads, though just a weird shape, like these, kind of leaderboards. Or like this, the Facebook banner, same with YouTube has a really long kind of litter box shape. And for a lot of things that are things like stories, where you might have an image that's landscape, but you want to move it to portrait, you can drag these things around and let AI create some of the background using magic expand. Alright. That is it. I will see you in the next video. 73. Class Project 18 - Poster: And it is class project time. We're going to put into practice some of the tools that we've learned and we're going to make a poster for a workshop that's coming up at the business that you're working on for this course. Here are the requirements. I want the post dimensions I'm not worried about. I've got minus A three portrait. Yours can be a US letter size, landscape that's totally up to you. I don't mind what the dimensions are. I want you to experiment with these tools here. Not everyone has the Pro account, so I'm not going to force you to do all of you get it. Everyone, I think, has access to it at the moment. It's a free tool. Play around with the other ones. We've worked with them already in the course, have a little practice with a new banner image here, see if you can stretch it out using magic Expand, see if you can delete parts from it. Just get a sense for what the tools do. I want you to adjust one image, even if it's not your own image, and it's reasonably good anyway. Just practice like we did earlier on. When we adjusted some of the images that I made, remember these ones? Why I made, I shot. These here were raw images and we made them a bit different. You can practice with images that are out of Canva, that tend to be good already. Just have a play around with the adjustment settings of the images. Remember that's in here, Edit and under this one here. Just play around with lightness, darkness, brightness, get a sense for that as well. I want you to have one part of your poster where we've got this dark image with the lighter text over the top. Okay, make sure we include that. The details for the poster, have your logo, have a title for your workshop, have a workshop overview. Now I've got an overview that I got Chat GBT to make for me. Up to you. You could have Lauren ops in there as well. If you prefer not to use it, that's totally fine. Come up with a fake heading. I realize now looking at it. Recording this video, leave no trace in the sunset over there. It was meant to be a environmental thing, but I think it might be like, when you die and go to the light, leave no trace. Anyway, come up with a title and have the workshop overview, have two plus images. Remember experimenting with the adjustments or any of these magic studio tools. Have a web address, date, time, location. These aren't hugely important to submitting the class project, but I just want to give you some structure to make a poster. Can be fancy. It can be simple. It's mainly about practicing the tools here, when you're done, upload it to the class projects and share it on social media. Make sure you tag me, share it in the groups. Love to see what you make, it'll be interesting. Leave a comment. Like, how is AI working for you now? It's probably going to be more flawless than it is now for me. If you do get any interesting, I don't know, that wedding couple, share that as well. That's always fun. See where the thing is hallucinating and we'll just see over time, those things will go away. That's my prediction anyway. Alr, Have fun making a poster. Practice the tools that we've learned in this last section and I will see you in the next video. Once you've done your poster, make the poster. All right. See it a bit. 74. How to Trim Video in Canva: In this video, we are going to look at editing video. We're going to stitch a couple of different videos together. I'm going to show you how to trim them up with the bits we want. We're going to make an Instagram story video, but the exact same principles will work if you're making a YouTube video or Instagram reel or maybe Pintrespin, LinkedIn, project animations. Canva isn't great for super long form video, but for short form video, wherever it's going, it's really good. Let's jump in. Okay, let's get started. Let's get started again. You don't know it, but I've already recorded this video, and I recorded the wrong screen. It's just like my notes for recording whole way through. Anyway, let's do it again. It'd be better the second time, Dan? All let's go to create Design, and we are going to start with video. Now, video here is going to give us a bunch of blank templates and a bunch of premade templates. Let's start with a blank thing I want to point out is often the video, a lot of the options here are just the same measurement, 1920 by 1080. You see this one here is also 1920 by 1080. Don't worry if you haven't done video much before. They are the exact same thing. They call this one a YouTube thumb now, ten ADP, this one here is video ten eDP. They're the same thing. It's much the same for video for mobile. It's just flipped around. It's ten ADP by 1920. It's just vertical. Also, if you're going to do video, you have to learn the lingo, you have to be 1080, not 1080. I'm not sure why, but that's the rule. It doesn't really matter if you start with this one or the TikTok video. I'm going to start with just mobile video. Just because. Let's be good and name it. I am going to bring in a video. We've got two of them. You can either drag them on or go to uploads, upload files. I want you to find on the bottom of your exercise files, these two, Video one and Video two. They will upload and you'll end up in this videos tab. I've already done mine because we've already. Done this video already, Dan. All I'm going to start by dragging in this one here with the feet on the beach or the legs on the beach. You'll notice it just plays by default. We can hit pause. It will come in, even though this is a much bigger size, actually, it should be almost around this sort of size, but they squeeze it in to make it appropriate to the page, you can make it bigger. I'm going to make mine bigger so it fits and I'm going to be vaguely in the middle. There's a lot of horizontal video out here that I end up having to just crop lots of because we need it for this vertical format. All right. So in terms of editing, I can play it here or I can play it down here. It doesn't really matter. And to trim it up, what you can do is you can just say, right, I don't want the beginning bit and you can slide it along until you get to the bit where you want it to start. Then grab this part as well and trim up the end. It'll depend on the footage, how much you need to trim up. What I find really helpful is, let's say, I'm going to expand that all back out. It doesn't go away. You can just drag it back out if you need to. I find this playhead really good just to scrub along. So scrub along to like we want you like, Okay, I want it to there. Rather than watching in real time, it can be tricky. I'm like, Okay, I want to get it about there before. Yeah, I don't know. I want it there. What happens is if you drag the end now watch it. You see it just snaps to that playhead. I find that a really easy way to edit. Drag the playhead along here and I go, Okay, I want it to start when it's on the left hand side there. I just drag my end. I'm going to have to drag that along again. Yeah, then drag that along, and it should snap. The other thing is that a lot of formats will have time limit. Instead of trying to drag it out, say that I know Instagram stories needs 60 seconds. You might be doing an intro for YouTube channel or something else, and you want it to be a certain amount of time. What you can do is watch this. I can click on it. Actually click on it over here. What you can do is you can edit it up at the top. No difference at the top here. I'm going to have pause is we've been dragging these edges here. You can actually drag them up here as well. Click on the video, go up to this trim option, and we get a very similar interface here. You can either drag it down the bottom here or you can drag it along the top. It's the same thing. You don't get the playhead, which I find useful, but it doesn't really matter. The cool thing about this one is you can see the ghosting of what's being trimmed off. The other nice feature up the top here is you can say, I don't want to be 25 seconds. If you type in 25, it'll expand this box to be 25 seconds and you can move it along to say, right, I've got to pick a 25 section slot of this. It might be a couple of minutes long. You might have to pick the first 60 seconds. You just type it in terms of other trimming, there is auto trim and highlights. Auto trim tries to guess the beginning and the end. I don't find it that useful. It might be great. Give it a go for your footage. It's a pro version, but it tries to look at the footage and go, that's the beginning and that's the end. I'm always, it doesn't seem to work what I want to do. The other thing is highlights. If you click highlights, what it'll try and do is try and chop up your footage into the interesting parts from the footage. The moment it's just got one scrolling from a beach. Strolling on a beach. The second, the time I forgot to record the right screen and it gave me two parts. It's cool that it's giving names and stuff. I find that not particularly. It's very I like the idea of it. I don't know. Maybe I'm just too picky about what footage I want. I've undone all of that. I'm going to get rid of the Can I get rid of the order highlights? I can't. I go back to 25 seconds. Now, when it comes to adding other video, you can do one of two things, hit Okay. Basically, down the bottom, we've got they're calling them pages. They're like a page, but basically, it's going to play through this to this next page. Actually do both of them. You can have two videos going at once. I might decide that actually, I'm going to have three videos on this home page, really common Instagram style. I actually do two because I've only got two videos. But you might have three all playing at the same time. I'm going to go, go to my uploads. I've got this other one, a feet and I'm going to here and you can have two videos together on this one page. When I hit play down the bottom, they both play simultaneously. It's really cool when you've got different angles of the same footage. That can be really cool. The other thing you can do is I can cut this and go back to this one being full screen and you can actually string videos together. Doing long form video editing inside of Canva is really tricky. But for short form stuff, it's perfect. Especially stringing together a few seconds here, I'm going to add another page. I'm going to paste it on here, to make this full screen as well. What it'll do, even though the pages, if I get the right size and I hit play. Actually, I want it to drag the playhead back to here. Watch actually let's get it so plays there. Watch this. When it plays across, it just stitches them together, it doesn't stop, they just keep playing. You can string a lot of videos together. So you're doing some basic editing. Thing you can do is lean on some of the tools we learned earlier on, where we were using remember the presentation when we hit left and right, we did a page transition, and we went from which one did I ban? I can't remember which one. Let's find out. Wait, wait, wait, wait, week, week, wait. Remember earlier on we did the transitions went and changed. I figured I'd update this video too. You already know it, though. I'm going to say, click on the timeline and then up here, you've got transitions. You don't have those anymore, they've moved them around. Remember what we can do is we can say we can hover in between two videos and say you add transition, get you to the same point as the rest of this video, or you can hit the little three little dots and say at transition. You can also right click down here and say Add transition. S of ways of doing it now, but you can't do it along the top at the moment. They went and moved it. And spoiler alert. The one I banned was hop. I remember now. I've watched the video. A B and D that video. Update O. What we could do dissolve, really simple dissolve. Now if I hit play, walking, walking. Can you see the dissolve there? Ready? Go go look at us. Awesome. It's easy to trim up edges, either using the trim option at the top or just dragging it down on the timeline and you can do transition between two sets of videos. By using transitions that we used earlier on, not chop. The other thing I want to show you before we move on is the presentation we had earlier. Let's go to this one is I'm going to go to this last page here and I can add a video this one we started with a video and look, it's got a little video icon. Oh. I keep forgetting with this one now. You've got to hit This is new. You need to open it and then hit Open a New tab. Is that catching anyone else out? Anyway, I'm going to be on page eight. I'm going to go to uploads. I'm going to go to my videos. I'm going to bring in, let's say, the walking on the beach one again, you see here, it's like, I've still got my chart. I've still got this thing. I got my video. I can decide whether this thing under playback is autoplay When I get to this slide, I guess what I'm trying to show you is you can have videos within presentations as well as making a video. This one here is a video to get export for social media. Or is this one just a video amongst a presentation? Okay. And you can do a lot of the same things. You can go to trim, in here. You can trim it up like you did before. Okay? It just operates a little differently. This thing is going to stay on this page, until you move to the next one. It's kind of has to get around it, but most of the time, that's all you need it for. You either have it as playback, auto playback or maybe you want the presentation to be the person who's kind of maybe viewing the presentation to be able to turn it on and off. It's up to you. All right, so that's the basics of doing some basic video editing inside of Canva. You can either start with a video format, which gives you some slightly different options or you can add video inside of previous presentation. All right, that is it. The second time around, I'm going to go check now whether I actually recorded the right screen. Fingers cross. If you watching this, I did work. Hey. I'll see you in the next video. 75. How to Apply Video Filters & Adjustments: This video, we're going to look at the filters that you can apply to video. We'll look at the adjustment panel as well and how it's different and very similar to images. We can either fix our images or give it a cool effect for our video. All right. Let's jump in and check it out. All right, so let's cover the main adjustments that you can do with the video selected. You can go into Edit like we do with images and you get a lot of the same features. Filters are easy. I'm not going to go through them. They Instagram style filters that you can put in before you go out to something like Instagram. Some really cool ones in there. Once you've found one you like, you can decide on how much of that filter gets applied, the intensity, right there. Actually, I'm going to remove mine? Because I'm going to show you another thing you can do. You can do the adjustments like we did with the images. We're going to adjust and we get much of the same features as before. We can play around with contrast and brightness. We want to darken it down, remember, we can remove these two highlights and brightness. Maybe get some white text moving over the top. Now, it's slightly different in here. We've got this other one fade. It's kind of just a really common effect. You can decide on how much you want that old school retro fade look. Other one is process. It's just a real exaggeration of color and contrast. It's cross processing is I think it's a photography term, but they use it on video as well. It's an effect. Don't worry too much about what it's doing. It's just a look. A lot of people just bump it up. The other one vignette, sometimes I'm like, why isn't that working? It's because this one here is cropped so much, the vignettes in there, but we just cropped it so much in the middle here that we're not actually seeing it, so that's not going to work for us. We're going to see that back to zero. But everything else is the same as we did with images, so we won't go through it. This one here though, I noticed that really needed. Not clicking on the timeline, clicking on the image and going to edit then going adjustment and the warmth in this one. I feel like needs to come out. It's way too orange. Anyway, if you have played around with it for a while and you want to go back, you can have the reset button to reset all the adjustments. The other things that we'll just throw in here as well is if I click off, click back on my image, go to Edit. There's some other features in here we won't cover too much. How much volume do you want? Do you need to enhance the voice? It's a pro feature, tidies it up a little bit. Do you want to slow down the playback? Do you want to get this thing to just play on repeat? And we looked at this earlier, play automatically when this page loads or it gets to lights here is the same as the one when we're looking at trim. Okay? We can look at all the highlights, and the background remover, I haven't had a lot of success with for video. Okay, you need to have a really perfect kind of thing for that to work, but give it a go, depending on what kind of look you want, you can play around with that in your own time as well. Alright, so video is a lot like the images. Okay? There's a few little extra features in the adjust panel. And because we did all that image editing earlier on, it's no problem for us. It's just moving images. Alright. I'll see you in the next video. 76. How to Animate Text & Change the Timing in Canva: Hi, everyone. We're going to look at animating text in a video. Look at our texts, all appears, all the different timing as well, which is probably the important part. It's going to utilize a lot of the skills that we already know, waiting for the last bit of text. Come on, is it going to appear? It's not there it is. Don't miss out. We're trying to play around with timing so it's not all just starting at the beginning. It utilizes a lot of the skills that we already know, which is awesome, which makes us easy. Let's jump in and start animating text in. All right. I've just added two lumps of text here, using the Playfair, and I found another font Avalon. If you just type it on the page and I have play, it just hangs around for the whole thing. It's maybe what you want, we're going to animate out. What we're going to do is I'm going to get my playhead right at the beginning. I'm right at the beginning of my animation. Click on Summer and we just add animate. We've done this before, we did our presentation. We did it for objects appearing when we're presenting, we're going to do it during a video. It's the exact same function. That's why it's easy. Someone's going to pick blur for this one, and like before, you can just play around with things like speed if you've got the Pro account. You can decide on whether it's word or element. I'm going to go for per word that feeds in like that. You can see if I hover above it, previews it. I can also hit play on my playhead to see it. My video is finding it a little bit tricky to play. If it does a bit jumpy, it might be that your machines just struggling a little bit. Maybe it's really high quality video, very long. It will export okay, which we'll get to in a bit, there you go. Do one more, and then I'll show you how to do the timing. I'm going to say, you, my friend, I'm going to animate, I'm going to pick or succession. Go over this kind breezy, slow kind look how summary and good it is. You get the idea. One thing is, though, this thing they all appear at the beginning and they stay for the whole thing. What we want to do is get it so that it plays for a little bit, then summer starts, then weekend. What you need to do is pick any of them, right click them and say, I would like you to show the timing. This is where it gets a little bit more complicated. You're like, it's this. You've got now the video separate from the text, which means I can say the text can start a little bit further along. In this case, it's the summer sale text. I'm going to might play headba. Watch this. It's going to play for a while until it gets to this timeline and then Summer sale. All right. How do you get the second one to do it? Same thing. You, my friend, this weekend only. There it is. We didn't even need to turn on the show timing. Now I can say that appears just afterwards. We've got a bit of a build going, so it's telling a story a bit more. Summer sale, then this weekend, you can build the different elements up. You can drag them from the other end as well. So you might want to get them to stop. Then grab some text. I'm going to add textbox, and I'm going to say, don't miss out. You can see I've been playing around with the line spacing here. We're not letter spacing. Back to zero and the line spacing on this font is a little bit different, and what I want to do is get this to kind of appear after this. And you'll notice that it kind of jumps down onto the next timeline. It goes, Oh, I want to be down here now, just to make it a little bit more usable here. What's going to happen now is it's going to play. And then these guys are going to go away, and then this one will start. Excellent. The way that these ones run out is you can decide on it. When you are using your animation, you can say, is it animating on Enter on exit or on both? I've got mine on both. Well, it's not playing, they're all on the page. But when it starts playing, they'll all come in and time in. You can turn this off down the bottom here. They can get quite complicated. You can say, right, I want you right click to hide the timing. All right, now it's just kind of one big lump. The timing is still in there, hasn't forced it in because you can go in there and just show timing again and it all comes out. I'm going to pick my last animation and then let you go. Now, just a reminder that there are some basic ones in terms of animations, but text specifically has its own set that aren't for inanimate objects. Well, non text objects, sorry. Things like squares and images don't have these writing ones here. So don't forget that these ones are in here that you might want to check out. Ah, look at that. Clarify. But slower speed it up. Here we go. And that's going to be us. Alright, that's animating text. Don't miss out. Where we go. Clarify. It's going to only appear right in the middle. That took way too long to come in, so I'm gonna mess around with that. But the cool thing about it is that the tools that we learned earlier on we were doing our presentation all apply here. So we're playing around with that animation. The only difference now is we have a bit of a timeline going. Oh, one thing I just thought of is grab an lement let's say I grab rectangle and I make it nice and big. You'll notice that it's above let's have a look. Let's move it over here. You see it is underneath the summersail but it is above don't miss out. You can see it here. What you can do is you can get a position and use your normal layering so I can move it backwards or move it forwards a bit and you can see, you I can move forwards above summer as well, and it moves up this list here. Above weekends, I need to be above that, four, foot, four, here we go. You can adjust the layers. You can't drag them here. Feel like I want to drag them on that player list. But you just drag them in the normal position way. You can go to layers if that's easier and just drag it in between them just like we did before. Except now we're doing a video. That is definitely it. All right, I'll see you in the next video. 77. How to Change Stickers & Add Motion Effects: Hi, everyone. In this video, we're going to look at stickies, this arrow down the bottom here. It's a pre made animation that is done inside of Canva and we can get it. We can figure out what we can change, what we can't change. And if we don't have premade ones, we can get this thing to wiggle about. You can take inanimate objects, add some motion effects to it, and now get it to jiggle around. Let me show you how Alright, let's start with stickers. Let's go to elements and let's scroll down to find stickers. Let's go to CO and let's have a look at the arrow stickers. There's a bunch in here. What you'll find is that there's not a huge amount here. I thought there would be more often what people do, they'll add stickers via the app that they're using. So maybe Instagram or whatever app you're using on your phone will have a lot of stickies as well. Let's have a look at the arrow ones. Some of them like this one here, it's P one, you can't control the colors. You can't control the timing either of these animations, they're just fixed. Things you can change like this arrow here. This arrow has some color changes in it. I can go through and pick off white there. In terms of the timing, I can't do a lot to anything else in here. Let's close that down there annoying. You can obviously rotate them. You can't play around with timing, I can scale them. Okay. You can't do the timing within the animation, but you can do the timing with the timing that we've already learned. We can go down here and say, actually, let's show timing. This one here doesn't even have a name doesn't know what to call this thing. Sometimes it does, sometimes it doesn't. And I want it to be appearing here and I can add the effect like I did before. With it selected here on the page, I can say, I want to animate you and I can say, actually, let's look at a other than just these animations, there's these other ones down the bottom here, called motion effects. They're similar. They're more I don't know, they're like a group of effects together. I don't know why they separate them, but they do. They have motion effects. I like the wiggle one. I like the pulse one, like the flicker one. You can decide. You can animate the whole thing, but you can't change your animation inside of stickers. You got it. What you can do, though, is let's say that we do want to add something that's not a sticky and animated. That's where those animation effects come in handy. Let's say I like looking for the thing like blob. If I type in blob, you can get some interesting. Let's have a look at the blobs. You can find a free one. I use this one here. It has the colors, so I can go and change those to brand colors. But the cool thing about it, it is not animated. I want it down over here is. Actually, I'm going to get mine to appear a little bit later in my animation. You're going to appear after all of this and the don't miss out part. What we can do though, is with it selected on the video as we can go to animate, go down to those motion effects. Something like wiggle can be quite interesting here. Just give it a play. You can see turn something that's not a sticky or an animation into an animation by giving it some of these motion effects. The other thing you can do is pause. I'm going to go there add my logo. You might have to copy and paste yours if you're on the free account from a different document. I got my brand kit. What you can do is you can say, you two guys going to grab this back one, which I've added the wiggle. Going to go into wiggle and say, down the bottom here, I'm going to say wiggle I had to click it again to get remove animation. Normally, that's appeared there. Anyway, I had to click it again to go remove animation. And what I can do is I can group these two. ComanG, Control G on a PC, then wiggle them. Now I'll show you this just because you can obviously get things to animate together if you group them. The other thing you can do is if you've grouped stuff, there's something interesting about that. Anyway, you can actually separate them in here just to see what's in the group, Toggle them in, toggle them out if you need to select on one and not the other and obviously, you can right click and ungroup them. There you go. Just a quick one. There are pre made animations in stickies and you can get things animated yourself that aren't naturally animated by adding motion effects to it. All right. That is it. I'll see you in the next video. 78. How do you Animate Photos in Canva: Hello. In this video, we are going to animate images. We're going to try and get them to do stuff to kind of make them feel like videos. We do slow stuff, we'll do fast stuff. I just kind of a bit of movement specific for videos, and now that we know how to use that timeline, we can do interesting stuff. All right, let's animate photos. Alright, to get started, I've created a blank video mobile document like we did for that first one, and I've thrown three images on there. They're in your exercise files called Image Video oh one oh two oh three. Just dump them on the page. Now, we'll do it the easy way and I'll show the hardway at the end, only because you'll bump into other people and templates that have made using the hardware and I don't want you to be surprised about them. Let's start with easyway. All we're going to do is have three pages and we're going to have one image on every page and I'm going to make them really big so they cover the pages. Wait, the I'm just going to cut these and put them on the next page. Three separate pages. We can play around with the timing of these pages. I can select the page down here and I can say you are going to be they're all going to be 3 seconds. Let's say, let's apply to all the pages. Now if I hit play, it feels a bit long. We'll play through them more. Okay, 1 second long to all the pages to all the pages. All right. Now to get the bit of movement in there, it's pretty easy. When I select on an image, let's go to this first page here. I play he along, click on it. You can go to animate. And when you're animating images, you actually get a special set of animations here that we didn't have before when we were playing with video. It's just photo movement. It's the same as these ones. They've just separated them out to I don't know, give you some good options for videos. I'm going to do this slow Zoom for these guys and because I got the pro version, I can slow it down. For this one here, I'm going to do the photo rise and this one here, I'm going to do the PhotoFlow. Let's preview. We've been playing in here. You can actually hit the preview button and it'll separate them on a different screen. It's a bit fast going. But you get the idea. I'm going to slow these down. I'm going to play with the timing. I thought 1 second was going to be perfect. It's not. It's a bit fast. I'm going to close it down and play around with that. But that's essentially it. That's the easy way. Separate pages, give those pages a timing. Apply to them all, preview them again. There you go. A little bit more patient. I might go longer as well in terms of the timing and I might go individually one of these, play around with Photo Zoom and play around with the different options in here, whether it's scaling it. It's not such a big scale when it does do the zoom in or the speed and pace of the different options. I promise you would do the hard way and the easy way. Let's do the hard way only because I've bumped into templates that have done it this way and you'll be like, how does that work? I'm going to go into here and it's not hard now that we know how to do it with video, I'm going to grab you and I'm going to go to this page here. I'm going to say this page is going to be a bit longer, it's going to make it 10 seconds. I'm going to paste it on here. What I'm going to do is I'm going to right click and say show Timing. Remember this? It's just a different way of doing the same thing. I'm going to use the same page, but I'm going to have this image going there. I'm going to grab this image from. Copy it, go to this page, hit paste, and I'm going to shrink it up so that it occupies in there. So we're going to get to the exact same point. If I copy this last one, copy you, go to this page, go to paste, make it shorter. As long as we can see that timing, we drag them so that we're going in between here. We're transitioning within one page these three different images. It doesn't really matter. The end product will be the same, but you will find ones that you'll get and you open it up and it'll be the timing will be hidden, you'll be like, How the heck are they doing this? It's because they've just gone and viewed the timing and shrink them up so they fit one after the other. Matter which one. All right. The other thing we can do is we can do page transitions. We can say, Ar over here, I can say I'm on this page here and I can say, not the actual image, but if I click on the timeline down here, remember. Yes, do remember. Remember, it's not up here. Okay, remember, transitions have moved. It's like the third time I've told you, you're like, stop telling us, Dan. But I want to remind you and I've got a bonus. So you can click down here. Transitions doesn't appear, but you can right click down here and say transition. Add a transition or change one if there is an existing one. Remember, you can hover in between stuff to get that one, and this is where the bonus comes in. You can't hover in between these because they're really tightly squished. What you can do over here is the thing I've learned in between making this course you little thing that I didn't know existed. You can zoom in on the thing at the top. Watch this Folklick at once, can you see it toggles to the timeline down the bottom? I was very happy finding that. I'm sharing it. There you go. Now you can hover in between them and go transition because we can stretch it out if you want to go back, can you see them toggling there to making this bigger and smaller? Yeah. Remember, hover between them. Go to the little three little dots that I avoided in the last course from clicking, change transition, or you can right click it. All right. There you go. The last of the transition updates. I handed back to past Dan. Bye. Transition is going to be a slide between them all. Now we're going to have a bit of both going. It's going to fade in and then transition across. It's like a jewel thing going. The image itself has an animation and the transition between the pages. You get some interesting combos. Maybe you only just want one of them. That's animating images that we can create videos when we might not actually have footage. We can turn images into video. All right, that is it. I'll see you in the next video. 79. Where to get Free Videos to use in Canva: One. Hey, in this video, I'm going to show you the places I go and get commercially usable free videos for your Canva projects. I share the good places at the beginning of the video, and then I waffle on a little bit about I don't know, things about free and commercial use and royalty free. Hang around if you do want all the waffle about free video, but otherwise, let me show you my favorite spots. Places that I go to. I've made a list at the bottom of our class project stock. Right down the bottom, there's a new title that I've just added right down the bottom called free Stock Video, and it's these ones that I use the most. There are loads of places to get this stuff from. These are the ones that I use. Let me know in the comments. If you've got another great place that isn't here, let us know in the comments, share your great spot. I use the most pixels.com. There's a video option and under Pixel Bay, and there's a video option as well. I sometimes end up in these places here, Verivo and Verisi. Verisi starting to be jam packed with ads. Hey, with all of them, there are some free ones and some paid ones. You can see here on VIEs, there's a pro ones. Now, of course, there are free videos baked into Canva, Canva elements. If I go into and scroll down and find video, I can go to see all. There's a bunch of videos in here. There's some pro ones and some not pro ones, some free ones. The only reason I jump out to some of the other sites is the search function inside of Canva is not great. Whereas in some of these other websites, there's just a lot more where you can go through and you can get a bit better with your searching. There's often a lot of filters and extra stuff in here and it's just bigger and easier to use. The thing you're looking for, the one thing I'll share with you is you're looking for free stock video. Stock just means it's in stock, and it's ready to be used. The other term is, where's another one. Free stock footage is what you want. What you don't want don't want, where's one? There's one in here. Can I find it? It's not here anywhere? Called Royalty Free. Royalty free sounds like it might be actually free, but it just means you don't have to pay a royalty whenever you use it. Royalty free often still means a paid video for some videos and especially in the days of gones you used to have to buy a video and pay for royalties every time you played it. Depending on what depending on where it ended up and how many times you played it and how big the audience was, it was a sliding scale of fees. Then there was content that was royalty free. You paid for it once and you got to use it as many times as you like. That now there's commercial free stock photographs, which is free free, and you're allowed to use it as much as you like. The one thing you will have to do though, is just double check the licensing for it. Have a look at one of this one. What I'm looking for is I'm trying to find out this is free to use, let's see what the terms and conditions say. Pixels here are super clear. What's allowed, what's not allowed. Basically, you can use them for anything. You just can't use them especially if people are visible, you can see their faces, you can't use them in a bad light, that's offensive. There's some dos and don'ts that pretty clear and understandable. You can dive in further if you need to. Generally, especially for the work that we're doing in this course, they're totally allowed to be. Just out of interest, what I like to do sometimes is when I'm going through and I'm finding videos, I'm like, Oh, I like this one or this one here. Where is this one from? You can see this is a Canva original. You're not going to find this on, say, Pixel Bay, but there'll be stuff on Pixel Bay that's not here. Let's have a look at this one. This one is Canva original. There's some not Canva originals. You wait there. You can see this one here is a Pixel Bay one. I just like to look where they're coming from. I think Canva try and push their own originals so they don't have to pay these licensing to these other people. So here you go. Always interesting to know where your videos are coming from, especially because you can trace it back. You can find out what website it came from, who the videographer was, and then you might be able to find more in that series if you've got a person on a phone. But you want that person to have a phone. Sick around, have a look, see what website it's from, see who the artist was, see who the creator was, and then see if there's another version of that. Often they'll shoot a bunch of different videos at the same time, cut them all up and share them on some of these sites. Somehow I turned that into a long video. There we go. We to find free videos online outside of Canva. There you go. These four. I'll see you in the next video. 80. How to Exporting Video for Social Media in Canva: Everyone. I'm going to show you how to export video from Cava both on the desktop and on the mobile phone. Alright, let's jump in. Right. To get started exporting a video, just go to share, go to Download, and basically head download. You'll get this MP four format. It should have chosen it by default. Okay? If you're on the free account, that's basically all you can do. If you're on the pro account. All you can do is you can adjust the quality. We want it to be It says social media, but just upload ten ADP. We know how to say that now. Okay? So ten ADP is kind of a really good size for social media and then that one says social media. Do that. And if you're on all you can do. If you're on the Pro account, you can go smaller, but you can also go bigger. If you have started with a four K size image, you need to really start your video that size. You can't just scale it up here. The other thing you can do on the Pro account is you can download the separate pages is different files. Now, I'm going to hit the download option and give it a place on hard drive. You can see everybody done it. So it takes quite a while to format. Producing video, even though you can preview it here, it takes a little while for Canva to do. Does it in the Cloud and then it will download for you. So kind processes it and starts downloading it. It's kind of mixing the two up. So it has to make the video and then download it. So it takes a little while depending on the length of the video. Let me cut to a finished download. Right, there is downloading and you can give it a name. There it is. It is 67 megabytes. It's a lot bigger than an image. So getting it onto your phone, you can either use what I use is to use Dropbox or you can use Google Drive or whatever the kind file sharing thing you use is to share to your phone. Because email doesn't really work with that big a file. Platforms let you post straight from the browser, Instagram now lets you, but Tik Tok does or doesn't. I can't remember. Often, there's a lot better tools using your phone if you're going to social media. But if you're going to YouTube, you can obviously go straight from here, straight into YouTube studio. But if you're going to use your phone, it's probably instead of using the download computer and then share it to your phone, let's go straight to your phone. And we did this earlier, but let's say we want to go and let's say we're going to Instagram or one of the other platforms. If I click on Instagram, it's going to say, I want to post it immediately via the app. It's going to give you this QR code, which we hinted at earlier, but it's a good reminder. This does nothing. Opens up the Canva app, and then you have to start doing things. You can just not do that and go straight to your Canva app. No exporting, no nothing. They're tied together, they're both accessing the same files. Let's jump over to the phone and do that real quick. Alright, so let's open up the app, okay? And it should be kind of, like, the most recent design. And then you just go to the top right hand corner, the little Share button. Okay, you can either download it if you're going to share it across lots of different social media accounts, okay? Or if you've got the one along the top here that you want X, Facebook, I want Instagram. Where are you? There it is there. And like we saw on the desktop app, there's, like, immediately post and continue, and it's going to again, create it in the cloud and start downloading it onto my phone. We've got these kind of, like, cool, weavy lines that I do like. Alright, there you go. And it has just dumped it straight into Instagram, opened up Instagram for me, and I can add a lot of the details, okay, that I need things like stickers and dates and votes and polls and all that sort of stuff. There are so much more options on the mobile device of social media apps than using the browser version, but there you go. Um, yeah, ready to go. Uh, you don't even need to export from your desktop. Just open up Canva on your phone and start doing it from there. It's also really cool I don't know, see your video on little tiny device. I don't know. I find it exciting anyway. Alright, that is it. Exporting a video out of Canva. And that is Dan's hairy hands. Yes, they are. These hands will see you in the next video. Alright. See you there. 81. Class Project 19 - Video: It's class project time. We're going to connect all the things that we've learned about video, we've been following along. Is going to be easy if you've been watching, waiting for the class project, now's the time. You've been asked to create a ten plus second video for your client. Make sure it's on brand, fonts, colors, logo, that type of thing. I don't mind what the video is about. It could be an ad like we've built. Here's some examples. You might have a good idea for a video already, could be humorous, it could be more on brand and ready for your portfolio. I don't mind. Brain awareness, educate inform. These are high level topics that might spark some ideas for you. Not too worried about the concept. It's more about practicing the tools in this requirements are user brand elements. A orientation, landscape or portrait. I don't mind if it's not going for social media, maybe for I don't know. YouTube or TV. I don't mind. I want you to use two or more video clips either from Canva or from some of those free sites that I showed you. I want you to edit them in some way, just to practice editing. Experiment with the filters and adjustments. It might be that you add some filters and adjustments to add consistency across the two separate video clips. That's a good way of using it. Be small, can be big, want you to experiment with it, really. Want two or more text animations. It's like these things here. Where my two text animations. So I say tech fades in differently from the Don't Miss out. We're doing two different. Okay, one more sticker. Mine ended up being that arrow that appears down the bottom here. You're not allowed to use my arrow. Use your own arrow. You can use whatever you like, but use it from the stickers that are built in Tucanva then I want you to animate one more static graphic. That just means we did it earlier on when we did it with the logo that appears down the bottom here. See, we animated this to make it look like a sticker, even though it wasn't. It was just a flat graphic from the graphics. So I want you to animate that as well, and I want you to have one or more photos. Now, I've said 10 seconds, but you can have it as long as you like. The big one in this one is sharing it. We're going to export an MP four and sharing the MP four can be a little tricky on the different sites. We need to upload it somewhere and share the link. Either sign up for YouTube, if you don't have an account, you can upload videos there quite easily, keep them unlisted, and you can share the link to it. Vimeo does a very similar thing. That's often what people use for these courses. They're just sign up for a free Vimeo account, upload the video, and then input the URL when they're finished the shared so instead of uploading the MP four to the class projects, upload a link from your video that you've uploaded to YouTube Vmeo. Another one you can do if you're a pro account user is you can try and do a GIF. The gifts never look super great, but that'll work. If I go to GIF. Sorry, go to Share and go to Download. I can share a gift as an option. We're not going to have any sound, it's going to be a little bit jumpy, but that'll work as well, and you can upload that directly, as long as it's not too big. If it's huge megabytes, it might find problems, but you might want to give that a go. The other alternative is to upload a link to something you've uploaded to your social media. Could stick it up on your account and just say, Hey, practicing this course and link to that. If you do upload it to your socials, take me at the pointy end of the class. I always find it interesting to see where people get to after doing these videos. There you go. Reasonably big one. If you've been following along, it's just the things we've been stepping through so far this one here can be a little tricky for some people. Hopefully, one of these ways of sharing will work for you. Enjoy making your video. Be proud of what you make. It is really fun when you do see it on your phone, like I did in the last video. I was like, I made that. I was awesome. All right. I will see you in the next video. 82. Whats Next after you Canva Course: Oh, no. It's the end. Oh, yes, it's the end. It's kind of like a bit of both. It is kind of it's amazing that we've got to the end, and I don't know. Feels good. You're like, huh, man, I did that thing. Okay? It's a big course. Good work for making it this far. And, oh, no, because we don't get to hang out anymore. It's been fun hanging out with you for the last set of videos. It's a long time together. I know I know you're kind of mostly a camera, but I can feel you back there. Hi five finishing. Here you go. We'll do it to air together. You did it. I saw you. Hey, E, this video is all about what is next. What can you do after this course to kind of set yourself up? So let's do that. Now, the best thing for you to get better in camera and in design is just to keep doing more stuff. Trying to find a project to work on challenges online, competitions. Friends or friends, family that you can do work for, okay, and kind of practice these things. Work on your own product, tackle anything you can because it's basically reps from now on. You kind of know the tools. You just need to actually put them into practice. And that's the best thing you can do. Now, in terms of courses that you might do next, it's kind of five strains. Now, I don't know you exactly, so I don't know exactly what you want to do next. So let me give you some for instances, especially if you want to carry on with training with me. It's kind of a photo design, video UX web. Those are the kind of four parts. So if you're more in the photography thing, you're like, Oh, that's what I need to do next. I've got a light room course and a photoshop course, okay? They focus on around photography and especially light room about retouching and getting photos up and amazing. And the crossover for both photo and say, graphic design, getting more kind of, like, Canvaesque in the graphic design sense is Photoshop is good for photos, but also used heavily for graphic designers. Okay? We can do some things in Canva, but often you need to go out to something like Photoshop, and do more advanced things. So Photoshop, Illustrator and design is kind of professional tools for graphic design. Not the Canva is not, but that's kind of a lot of what, you know, if you're looking for a job in the industry, a lot of work is around those tools, and I got courses on those, both centrals and advanced, if you want to jump in those. The other one is UX design is a design kind of pathway. The biggest tool at the moment is Canva. I've got courses on Canva and Adobe exxty if you want to go check out those, the web option, if that's something you can, you know, you want to get more into, there is a no code kind of web flow course that I've got, okay? So you can, it's more drag and drop. Yeah, it's kind of professional web design creation for more designers. So check that out. Or if you want to go into the kind of more code version of creating websites, I've got essential web essentials HTRCSS JavaScript. And the last one is video. If you were digging the kind of motion graphics at the end and kind of felt there's some cool things in Canva, but if you want to do more custom stuff, I've got a premiere pro and after effects courses on those as well, if you want to go down the video route. So those are the kind of next steps depending on which way you want to go, but also like a round for pause for the editors for this course. Taylor Com and Jason Hummels. They spent a lot of time getting this thing ready for you guys. Also for the reviews from Pedjo Almeta, he helps out with that as well. So thanks, team. Now, a little ask from me for you at the end here is referrals. That's how I kind of the lifeblood of what I do. So if you like this course and you can figure out a way of sharing it with anybody everywhere, anyhow, whatever your industry is, I'd love a link back to the course, referral to the course. Anything like that really helps grow what I'm doing. Keeps me doing what I do, keeps me employed. And that is it. That is us. We are done, Cava essentials, done and dusted. It was a lot of work, a lot of videos. I hope you learned a lot, had some fun along the way, enjoyed it. But this is it. This is the sad goodbye ending part. Where does us. Bye. I'll see you in another course, probably, though, right? Don't be sad. Alright. Bye. Two hands. Feet black.